NUMBERS - Spreadsheet APPLE - Free user manual and instructions

Name: NUMBERS
Brand: APPLE
Rating: 9 (239 reviews)

Find the device manual for free NUMBERS APPLE in PDF.

📄 946 pages

EN ⬇ Download 💬 AI Question ❓ 25 questions ⚙️ Specs

View the manual :

Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.

This manual is not available in your language

Desired language Your email address

Product type	Spreadsheet software for Mac OS X
Version	iWork '08 (Numbers 1.0)
Main functions	Creating spreadsheets, tables, formulas, charts, formatting, import/export Excel, PDF, CSV
Supported file formats	.numbers (native), .xls, .xlsx, .csv, .pdf, .ofx
Interface languages	French, English, German, Spanish, Italian, etc.
Minimum system requirements	Mac with PowerPC G4 or Intel processor, Mac OS X 10.4.10 or later, 512 MB RAM
Number of sheets per document	Unlimited (depending on memory)
Available chart types	Bars, columns, lines, pie, scatter, 3D
Built-in calculation functions	Over 250 functions (financial, statistical, trigonometric, etc.)
Import from Address Book	Yes
Export to iWeb	Yes
Printing	Print preview, headers/footers, page numbering, adjustable margins
Conditional formatting	Yes
Sorting and filtering tables	Yes
Maintenance and cleaning	Updates via Apple Software Update; keep system up to date
Security	Document password protection (via operating system)
Spare parts and repairability	Apple technical support, online assistance, repair via Apple Store or authorized service center
General information	Professional spreadsheet software from Apple's iWork suite, comprehensive 946-page user manual in PDF format

Frequently Asked Questions - NUMBERS APPLE

How to create a new table in Numbers?

Click the Tables button in the toolbar and choose a predefined table, or select Insert > Table. You can also drag cells from another table.

How to add a formula to a cell?

Select the cell, type the = sign to open the Formula Editor, then enter your formula. You can also use the Formula bar or the Function Browser.

Can I import an Excel file into Numbers?

Yes, Numbers can import .xls, .xlsx, .csv and .ofx files. Drag the file onto the Numbers icon or use File > Open.

How to create a chart from table data?

Select the cells containing the data, then click Charts in the toolbar and choose a chart type. You can modify the plotted data via the Chart Inspector.

How to print a spreadsheet with headers?

Switch to Print Preview (View menu), enable layout display, then click in the header or footer to add text or page numbers.

Is it possible to add images to table cells?

Yes, drag an image from the Media Browser or Finder directly into a cell. You can also use the Cell Inspector to set an image fill.

How to sort table data?

Select the table, click the Sort button in the toolbar, or use Table > Sort. Choose the sort column and order (ascending or descending).

Can I protect my Numbers file with a password?

Numbers does not offer built-in password protection, but you can use Mac OS X encryption features (e.g., FileVault) or add a password to the file via Disk Utility.

How to add Address Book data to a table?

Use Insert > Address Book and follow the instructions to map fields. You can add data to an existing table or create a new one.

What to do if a font is missing in the document?

Numbers will display a warning dialog. Click Replace Font to choose a replacement font. You can also install the missing font in your Mac's Fonts folder.

User questions about NUMBERS APPLE

15 questions about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

How to insert page numbers in the footer of an Apple Numbers document?

Frequently Asked Questions - 24/04/2026

Response Notice-Facile

In the Numbers application from Apple, there is no built-in feature to automatically add page numbers in the footer like in some word processing software. However, you can work around this limitation using the following methods:

1. Manually add a column for numbers

Open your Numbers document.
Insert a new column where you want to display the numbers (for example, at the beginning or end of the table).
Manually enter the numbers corresponding to each row or section.
Format this column to look like a footer (smaller font size, gray color, centered alignment, etc.).

2. Use text boxes on printed pages

If you want the numbers to appear only when printing, you can add text boxes in the header or footer through the print option.
In the print window, click on Show Print Options and look for header and footer options.
You can manually insert a page number, but this method is not dynamic and requires manual updating if the document changes.

3. Export to another software for automatic numbering

If automatic numbering is essential, you can export your Numbers document to PDF or Excel format.
Then, use a word processing software or a PDF editor that allows you to automatically add page numbers in the footer.

In summary, Numbers does not handle automatic footer numbering. The best solution is to manually add a column to simulate this numbering or to use external software for printing with page numbers.

Respond (be the first)

How to select and use non-contiguous cells in Apple Numbers for calculations?

Frequently Asked Questions - 09/02/2026

Response Notice-Facile

In Apple Numbers, it is common to need to manipulate cells that are not adjacent, especially when you want to perform calculations like summing or other operations on non-contiguous ranges of cells. Here’s how to handle this situation:

1. Selecting non-contiguous cells

To select multiple cells that are not next to each other, hold down the Command (⌘) key on your keyboard while clicking on each cell you want to include.
This method allows you to highlight several scattered cells in the sheet.

2. Using non-contiguous cells in a formula

Numbers does not directly allow referencing a non-contiguous range in a single range, but you can sum multiple ranges or individual cells by separating them with plus signs (+) in the formula.

For example, to sum cells B1, B3, and B5, you can write:

=B1 + B3 + B5

If you have many cells to include, this can become tedious. In this case, it is advisable to:

Create a helper column where you mark, for example, with a "1" the rows to include.
Use a conditional function like SUMIF to sum only the corresponding cells.

3. Example with SUMIF

Suppose column A contains criteria and column B contains values, and you want to sum the values in B where column A matches a specific criterion:

=SUMIF(A, "Criterion", B)

This method allows you not to worry about the contiguity of the cells, as the function automatically filters the rows according to the criterion.

Summary

To manually select non-adjacent cells, use the Command (⌘) + click.
To calculate with non-contiguous cells, sum them in the formula or use conditional functions.
For complex selections, a helper column with criteria makes calculations easier.

Respond (be the first)

How to perform a conditional sum of a column in Numbers on Mac based on a specific value in the previous column?

Frequently Asked Questions - 09/02/2026

Response Notice-Facile

In Apple Numbers on Mac, to perform a conditional sum of a column based on a specific value in the previous column, you need to use the SUMIF function. This function evaluates the cells in a range according to a criterion and sums the corresponding values from another range.

The basic syntax is as follows: =SUMIF(criteria_range, "value", sum_range). For example, if you have categories in column A and amounts in column B, and you want to sum the amounts only for a specific category, you would write: =SUMIF(A:A, "Category", B:B). This formula will check each cell in column A and only sum the values in column B when column A exactly matches your value.

To set up this formula in your Numbers sheet, first select the cell where you want to display the result. Then, click on the function icon (fx) in the toolbar or use the Insert > Function menu to open the function browser. Search for SUMIF and select it to get an input assistant that will guide you in setting the parameters.

It is recommended to specify the exact ranges rather than entire columns for clarity and performance. For example, use =SUMIF(A2:A100, "value", B2:B100) if your data is between rows 2 and 100, thus excluding headers. Remember that the criterion value must exactly match the text or number in the previous column; case sensitivity may not always be ignored depending on your settings.

If you have multiple conditions to apply (for example, summing based on two different columns), Numbers cannot handle multiple criteria in a single SUMIF function. The solution is to create several distinct SUMIF formulas and sum them in a separate cell with a simple addition, for example: =SUMIF(A:A, "Category1", B:B) + SUMIF(A:A, "Category2", B:B).

Respond (be the first)

How to repeat a table title on each page when printing in Apple Numbers?

Frequently Asked Questions - 01/02/2026

Response Notice-Facile

To repeat a title or header row on each page when printing in Apple Numbers, follow these simple steps:

Steps to set a repeated header row

Open your Numbers document containing the relevant table.
Select the table in which you want the title to be repeated.
Click on the row that contains the title or column headers to select it.
In the menu bar at the top, click on "Table".
In the dropdown menu, choose "Set as header row".

Once this operation is completed, the selected row will automatically be repeated at the top of each page when printing or exporting your document to PDF.

Additional information

This feature is particularly useful for tables that span multiple pages, to maintain data readability.
You can set multiple header rows if necessary, by repeating the procedure on several rows.
The repetition of titles does not appear in the Numbers interface, but only when printing or in print preview.

Respond (be the first)

How to create a dropdown list for all cells in a table in Apple Numbers?

Frequently Asked Questions - 20/01/2026

Response Notice-Facile

To create a dropdown list in table cells in Apple Numbers, you need to add a pop-up menu to each cell. A pop-up menu allows you to predefine the values that a cell can contain, thus limiting the possible entries to your choices.

To add a pop-up menu to cells:

Select the cell or cells where you want to add the dropdown list.
Click on the Other Cell Formats button located in the format bar at the top of the window.
In the dropdown menu, select Pop-up Menu to create a list with the default settings.

To define the items in your list:

Once the pop-up menu is created, click on the Inspector button in the toolbar, then on Cell Inspector.
Make sure Pop-up Menu is selected in the Cell Format menu.
You will see placeholder entries in the Cell Inspector. Click on each entry to modify it and type the value you want to add to your list.
To add a new item to the list, click on the + sign and type the value. Numbers are treated as numbers and not as text.
To remove an item, click on the - sign next to that item.

To apply the same list to multiple cells:

After creating your pop-up menu in one cell, select that cell.
Drag the handle in the bottom right corner of the cell to the other cells where you want to add the same list. This will copy the format and values of the pop-up menu.
You can also copy the cell and paste its format only into other cells.

Once configured, cells with a pop-up menu can only be modified using the dropdown list, ensuring the consistency and validity of your data.

Respond (be the first)

How to insert and use a checkbox in a formula in Apple Numbers?

Frequently Asked Questions - 20/01/2026

Response Notice-Facile

In Apple Numbers, it is possible to insert a checkbox in a cell and use it in formulas to create conditional calculations or dynamic displays.

Steps to insert a checkbox:

Select the cell where you want to add the checkbox.
Open the Format panel by clicking on the corresponding icon at the top right.
In the Cell tab, change the Cell Type by selecting Checkbox.

Using the checkbox in a formula:

The checkbox has a boolean value: TRUE if checked, FALSE if unchecked. You can therefore use it directly in your formulas.

For example, if the checkbox is in cell A1, you can write a formula in another cell to display text based on its state:

=IF(A1; "Enabled"; "Disabled")

This formula will display "Enabled" if the checkbox is checked, and "Disabled" otherwise.

Usage examples:

Calculate a value only if the checkbox is checked: =IF(A1; B1 * 2; 0)
Count the number of checked boxes in a range: =COUNTIF(range; TRUE)

These features allow you to make your tables interactive and customized according to your needs.

Respond (be the first)

How to create a formula in Numbers to check if a year is a leap year?

Frequently Asked Questions - 13/01/2026

Response Notice-Facile

To determine if a year is a leap year in Numbers, you need to use a formula that applies the rules of the Gregorian calendar. This formula checks three conditions: the year is divisible by 4, it is not a century (unless divisible by 400).

Assuming the year to check is in cell A1. In another cell, enter the following formula:

=IF(AND(MOD(A1, 4) = 0, OR(MOD(A1, 100) <> 0, MOD(A1, 400) = 0)), "Leap Year", "Not a Leap Year")

The MOD function calculates the remainder of the division. MOD(A1, 4) = 0 checks that the year is divisible by 4, which is a necessary condition for a leap year. Then, MOD(A1, 100) <> 0 checks that the year is not a multiple of 100 (i.e., a century like 1900 or 2100). Finally, MOD(A1, 400) = 0 captures the special case of centuries that are still leap years if they are divisible by 400.

The AND function requires that all logical conditions are simultaneously true: the year must be divisible by 4, AND it must either not be a century or be divisible by 400. The OR function provides this alternative: "not a century OR divisible by 400". Finally, the IF function displays "Leap Year" if all conditions are met, otherwise "Not a Leap Year".

For example, the year 2024 is divisible by 4 and is not a century, so the formula returns "Leap Year". The year 1900 is divisible by 4 and by 100, but not by 400, so it returns "Not a Leap Year". The year 2000 is divisible by 4, by 100 AND by 400, so it returns "Leap Year".

Respond (be the first)

How to automatically turn a cell red in Numbers when a date is 15 days from the current date?

Frequently Asked Questions - 29/12/2025

Response Notice-Facile

To automatically turn a cell red in Numbers when the date it contains is 15 days from the current date, you can use the conditional formatting feature. Here are the steps to follow:

Select the cell or range of cells containing the dates to check.
In the toolbar, click on the Format button (at the top right).
In the panel that opens, choose Conditional Formatting.
Click on Add a Rule.
In the dropdown menu of rules, select Date is.
Choose the option "in the next 15 days" or "in the 15 days before" depending on whether you want to include future or past dates.
Then set the formatting style, for example, the text or background color to red.
Confirm by clicking on Done.

This rule will automatically apply the red color to cells whose date is within 15 days of the current date, thus facilitating the visualization of upcoming deadlines.

Respond (be the first)

What separator should be used between arguments in a formula in Numbers, a comma or a semicolon?

Frequently Asked Questions - 29/12/2025

Response Notice-Facile

In Apple's Numbers, the separator used between the arguments of a formula mainly depends on your regional settings, particularly the decimal separator. Numbers automatically inserts a comma (,) between arguments when you select cells, but you need to replace it with a semicolon (;) if the decimal separator for your location is a comma (as is the case in French).

For example, in France where the decimal separator is the comma, you should write:

=SUM(A1;A2;A3)

and not:

=SUM(A1,A2,A3)

This distinction is important because using a comma as an argument separator in a French-speaking locale would create ambiguity: the comma would be both your decimal separator and your argument separator. That is why Numbers allows you to replace the automatically inserted comma with a semicolon when adding cell references.

In summary: if your system uses a comma as the decimal separator (French, Belgian, Swiss French localization, etc.), use the semicolon to separate the arguments. If you are using an English-speaking locale where the decimal separator is the point, the comma can generally be retained.

Respond (be the first)

What date format should be used in cell A1 on Numbers for the formula to work correctly?

Frequently Asked Questions - 29/12/2025

Response Notice-Facile

For the formula to work correctly in Apple Numbers, the date entered in cell A1 must be recognized as a valid date by the application. Here are the key points to follow:

Accepted date formats in Numbers

DD/MM/YYYY (example: 15/03/2023)
YYYY-MM-DD (example: 2023-03-15)
Month Name DD, YYYY (example: March 15, 2023)

Checking and setting the cell format

Select cell A1.
Open the Format menu in the sidebar.
Choose the Cell option and then Date to set the cell format.
Make sure the date is recognized and displayed correctly.

If the date is entered in an unrecognized format or if the cell is not set to Date type, the formula using this cell may not work. Therefore, make sure to follow these formats and set the cell accordingly.

Respond (be the first)

How to automatically calculate a date 6 months after a given date in Apple Numbers?

Frequently Asked Questions - 29/12/2025

Response Notice-Facile

To automatically calculate a date that is 6 months after a specified date in a Numbers cell, you can use the DATE function combined with YEAR, MONTH, and DAY. Here’s how to do it:

Assume the initial date is in cell A1.
In the cell where you want to display the date 6 months later, enter the following formula:

=DATE(YEAR(A1), MONTH(A1) + 6, DAY(A1))

This formula works as follows:

YEAR(A1) retrieves the year of the initial date.
MONTH(A1) + 6 adds 6 months to the month of the initial date.
DAY(A1) keeps the same day.

Numbers automatically adjusts the year if the month exceeds 12 (for example, if the initial date is in July, the formula correctly calculates the date in January of the following year).

This method allows you to easily automate the calculation of dates shifted by several months in your spreadsheets.

Respond (be the first)

How to save a chart as a new style in Apple Numbers?

Frequently Asked Questions - 25/12/2025

Response Notice-Facile

Numbers does not have a function to save an individual chart as a reusable new style, unlike tables. However, Apple Numbers offers several solutions to reuse the formatting of your charts.

Set default attributes for a chart type: This is the official method to standardize the appearance of charts. Select a chart that you have formatted to your liking (colors, fonts, labels, legends, etc.), then click on Format in the sidebar. Go to the Advanced tab and choose 'Set default style for chart type'. From then on, all new charts of the same type (bars, columns, lines, pie, etc.) created on this spreadsheet will automatically use these settings.

Copy and paste a formatted chart: A simple alternative is to copy an already formatted chart. Select the customized chart, then press Command+C (Mac) or Control+C (Windows). Then click where you want to place the new chart and paste with Command+V or Control+V. The duplicated chart retains all the original formatting. You can then modify the associated data without losing the style.

Direct customization: Each chart can be fully customized via the Format panel. Select the chart, then click on Format in the sidebar to access color, fill, stroke, label, legend, and other formatting options. Changes made only affect that specific chart.

To ensure visual consistency in your spreadsheet, we recommend setting default attributes at the beginning of your work, then duplicating formatted charts as needed rather than recreating them manually.

Respond (be the first)

How to activate and use the 'Search in Selection' option in Apple Numbers?

Frequently Asked Questions - 05/12/2025

Response Notice-Facile

Important: Apple Numbers does not offer an explicit native option called 'Search in Selection' like some other spreadsheets. Contrary to what you might assume, pre-selecting cells does not prevent the search from scanning the entire document. Here’s how search actually works in Numbers and the available options.

To access the Find and Replace function, you have two options. On Mac, use the keyboard shortcut Command + F, or navigate to the View menu (in the toolbar) and select Show Find and Replace. A search bar appears at the top of your spreadsheet. Enter the text you want to find in the input field, and Numbers automatically highlights all matching occurrences as you type.

To refine your search, Numbers offers you two specific options. Click on the dropdown menu to the left of the search field to access these settings: Whole Words (which avoids finding partial matches - for example, searching for 'analysis' will not find 'analyze') and Case Sensitive (which limits results to text that exactly matches your capitalization). You can combine these two options for even more precise results.

If you want to replace text, click on Find and Replace in the same menu. You can then replace each occurrence individually after review, or use Replace All to change all matches in one action. Note that you cannot replace text in cells containing formulas - Numbers only allows you to replace values in simple cells without calculations.

To limit your search to a specific area of your sheet, the best workaround is to use the built-in Shortcuts app on your Apple device. You can create or download a 'Find and Replace in Selection' shortcut that restricts the search only to the cells you have previously selected. Simply select your range of cells in Numbers, then run this shortcut from the menu or if you have pinned it to the menu bar.

This limitation exists across all versions of Numbers: Mac, iPad, and iPhone. Apple has not added a native button for 'Search in Selection' despite recurring user requests. So, if a full document search does not meet your needs, prefer the shortcut or perform your search normally and then ignore the results outside the area that interests you.

Respond (be the first)

How to limit search and replace to a specific column or row in Apple Numbers?

Frequently Asked Questions - 05/12/2025

Response Notice-Facile

To limit search and replace to a specific column or row in Apple Numbers, follow these steps:

Steps to limit search and replace

Open your spreadsheet in the Numbers application.
Select the column or row in question by clicking on the column header (letter) or the row number. This will highlight the selection.
Access the Find and Replace function by pressing Command + F or by going to the Edit > Find > Find and Replace... menu.
Enable the

Respond (be the first)

How to change the comment triangle color in Apple Numbers?

Frequently Asked Questions - 27/11/2025

Response Notice-Facile

In Apple Numbers, you can change the color of your comments by changing your author color. Although the small triangle in the corner of the cell remains visible, its color and that of the comment bubble change according to your settings. This feature is very useful in a collaborative context to quickly identify the author of each comment.

Here’s how to change the comment color:

Click on View in the menu bar

Select Comments

Click on Author Color

Choose the desired color from the options provided

The new color will be immediately applied to all your existing comments in the current workbook. If your document is shared via iCloud, the color will be synchronized for your Apple account across all your devices (Mac, iPad, iPhone) and visible to other collaborators.

Important points to remember: For your new author color to be saved in the Numbers preferences, you must add at least one new comment or make a change with this new color. Your color settings will also apply to all future workbooks you create. In collaboration with other users, each participant will have their own automatically assigned comment color, which greatly facilitates identifying who wrote each comment and to whom it is addressed.

Respond (be the first)

Download the instructions for your Spreadsheet in PDF format for free! Find your manual NUMBERS - APPLE and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. NUMBERS by APPLE.

USER MANUAL NUMBERS APPLE

User Guide

Apple Inc.

© 2008 Apple Inc. All rights reserved.

This manual is subject to copyright laws and cannot be copied, in whole or in part, without Apple's written consent. Your rights regarding the software are governed by the license agreement that accompanies it.

The Apple logo is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries. Use of the Apple logo via the keyboard (Option + 1) for commercial purposes without Apple's prior written consent may constitute trademark infringement and unfair competition in violation of federal and state laws.

Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information in this manual. Apple is not responsible for printing or reduction errors.

Apple

1 Infinite Loop

Cupertino, CA 95014-2084

408-996-1010

www.apple.com

Apple, the Apple logo, AppleWorks, ColorSync, iMovie, iPhoto, iTunes, Keynote, Numbers, Pages, Mac, Mac OS, Quartz and QuickTime are trademarks of Apple Inc. registered in the United States and other countries.

Finder, iWeb, iWork, Safari and Spotlight are trademarks of Apple Inc.

AppleCare is a service mark of Apple Inc. registered in the United States and other countries.

Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

Other company and product names mentioned in this document are trademarks of their respective owners. Third-party product mention is provided for informational purposes only and does not constitute an endorsement or recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility for the performance or use of these products.

F019-1277 06/2008

Preface 16 Welcome to the Numbers User Guide

Chapter 1 18 Numbers Techniques and Tools

18 Spreadsheet Templates
20 The Numbers Window
21 Aids for Spreadsheet Visualization
21 Zoom In and Zoom Out
The Sheets Subwindow
23 Print Preview
23 Alignment Guides
24 Styles Subwindow
24 The Toolbar
26 The Format Bar
26 The Inspector Window
27 Formula Tools
28 The Media Browser
29 The Colors Window
29 The Font Panel
29 The Warnings Window
30 Keyboard Shortcuts and Contextual Menus

Chapter 2 31 Using a Numbers Spreadsheet

31 Creating, Opening and Importing Spreadsheets
31 Creating a Spreadsheet
33 Importing a Document
33 Opening a Spreadsheet
34 Saving Spreadsheets
34 Saving a Spreadsheet
35 Undoing Changes
35 Automatically Saving a Backup Copy of a Spreadsheet
36 Saving a Spreadsheet as a Template
36 Saving Search Terms Applicable to a Spreadsheet

37 Saving a Copy of a Spreadsheet
37 Closing a Spreadsheet Without Quitting Numbers
37 Using Sheets to Organize a Spreadsheet
38 Viewing Sheets
39 Adding and Removing Sheets
39 Reorganizing Sheets and Their Contents
40 Renaming Sheets
41 Dividing a Sheet Into Pages
42 Setting the Page Format of a Spreadsheet
42 Using Headers and Footers
43 Organizing Objects on the Page
44 Adjusting Page Orientation
44 Adjusting Page Order
44 Numbering Pages
45 Adjusting Page Margins

Chapter 3

46 Using Tables

46 About Tables
47 Using Tables
47 Adding a Table
47 Using Table Tools
50 Resizing a Table
51 Moving Tables
51 Naming a Table
52 Defining Reusable Tables
53 Copying Tables Between iWork Applications
54 Selecting Tables and Their Components
54 Selecting a Table
54 Selecting a Single Table Cell
56 Selecting a Group of Table Cells
56 Selecting a Row or Column
56 Selecting Table Cell Borders
58 Using Table Cell Contents
58 Adding and Modifying Cell Values
59 Using Text in Cells
60 Using Numbers in Cells
61 Using Dates in Cells
61 Displaying Content That Is Too Long for the Cell
62 Formatting Cell Values
63 Using Number Format
64 Using Currency Format
65 Using Percentage Format

67 Using Date and Time Format
68 Using Fraction Format
69 Using Scientific Format
69 Using Text Format
70 Using a Checkbox and Other Control Formats
73 Controlling Cell Values
74 Adding Images and Colors to Cells
74 Automatically Filling Table Cells
75 Using Rows and Columns
75 Adding Rows
76 Adding Columns
76 Rearranging Rows and Columns
77 Deleting Rows and Columns
77 Using a Table Header Row or Column
78 Using a Footer Row
79 Options for Hiding Rows and Columns
79 Resizing Rows and Columns
80 Alternating Row Colors
81 Using Table Cells
81 Merging Table Cells
81 Dividing Table Cells
82 Formatting Cell Borders
83 Copying and Moving Cells
84 Adding Comments
84 Reorganizing Tables
85 Sorting Table Cells
86 Filtering Rows

Chapter 4

87 Using Table Styles
87 Using Styles Applicable to Tables
88 Applying Styles to Tables
88 Modifying a Table Style
88 Modifying Table Style Attributes
89 Copying and Pasting Table Styles
89 Using the Default Table Style
90 Creating Styles Applicable to Tables
90 Renaming a Style Applicable to Tables
90 Deleting a Table Style

Chapter 5

91 Using Formulas and Functions in Tables
91 Using Formulas
92 A Guided Tour of Using Formulas

94 Performing Instant Calculations
95 Adding a Quick Formula
96 Basic Calculation With Values in the Same Row
96 Basic Calculation With Values in the Same Column
96 Deleting a Formula
97 Using the Formula Editor
97 Adding a New Formula Using the Formula Editor
98 Modifying a Formula Using the Formula Editor
98 Using the Formula Bar
99 Adding a New Formula Using the Formula Bar
100 Modifying a Formula Using the Formula Bar
100 Using Cell References
100 Adding Cell References to a Formula
102 Copying or Moving Formulas Containing Cell References
103 Applying a Formula to Column or Row Cells at Once
103 Managing Errors and Warnings
104 Using Operators
104 Calculating Arithmetic Operations
105 Explaining Arithmetic Operators
105 Explaining Comparison Operators
106 Using Functions

Chapter 6

108 Using Charts
108 About Charts
111 Adding a Chart
113 Modifying a Chart
114 Modifying the Chart Orientation
114 Modifying the Data Plotted on a Chart
114 Adding Data to a Chart
115 Adding Data to a Chart From Multiple Tables
115 Removing Data From a Chart
116 Replacing a Data Series
116 Deleting a Chart
116 Moving a Chart
117 Changing the Chart Type
118 Formatting the General Attributes of a Chart
118 Using a Legend
118 Using a Chart Title
119 Resizing a Chart
119 Rotating Charts
120 Adding Axis Labels and Tick Marks
120 Displaying Axes and Borders

121 Using Axis Titles
121 Displaying Data Point Labels
122 Formatting the Value Axis
123 Setting Up Labels, Gridlines and Tick Marks
124 Formatting the Elements of a Data Series
125 Formatting Titles, Labels and Legends
125 Adding Descriptive Text to a Chart
126 Formatting Specific Chart Types
Pie Charts
126 Selecting Individual Portions in a Pie Chart
126 Displaying the Series Name in a Pie Chart
127 Moving Individual Portions Away From the Chart
127 Adding Shadows to Pie Charts and Portions
127 Adjusting the Opacity of Pie Charts
Rotating 2D Pie Charts
128 Bar and Column Charts
128 Adjusting the Spacing of Bar and Column Charts
129 Adding Shadows to Bar and Column Charts
129 Adjusting the Opacity of Bar and Column Charts
130 Layer and Line Charts
131 Scatter Charts
3D Charts

Chapter 7

133 Using Text

133 Adding Text

133 Deleting, Copying and Pasting Text

134 Selecting Text

134 Formatting Text Size and Appearance

135 Using the Format Bar to Format Text

135 Using the Format Menu to Format Text

135 Applying Bold or Italic Attributes to Text Using Menus

135 Outlining Text Using Menus

136 Underlining Text Using Menus

136 Changing Text Size Using Menus

136 Putting Text in Subscript or Superscript Using Menus

137 Changing Text Case Using Menus

137 Using the Font Panel to Format Text

139 Simplifying the Use of the Font Panel

139 Changing Fonts Using the Font Panel

140 Modifying Underlining Using the Font Panel

140 Adding Strikethrough Attribute to Text Using the Font Panel

140 Changing Text Color Using the Font Panel

141 Changing the Background Color of a Paragraph Using the Font Panel
141 Creating Shadows on Text Using the Font Panel
141 Adding Accents and Special Characters
141 Adding Accents
142 Displaying Keyboard Layouts in Other Languages
143 Entering Special Characters and Symbols
144 Using Curved Quotation Marks
144 Using Advanced Typographic Features
145 Adjusting Font Smoothing
145 Setting Text Alignment, Spacing and Color
146 Horizontal Text Alignment
147 Vertical Text Alignment
147 Adjusting Line Spacing
149 Adjusting Spacing Before and After a Paragraph
149 Adjusting Space Between Characters
149 Changing Text Color
150 Setting Tab Stops to Align Text
151 Setting a New Tab Stop
151 Modifying a Tab Stop
152 Deleting a Tab Stop
152 Creating Indents
152 Setting Indents for Paragraphs
153 Modifying Text Margins in Objects
153 Setting Indents for Lists
153 Using Bullet, Numbered and Ordered Lists (Structures)
153 Automatically Generating Lists
154 Using Bullet Lists
155 Using Numbered Lists
156 Using Ordered Lists (Structures)
157 Using Text Boxes and Shapes to Make Text Stand Out
157 Adding Text Boxes
158 Presenting Text in Columns
159 Adding Text to a Shape
159 Formatting a Text Box or Shape
160 Using Hyperlinks
160 Linking to a Web Page
160 Linking to a Pre-addressed Email Message
161 Changing Hyperlink Text
161 Inserting Page Numbers and Other Variable Values
162 Automatic Text Substitution

163 Inserting a Non-breaking Space
163 Checking Spelling
163 Finding Misspelled Words
164 Using Spelling Correction Suggestions
165 Finding and Replacing Text

Chapter 8

166 Use of figures, graphics and other objects

166 Object selection
167 Copying and duplicating objects
167 Deletion of objects
167 Moving objects
168 Moving an object to the foreground or background
168 Aligning objects
168 Alignment of objects relative to each other
169 Uniform spacing of objects on the page
169 Use of alignment guides
170 Creating alignment guides
170 Defining the precise position of objects
171 Modifying objects
171 Resizing objects
172 Flipping and rotating objects
172 Modifying the border style
173 Framing objects
174 Adding shadows
176 Adding a reflection
176 Adjusting opacity
177 Grouping and locking objects
177 Grouping and ungrouping objects
178 Locking and unlocking objects
178 Filling objects
178 Filling an object with color
179 Using the Colors window
180 Filling an object with an image
182 Using figures
182 Adding a pre-drawn figure
182 Adding a custom figure
184 Editable figures
184 Manipulating the points of a figure
185 Modifying the path of a curve
185 Modifying the path of a straight line segment
186 Converting corner points to curve points and vice-versa
186 Modifying specific pre-drawn figures

186 Modifying a rounded rectangle
187 Modifying single and double arrows
187 Modifying a star
188 Modifying a polygon
188 Using dummy multimedia parameters
189 Using images
189 Importing an image
189 Masking (cropping) images
190 Cropping an image using the default mask (rectangular shape)
191 Masking an image with a figure
191 Removing the mask from an image
191 Removing the background or superfluous elements from an image
192 Modifying the brightness, contrast and other adjustments of an image
194 Using PDF files as graphics
195 Using sound and sequences
195 Adding a sound file
196 Adding a sequence file
196 Adjusting playback options for multimedia files

Chapter 9 198 Adding data from the Address Book to a table 198 Using Address Book fields 199 Mapping column names to names from Address Book fields 201 Adding data from the Address Book to an existing table 202 Adding data from the Address Book to a new table

Chapter 10 203 Sharing your Numbers spreadsheet
203 Printing a sheet
204 Choosing layout options for printing
205 Adjusting print color with ColorSync
206 Exporting to other document formats
207 Sending a spreadsheet to iWeb

Chapter 11 208 Designing your custom Numbers spreadsheet templates
208 Designing a template
208 Step 1: define styles for your tables
209 Step 2: define reusable tables
209 Step 3: define default tables, text boxes, figures and images
209 Defining default attributes for charts
210 Defining default attributes for text boxes and shapes
210 Defining default attributes for imported images
211 Step 4: create the starting content for the spreadsheet

211 Pre-defining tables and other objects for a custom template
212 Creating dummy multimedia parameters in a custom template
212 Pre-defining sheets for a custom template
213 Step 5: saving a custom template

Chapter 12

214 Function Dictionary
214 About functions
216 Date and time functions
217 Financial functions
218 Logical functions
219 Information functions
219 Reference functions
220 Numeric functions
221 Trigonometric functions
222 Statistical functions
224 Text functions
225 Function descriptions
225 ABS
225 ACCOUNT
226 ACCRINTM
227 ACOS
227 ACOSH
227 ADDRESS
228 AND
229 AREAS
229 ASIN
229 ASINH
230 ATAN
230 ATAN2
230 ATANH
231 AVEDEV
231 AVERAGE
231 AVERAGEA
232 CEILING
233 CHAR
233 CHOOSE
234 CLEAN
234 CODE
235 COLUMN
235 COLUMNS
235 COMBIN
236 CONCATENATE

236 CONFIDENCE.INTERVAL

237 CORRELATION

238 COS

238 COSH

239 COUNT

239 COUNTA

240 COUNTBLANK

241 COUNTIF

241 COUPDAYBS

242 COUPDAYS

243 COUPDAYSNC

244 COUPNCD

245 COVARIANCE

245 DATE

246 DATEDIF

247 DAY

247 DB

248 DDB

248 DEGREES

249 DISC

249 EURO

250 EDATE

250 EVEN

251 EXACT

251 EXP

251 FACT

252 FALSE

252 FIND

253 FORMAT

253 FLOOR

254 FORECAST

254 FV

255 GCD

255 HLOOKUP

256 HOUR

257 HYPERLINK

257 IF

258 INDEX

259 INDIRECT

259 INT

259 INTERCEPT

260 INTPER

261 SORT

261 ISBLANK

262 ISERROR

262 ISEVEN

263 ISODD

263 ISPMT

264 LARGE

264 LCM

265 LEFT

265 LEN

265 LN

266 LOG

266 LOG10

266 LOOKUP

267 LOWER

267 MATCH

268 MAX

269 MAXA

269 MEDIAN

270 MID

270 MIN

270 MINA

271 MINUTE

271 TRIM

271 MOD

272 MODE

273 MONTH

273 MROUND

273 NOT

274 NOW

274 NPV

275 NPV

275 ODD

276 OFFSET

276 OR

277 PERCENTILE

277 PI

278 PMT

278 POISSON

279 POWER

279 PPMT

280 PRICE

281 PRICEDISC

281 PRICEMAT

282 PROBABILITY

283 PRODUCT

283 PROPER

284 PV

285 QUOTIENT

285 RADIANS

285 RAND

286 RANDBETWEEN

286 RANK

287 RATE

288 REPLACE

288 REPT

289 RIGHT

289 ROMAN

290 ROUND

290 ROUNDDOWN

291 ROUNDUP

292 ROW

292 ROWS

292 SEARCH

293 SECOND

293 SIGN

293 SIN

294 SINH

294 SL

295 SLOPE

295 SMALL

296 SQRT

296 STDEV

297 STDEVA

297 STDEVP

298 STDEVPA

299 SUBSTITUTE

299 SUM

300 SUMIF

301 SUMPRODUCT

301 SUMSQ

301 SYD
302 T
302 TAN
303 TANH
303 TIME
304 TIMEVALUE
304 TODAY
305 TRIM
305 TRUE
305 TRUNC
306 UPPER
306 VALUE
306 VAR
307 VARA
308 VARP
308 VARPA
309 VDB
310 VLOOKUP
311 WEEKDAY
311 YEAR

Index 312

Welcome to the Numbers User Guide

Preface

This color PDF document provides complete instructions for using Numbers.

Before using it, you can consult the Numbers Getting Started guide in the Getting Started with iWork '08 manual. This document will help you use Numbers quickly. The Getting Started with iWork '08 manual also provides additional resources to familiarize you with Numbers, such as a guided tour of functions and videos on how to use it.

If you need detailed instructions to help you perform specific tasks, you will find them in this user guide. Most of the tasks described in this guide are also available in the online help.

The table below shows you where to find information within this guide. Numbers Help allows you to find the required information by navigating or performing a search.

To get information about Refer to
Using Numbers tools and windows to create and format spreadsheets chapter 1, "Numbers Techniques and Tools" on page 18
Creating and saving Numbers spreadsheets, as well as managing sheets and pages chapter 2, "Using a Numbers Spreadsheet" on page 31
Creating, organizing, and formatting tables and their values chapter 3, "Using Tables" on page 46
Using styles to modify the appearance of tables chapter 4, "Using Table Styles" on page 87
Using formulas and functions to perform calculations in cells chapter 5, "Using Formulas and Functions in Tables" on page 91
Creating charts to graphically display numerical data in one or more tables chapter 6, "Using Charts" on page 108
Formatting text in a Numbers spreadsheet chapter 7, "Using Text" on page 133
Using graphics, figures, sound and other elements to enhance a spreadsheet chapter 8, "Using Figures, Graphics and Other Objects" on page 166
Displaying data from the Address Book in tables chapter 9, "Adding Data from the Address Book to a Table" on page 198
Printing and exporting spreadsheets and sending them to iWeb chapter 10, "Sharing Your Numbers Spreadsheet" on page 203
Creating custom Numbers templates chapter 11, "Designing Your Custom Numbers Spreadsheet Templates" on page 208
Using functions available in table cells chapter 12, "Function Dictionary" on page 214

This chapter presents the windows and tools that allow you to manipulate Numbers spreadsheets.

To create a Numbers spreadsheet, you must first select a template that will serve as your starting point.

Spreadsheet Templates

When you open the Numbers application for the first time (by clicking its icon in the Dock or by double-clicking its icon in the Finder), the template selector window offers you various types of spreadsheets.

Select the template that best suits your needs. If you wish to start with a blank spreadsheet, select the Blank template. After selecting a template, click Choose to work on a new spreadsheet based on that template.

Templates contain predefined sheets and tables, as well as other elements to help you get started quickly.

Sheets will organize information into groups of related objects. For example, you can use one sheet for 2006 data and another for 2007 data.

Predefined tables usually contain text, formulas and sample data. You can replace the data in predefined tables with your own data and add columns and rows or change the formatting of these tables. You can also add sheets and other objects, such as charts, images and text.

Guest List

Last Name First Name Phone Number Email Address Total Number of People Confirmed Comments
Dupont Jean (12) 34 56 78 90 no_reply@apple.com 3 ✓
Lefranç Claire (12) 34 56 78 90 no_reply@apple.com 4 ✓
Étienne Jean-Claude (12) 34 56 78 90 no_reply@apple.com 2 ✓
Duroisin Christine (12) 34 56 78 90 no_reply@apple.com 3 ✓
Total 12
Drag and drop cards from the Address Book.

Some templates contain explanatory comments.

The Numbers Window

The Numbers window contains elements that allow you to develop and organize your spreadsheet.

The Sheets Subwindow:

Overview of tables and charts placed on the sheets of your spreadsheet.

The toolbar: Customize it to include the tools you use most frequently.

The Formula bar: create and modify formulas in cells.

The Format bar: quickly format the selected object.

Quickly add a new sheet by clicking the Sheet button in the toolbar. After adding tables, charts and various objects to a sheet, including imported charts, sequences and sound, you can drag objects in the Numbers canvas to reposition them.

Use the Sheets subwindow to display a list of tables and charts from any sheet.

Apply predefined table styles listed in the Styles subwindow to modify the appearance of a selected table.

Use the area in the bottom left corner to perform instant calculations on values in selected table cells.

Use the toolbar buttons to quickly add tables, charts, text boxes, multimedia files and other objects.

For example, click the Tables button in the toolbar to add a new pre-formatted table based on the template you're using. All templates contain several pre-formatted tables available to you.

Refer to the "The Toolbar" section on page 24 for more information on customizing the toolbar by adding the tools you use frequently.

Use the Format bar to quickly format a selected object.
- Use the Formula bar to add and modify formulas in table cells.

Aids for Viewing Spreadsheets

When working on a spreadsheet, it can be helpful to zoom in or zoom out or use other display techniques to better see what you're doing.

Zoom In and Zoom Out

You can enlarge (zoom in) or reduce (zoom out) the display of a spreadsheet.

There are several ways to zoom in or zoom out on a sheet:

Select View > Zoom > zoom level.
Choose a zoom level from the menu located in the bottom left corner of the canvas.

When you display a sheet in print preview view, reduce the zoom to simultaneously display more pages in the window.

The Sheets Subwindow

The Sheets subwindow is located along the top left corner of the Numbers canvas. It allows you to view and quickly access the tables and charts of a sheet.

Refer to the "Using Sheets to Organize a Spreadsheet" section on page 37 for more information.

Print Preview

When you want to print a sheet or create a PDF version of it, you can use Print mode to display on multiple pages the layout of the objects on a sheet.

See "Dividing a Sheet into Pages" on page 41 for more information on Print mode

Alignment Guides

When you move objects within a spreadsheet, alignment guides automatically appear to help you position these objects on the page. For more information on using alignment guides, refer to the "Using Alignment Guides" section on page 169.

Styles Subwindow

The Styles subwindow allows you to apply predefined formatting to tables in a spreadsheet. Table styles define attributes such as color, text size, and border formatting applicable to table cells.

To apply a table style, simply select the table and click on a style in the Styles subwindow.

Switch from one table to another with a single mouse click.

Refer to the "Using Applicable Styles for Tables" section on page 87 for more information.

The toolbar

The Numbers toolbar allows you to perform many of the common actions with a single click when you are working in Numbers. As you discover features you use most often, you can add, remove, and reorganize the toolbar buttons to adapt them to your way of working.

To know what a button does, place the pointer on it.

The default set of toolbar buttons is illustrated below.

To customize the toolbar:

1 Choose View > Customize toolbar. The Customize toolbar sheet appears.
2 Make the desired changes to the toolbar.

To add an item to the toolbar, drag its icon onto the toolbar at the top. If you frequently reconfigure the toolbar, you can add the Customize button to it.

To remove an item from the toolbar, drag it out of it.

To restore the default set of buttons, drag it onto the bar.

To reduce the size of toolbar icons, Select Use small icons.

To display only icons or only text, CHOOSE the corresponding option in the local View menu.

To reorganize the toolbar items, drag them.

3 Click Done when you are finished.

It is possible to perform certain types of toolbar customization without using the Customize toolbar sheet:

To remove an item from the toolbar, hold down the Command key while dragging the item out of the toolbar.
You can also right-click on the item while holding the Control key, then choose Remove the item from the context menu.

To move an item, hold down the Command key while dragging the item onto the toolbar.

To show or hide the toolbar, CHOOSE View > Show toolbar, or View > Hide toolbar.

The Format Bar

Use the Format bar that is displayed under the toolbar to quickly modify the appearance of tables, charts, text and other elements of your spreadsheet.

The commands in the format bar change depending on the selected object. To know what a Format bar control does, place the pointer on it and a description of its function will appear.

Here is what the Format bar looks like when the selected element is a table.

To show and hide the format bar:

Choose View > Show format bar, or View > Hide format bar.

The Inspector Window

Most elements of your spreadsheet can be formatted using Numbers inspectors. Each inspector handles a different aspect of formatting. For example, the cells inspector allows you to format cells and their values. Place the pointer on the buttons and other controls of the sub-windows of an inspector to display a description of their function.

Opening multiple inspector windows simplifies manipulation of your spreadsheet. For example, if you open the Graphics Inspector and the Cells Inspector, you thus have access to formatting options for images and cells.

Here are different ways to open an Inspector window:

In the toolbar, click Inspector.
Choose View > Show Inspector.
To open another Inspector window, press the Option key and hold it down, then click an Inspector button.

After opening the Inspector window, click one of the buttons at the top of the window to display another inspector. For example, if you click the second button from the left, the sheet inspector is displayed.

Formula Tools

Add a formula to a table when you want to display a calculated value in a cell. Numbers has several tools for manipulating formulas inserted in table cells:

The Formula Editor allows you to create and modify formulas. Open the Formula Editor by selecting a cell in a table and typing the equal sign (=). You can also open it by CHOOSING Formula Editor in the local Function menu of the toolbar.

For more information about this editor, see the topic 'Using the Formula Editor' on page 97.

The formula bar, always visible under the format bar, also allows you to create and modify formulas.

Instructions for adding and modifying formulas using this tool are described in the topic 'Using the Formula Bar' on page 98.

Using the function browser is the fastest way to add a function. A function is a predefined formula with a name (such as SUM and AVERAGE).

To open the function browser, click the function browser button in the formula bar.

The topic 'Using Functions' on page 106 explains how to use the function browser.

The Media Browser

The Media Browser allows you to access all multimedia files from your iPhoto library, your iTunes library and your Sequences folder. You can drag an item from the media browser onto your spreadsheet or into the image frame of an inspector.

You can open the media browser in several ways:

Click Media in the toolbar.

Choose View > Show Media Browser.

The Colors Window

The Mac OS X Colors panel allows you to choose the color of text, table cells, cell borders and other objects. Although the format bar allows you to apply many colors, the Colors window offers advanced color management options.

To open the Colors window:

In the toolbar, click Colors.

For more information, see the topic 'Using the Colors Window' on page 179.

The Font Panel

You can modify the style, size and other options related to fonts using the Mac OS X Font panel, accessible from any application. Use the format bar to quickly format fonts, but use the Font panel for more advanced formatting.

To open the Font panel:

Click Fonts in the toolbar.

For more detailed information about using the Font panel and modifying the appearance of text, see the topic 'Using the Font Panel to Format Text' on page 137.

The Warnings Window

When you import a document into Numbers or export a spreadsheet from Numbers to another format, some elements may not be transferred as expected. The document Warnings window lists all the problems encountered.

If problems occur, a message will appear and allow you to review the warnings. If you decide not to review these warnings, you have the option to view the Warnings window at any time by selecting View > Show Document Warnings.

If a warning message tells you that a font is missing, you can click on it and then on Replace Font to CHOOSE a replacement font.

You can copy several warnings by selecting them in the document Warnings window and CHOOSING Edit > Copy. You can then paste the copied text into an email message, into a text file or into another window.

Keyboard shortcuts and context menus

You can use the keyboard to execute many of the commands and tasks from Numbers menus. To display the complete list of keyboard shortcuts, open Numbers and choose Help > Keyboard Shortcuts.

Most objects also have context menus containing commands that can be used on those objects. Context menus are particularly useful for working with tables and charts.

To open a context menu:

Press the Control key while clicking on an object.

Using a Numbers Spreadsheet

This chapter describes how to manage Numbers spreadsheets.

To create a Numbers spreadsheet, you can open Numbers and select a template. You can also import a document created in another application such as Microsoft Excel or AppleWorks 6. This chapter explains how to create Numbers spreadsheets and how to open and save them.

This chapter also covers instructions for using sheets and managing the layout of printed or PDF versions of Numbers sheets.

Creating, opening and importing spreadsheets

When creating a Numbers spreadsheet, CHOOSE a template to give it its formatting and starting content. You can also create a Numbers spreadsheet by importing a document created in another application, such as Microsoft Excel or AppleWorks.

Creating a Spreadsheet

To create a Numbers spreadsheet, choose the appropriate formatting and content characteristics.

Start creating your spreadsheet from the Blank template, or select one of the many templates that allow you to, among other things, create a financial plan, organize a meeting, without having to do all the design work. Among these templates, you find tables, predefined charts, as well as data examples that will allow you to start working on your spreadsheet more quickly.

To create a spreadsheet:

1 Open Numbers by clicking its icon in the Dock or by double-clicking its icon in the Finder.
If Numbers is open, Select File > New in the template selector.
2 In the template selection window, Select a template category in the left column to display the corresponding templates, then Select the one that best suits the spreadsheet you want to create. If you want to start with a spreadsheet with no predefined content, Select Blank.

3 Click Choose. A new spreadsheet opens on the screen.

To open a blank template and skip the template selector window when creating a spreadsheet, select 'Do not show this message again'. For the template selector to reappear when you create a spreadsheet, choose Numbers > Preferences, click General, then select 'For new documents: Show the template selector dialog. You can also select File > New in the template selector.

You can also choose to display a particular template in Numbers each time you open Numbers or create a spreadsheet. Choose Numbers > Preferences, click General, Select 'For new documents: use the template: template name', then click Choose. Select the name of a template, then click Choose.

Importing a Document

You can create a Numbers spreadsheet by importing a document created in Microsoft Excel or AppleWorks 6. Numbers can also import files in CSV format (comma-delimited), tab-delimited format and OFX format (Open Financial Exchange).

From AppleWorks, you can only import spreadsheets.

Here are different ways to import a document:

Drag the document onto the Numbers application icon. A new Numbers spreadsheet then opens, displaying the contents of the imported document.

Choose File > Open, Select the document, then click Open.

You can quickly import data from the Address Book to create tables containing names, telephone numbers, addresses and other information about your contacts. See the topic 'Using Address Book Fields' on page 198 for instructions.

If you cannot import a document, try opening it in another application and saving it in a format that Numbers can read, or copy and paste its contents into an existing Numbers spreadsheet.

You can also export Numbers spreadsheets to Microsoft Excel, PDF and CSV files. See the topic 'Exporting to Other Document Formats' on page 206 for more information.

Opening a Spreadsheet

There are several ways to open a spreadsheet created using Numbers.

Here are different ways to open a spreadsheet:

To open a spreadsheet when you are working in Numbers, CHOOSE File > Open, select the spreadsheet, then click Open.
To open a spreadsheet you have recently worked on, choose File > Open Recent Document, then select the spreadsheet from the submenu.
To open a Numbers spreadsheet from the Finder, double-click the spreadsheet icon or drag it onto the Numbers application icon.

If a message tells you that a font or file is missing, you can still use the spreadsheet. Numbers allows you to choose replacement fonts for missing fonts. To add these missing fonts, quit Numbers and add the fonts that are in the Fonts folder (for more information, see Mac Help). To restore missing sequence or sound files, add them back to the spreadsheet.

Saving Spreadsheets

When you create a Numbers spreadsheet, all images are saved in it so they display correctly if the spreadsheet is opened on another computer. Fonts are not included in the document, however. If you transfer a Numbers spreadsheet to another computer, make sure that the fonts it uses have been installed in the Fonts folder of the destination computer.

You can choose to save audio and video files in a Numbers spreadsheet. If not, you must also transfer them for the spreadsheet to display correctly on another computer.

Saving a spreadsheet

It is advisable to save the spreadsheet regularly during your work. Once you've saved it for the first time, you can press Command + S to resave it while keeping the same settings.

To save a spreadsheet for the first time:

1 Choose File > Save, or press Command + S.
2 In the Save As field, enter the name of the spreadsheet.
3 If the directory containing your files is not visible in the Where menu, click the disclosure triangle to the right of the Save As field.
4 Choose the location to save the spreadsheet.
5 If the spreadsheet is to be opened on another computer, click Advanced Options and set the options that will determine what is copied to your spreadsheet.

Copy audio and video to the document: if you check this box, audio and video files are saved with the spreadsheet, to allow playback of the files if the spreadsheet is opened. You can uncheck this box to reduce file size, but in that case multimedia files will not work on another computer unless you also transfer them.

Copy template images to the document: if you do not select this option and you open the spreadsheet on a computer where Numbers is not installed, the appearance of the spreadsheet may be different.

6 Click Save.

In general, you can save Numbers spreadsheets only on computers and servers running Mac OS X. Numbers is not compatible with Mac OS 9 computers and Windows servers running Macintosh services. If you need to work on a Windows computer, try using AFP server software available for Windows.

If you plan to share the spreadsheet with people whose computer does not have Numbers, you can export it for use in another application. To learn more about exporting your spreadsheet to other file formats, see the section "Exporting to other document formats" on page 206.

You can also send a spreadsheet to iWeb. For more information, see the section "Sending a spreadsheet to iWeb" on page 207.

Undoing changes

If you do not want to save the changes you made to the spreadsheet since opening it or since the last save, you can undo them.

Here are different ways to undo changes:

To undo the very last change, choose Edit > Undo.
To undo multiple changes, choose Edit > Undo several times in a row.
You can undo all changes made since opening the spreadsheet
or return to the last saved version.
To reapply changes you have undone using Edit > Undo, select Edit > Redo as many times as you wish.
To undo all changes made since the last save of your spreadsheet, choose File > Revert to Saved Version, then click Revert.

Automatic backup copy saving of a spreadsheet

Each time you save a spreadsheet, you can keep a copy without the changes you made since the last save of the document. This way, if you change your mind, you can return to the backup copy of the spreadsheet.

Here are different ways to create and use a backup version:

To have a backup copy automatically created for a spreadsheet, choose Numbers > Preferences, click General, then select "Create a backup copy of the previous version with each save"

At the next save of your spreadsheet, a backup version is created in the same location, with the prefix "backup copy of" added to the original filename. Only one version (the most recent saved version) is backed up. Each time you save the spreadsheet, the backup file is replaced with a new one.

To revert to the first version saved after making changes without saving them, choose File > Revert to Saved Version. The changes to the open spreadsheet are then undone.

Saving a spreadsheet as a template

When you save a spreadsheet as a template, it appears in the template selector.

To save a spreadsheet as a template:

Choose File > Save as Template.

See the section "Designing a template" on page 208 for more information.

Saving search terms applicable to a spreadsheet

You can store information such as the author name and keywords in Numbers spreadsheets, then use Spotlight to locate spreadsheets containing this information.

To store information about a spreadsheet:

1 Click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Document Inspector button.
2 In the Spotlight fields, enter (or modify) the information.

To search for spreadsheets containing Spotlight information, click the Spotlight icon in the top right corner of the menu bar, then enter the desired criteria.

Saving a copy of a spreadsheet

If you want to make a copy of your spreadsheet (to create a backup copy or multiple versions, for example) you can save it under a different name or in a different location. (You can also automatically save a backup version, as described in the section "Automatic backup copy saving of a spreadsheet".)

To save a copy of a spreadsheet:

Choose File > Save As, then specify a name and location.

The spreadsheet with the new name remains open. To work with the previous version, choose File > Open Recent Document and select the previous version from the submenu.

Closing a spreadsheet without quitting Numbers

When you're done working on a spreadsheet, you can close it without quitting Numbers.

To close the active spreadsheet without closing the application:

Select File > Close or click the close button in the top left corner of the Numbers window.

If you made changes since the last save of your spreadsheet, Numbers will prompt you to save them.

Using sheets to organize a spreadsheet

Like the chapters of a book, sheets allow you to divide information into more manageable groups. For example, you might place charts in the same sheet as the tables whose values they display. You can also place all tables in one sheet and all charts in another. A sheet can finally serve you to keep business contacts and another could be reserved for close friends.

The sheets of a workbook, the tables and charts of each sheet are represented in the Sheets pane which is located to the left of the canvas above the Styles pane.

Only the tables and charts are listed for each page even if your spreadsheet contains text, images and other objects.

The order of tables and charts in the Sheets pane may not correspond to the order of these elements in the spreadsheet, as noted in the section "Reorganizing sheets and their content" on page 39.

Viewing sheets

The Sheets pane on the left side of the Numbers window lists the sheets of the spreadsheet and the tables and charts of each sheet.

There are several ways to display the tables and charts of a sheet:

To show or hide all the tables and charts of a sheet in the Sheets pane, click the triangle next to the sheet in the pane.
To display the contents of a sheet, click the sheet in the Sheets pane.

When you work on a table or chart of a spreadsheet, the table or chart appears highlighted in the Sheets pane.

Adding and deleting sheets

There are several ways to add and delete sheets.

There are different ways to create and delete sheets:

To add a new sheet, click the Sheet button in the toolbar.

You can also choose Insert > Sheet.

A new sheet containing a default table is added at the bottom of the Sheets pane. You can move the sheet by dragging it to its new location in the Sheets pane.

To add a sheet corresponding to a copy of a sheet in the document, select the sheet to copy, choose Edit > Copy, select the sheet after which you want to insert the copy, then choose Edit > Paste.
To delete a sheet and its contents, select it in the Sheets pane and press the Delete key.

When you add a sheet, Numbers assigns it a default name, but you can change this name as described in the section "Renaming sheets" on page 40.

Reorganizing sheets and their content

In the Sheets pane, you can move sheets and reorganize their tables and charts. You can also move tables and charts from one sheet to another.

Reorganizing tables and charts in the Sheets pane does not change their location in a sheet. In a sheet of the Sheets pane, for example, you can place charts next to tables they are derived from or arrange the tables in the order you want to process them. Within the sheet itself, however, it may be more appropriate to divide these objects in a different order (for example, when you layout your spreadsheet for printing).

There are several ways to reorganize sheets in the Sheets pane:

To move a sheet, select it and drag it in the pane. The sheets move to make room for your insertion as you drag the mouse.
You can also select multiple sheets and move them together as a group.
To copy (or cut) and paste sheets, select them, choose Edit > Cut or Edit > Copy, select the sheet after which you want to place the sheets, then choose Edit > Paste.
To move tables and charts associated with a sheet, select them and drag them to the active sheet or to another sheet.

You can also use the cut/paste or copy/paste actions to move tables and charts in the pane.

To move an object within a sheet of a spreadsheet, select it and drag it or perform a cut/paste or copy/paste. To place objects on specific pages, follow the instructions in the section "Dividing a sheet into pages" on page 41.

Renaming sheets

Sheets are distinguished from one another by their names which appear in the Sheets pane. A default name is assigned to each sheet you add but you can replace it with a more meaningful name.

There are several ways to rename a sheet:

In the Sheets pane, double-click the name to edit it.

In the Sheet Inspector, modify the name in the Name field.

You can also modify the names of tables and charts on a sheet. For instructions, see the sections "Naming a table" on page 51 and "Using a chart title" on page 118.

Dividing a sheet into pages

In print preview, you can display a sheet as individual pages, move and resize objects to get the desired layout for the printed version or PDF format of the sheet. You can also add headers, footers, page numbers, and more.

There are different ways to show or hide Print Preview mode:

In the toolbar, click Presentation, then choose to show or hide the print preview view.

Select File > Show Print Preview, Presentation > Show Print Preview, or Presentation > Hide Print Preview.

Click the page icon next to the zoom control for pages in the bottom left corner of the canvas.

In Print mode, the zoom level you choose from the menu in the bottom left determines the number of pages visible at the same time in the window.

You can configure page attributes, such as orientation and page margins, separately for each sheet using the Sheet Inspector.

Setting the page format of a spreadsheet

Before working in Print mode, define the page size corresponding to the paper format used.

To set the page format:

1 Click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Document Inspector button.
2 Choose a page format from the Paper Size menu.

Using headers and footers

You can display the same text on multiple pages of a sheet. The recurring information that appears at the top of the page is called a header, and that at the bottom is called a footer.

You can place your text in a header or footer and use formatted text fields. Formatted text fields allow you to insert text that will be automatically updated. For example, inserting the date field displays the current date each time you open the spreadsheet. Similarly, the page numbers field updates when you add or delete pages.

To define the content of a header or footer:

1 In the toolbar, click Presentation, then choose Print View.
2 To display headers and footers, position the pointer at the top or bottom of the page.
You can also click Presentation in the toolbar, then select Show Layout.
3 To add text in a header or footer, place the cursor in the header or footer and insert the text.
To add page numbers or other variable values, see the section "Inserting page numbers and other variable values" on page 161.

Organizing objects on the page

Resize objects, move them within a page or from one page to another, or display long tables across multiple pages in Print mode.

To enter Print mode, click Presentation, then select Print View.

There are different ways to place objects on the pages of a selected sheet:

To adjust the size of sheet objects to change the number of pages occupied, use the Content Scale commands in the Sheet Inspector.

You can also drag the Content Scale slider at the bottom left of the canvas to resize all elements of a sheet.

To resize objects individually, select them and drag their selection handles or modify the values in the Size field in the Measurements Inspector.

To resize a table, see the "Resizing a Table" section on page 50. To resize a chart, see the "Resizing a Chart" section on page 119. To resize other objects, see the "Resizing Objects" section on page 171.

Select "Repeat Headers on Each Page" from the Table Inspector to configure the header rows and columns so they appear on each page if a table spans multiple pages. You can also select Table > Repeat Header Rows or Table > Repeat Header Columns.

To hide the header rows or columns when a table spans multiple pages, deselect "Repeat Headers on Each Page" in the Table Inspector, or select either Table > Do Not Repeat Header Rows or Table > Do Not Repeat Header Column.

Move objects from page to page by dragging them or by cutting and pasting.

Adjusting Page Orientation

You can arrange the pages of a sheet in portrait orientation (portrait) or in landscape orientation (landscape).

To set the page orientation of a sheet:

1 In the toolbar, click Presentation, then choose Print View.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Sheet Inspector button, then click the appropriate page orientation button in the "Page Layout" area of the window.

You can also click the page orientation button located at the bottom left of the canvas.

Adjusting the Page Order

You can arrange the pages displayed in Page view from left to right or from top to bottom when printing or creating a PDF.

To set the page order:

Click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Sheet Inspector button, then click the appropriate page orientation button (top to bottom or left to right) in the "Page Layout" area of the window.

Page Numbering

You can display the page number in the header or footer.

To number the pages of a sheet:

1 Select the sheet.
2 In the toolbar, click Presentation, then choose Print View.
3 In the toolbar, click Presentation, then choose Show Layout to display headers and footers.

To display headers and footers, place the pointer at the top or bottom of the page.

4 Click the first header or footer to add a page number according to the instructions provided in the "Inserting Page Numbers and Other Variable Values" section on page 161.

5 In the toolbar, click the Inspector button, then the Sheet Inspector button, then indicate the starting page number.

To continue page numbering from the previously selected sheet, select "Continue from Previous Sheet"

To start the page numbering of the sheet from a specific number, use the Start At field.

Adjusting Page Margins

In print mode, each page of the sheet has margins (blank space between the edge of the sheet and the edges of the paper). These margins are indicated on screen by light gray lines, visible in Layout view.

To set the page margins of a sheet:

1 Select the sheet in the Sheet window.
2 Click Presentation in the toolbar and select "Show Print Preview" and Show Layout.
3 Click Inspector in the toolbar, then the Sheet Inspector button.
4 To set the distance between the layout margins and the left, right, top, and bottom edges of a page, enter values in the Left, Right, Top, and Bottom fields.
5 To set the distance between a header or footer and the top or bottom edge of the page respectively, enter values in the Header and Footer fields.

To print the spreadsheet using the largest possible area, select Use Printer Margins. All margin settings specified in the Sheet Inspector will be ignored when printing.

This chapter explains how to add and format tables and cell values.

Other chapters contain instructions that focus on specific aspects of tables:

To learn how to use styles to format tables, see Chapter 4, "Using Table Styles" on page 87.

To learn how to use formulas in table cells, see Chapter 5, "Using Formulas and Functions in Tables" on page 91.

To learn how to display table values in a chart, see Chapter 6, "Using Charts" on page 108.

About Tables

Tables help you organize, analyze, and share data.

Numbers offers a wide range of options for creating and formatting tables and managing values of different types. You can also use special operations such as sorting or conditional formatting (a technique that automatically controls cell values).

The "Using Tables" section on page 47 teaches you how to add tables, resize them, move them, name them, etc.

The "Selecting Tables and Their Components" section on page 54 describes how to select tables, columns, and other table elements in order to work with them.

The "Using Table Cell Contents" section on page 58 tells you how to add text, numbers, dates, images, and other content in table cells and explains how to automatically control cell values.

The "Using Rows and Columns" section on page 75 covers adding rows and columns, resizing them, etc.

The "Using Table Cells" section on page 81 contains instructions for dividing, merging, copying, and moving cells and tells you how to format cell borders.

The "Reorganizing Tables" section on page 84 describes sorting and filtering rows.

Using Tables

You have a wide variety of techniques to create tables and manage their characteristics, size, and location.

Adding a Table

Even though most templates contain one or more predefined tables, you can add tables to a Numbers spreadsheet.

There are several ways to add a table:

Click Tables in the toolbar and choose a predefined table from the local menu.

You can add your own predefined tables to the local menu. See the "Defining Reusable Tables" section on page 52 for instructions.

Select Insert > Table > Table.
To create a table from one or more adjacent cells of a table, select the cell(s), click the selection, and while holding down the mouse button, drag the selection to the sheet. To keep the values in the selected cells of the original table, hold down the Option key while dragging the selection.

See the "Selecting Tables and Their Components" section on page 54 for more information about cell selection techniques.

To create a table from an entire column or row drawn from a table, click the reference tab associated with the row or column, and while holding down the mouse button, drag the row or column to the sheet and release the mouse button. To keep the values selected in the column or row of the original table, hold down the Option key while dragging the selection.

Using Table Tools

You can format a table and its columns, rows, and cells using various Numbers tools.

There are several ways to manage table characteristics:

Select a table and quickly format it using the Format Bar.

The Table Inspector allows you to access controls specific to tables, including fields for precisely defining column width and row height. To open the Table Inspector, click Inspector in the toolbar and then click the Table Inspector button.

Use the Cell Inspector to format values. For example, you can display a currency symbol in cells containing monetary values.

You can also set conditional formatting options. For example, a cell can turn red when its value exceeds a certain number.

To open the Cell Inspector, click Inspector in the toolbar and then the Cell Inspector button.

Use table styles to quickly refine the appearance of tables and give them visual consistency. See the "Using Styles for Tables" section on page 87 for more information.
Use the reference tabs and handles that appear when you select a table cell to quickly reorganize a table, select all cells in a row or column, add or remove rows and columns, etc.

Reference tabs will also be useful for creating formulas (for more information, see the "Using Cell References" section on page 100).

Use the Graphics Inspector to create visual effects, for example to apply shadows. To open the Graphics Inspector, click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Graphics Inspector button.

To access the contextual menu, select a table or one or more cell(s) and then click again while holding down the Control key.

You can also use the column local menus and the row reference tabs.

A B C D
1 Loan 1 Loan 2 Loan
2 Principal Loan 30.000 € 30.000 € 30,00
3 Annual Rate 6,00% 7,50% 9,0
4 Duration in Months 60 60
5 Monthly Payments 580 € 601 € 74
6 Total Interest 4.799 € 6.068 € 5.83
7 Total Paid 34.799 € 36.068 € 35.83

Use the Formula Editor and Formula Bar to add and modify formulas. For more information, see the "Using the Formula Editor" section on page 97 and "Using the Formula Bar" section on page 98.
Use the Formula Navigator to add and modify functions. See the "Using Functions" section on page 106 for more information.

Resizing a Table

You can enlarge or reduce the size of a table by dragging one of its selection handles or using the Measurements Inspector. You can also change the size of a table by resizing its columns and rows.

There are several ways to resize a selected table:

Drag one of the square selection handles that appears when you select a table. See the "Selecting a Table" section on page 54 for instructions.

To maintain the proportions of the table, hold down the Shift key while you resize the table.

To resize the table from its center, hold down the Option key while you drag it.

To resize a table in one direction, drag a side handle instead of a corner handle.

To resize with exact dimensions, select a table or cell, click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Measurements Inspector button. This window allows you to specify new values for width and height and modify the space between the table and margins using the Position fields.
If the table spans more than one page, you must use the Measurements Inspector to resize it. To resize a table by adjusting the dimensions of rows and columns, see the "Resizing Rows and Columns" section on page 79.

Moving Tables

You can move a table by dragging it, or you can change its location using the Measurements Inspector.

There are several ways to move a table:

If the table is not selected, click on the edge of the table and hold down the mouse button, then drag the table.
If the table is selected, drag it while holding down the handle in the top left corner.
- Hold down the Shift key while dragging the table to force horizontal, vertical, or 45-degree movement.
To move a table more precisely, click a cell, click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Measurements Inspector button, then use the Position fields to move the table.
To copy a table and move the copy, hold down the Option key, click and hold down the mouse button on the edge of the unselected table, and drag.

Naming a Table

The name of each table in Numbers appears in the Sheets window and can also appear above the table. The default table name (Table 1, Table 2, etc.) can be changed, hidden, or formatted. However, you cannot move or resize it.

There are several ways to use table names:

You can change the name in the Sheets window or in the Name field in the Table Inspector.

Two tables on the same sheet cannot have the same name.

To display the table name on the sheet, select Name in the Format Bar or in the Table Inspector.

To hide the table name on the sheet, uncheck Name.

To format the name, make sure the table is not selected, select Name in the Format Bar or in the Table Inspector, click the table name to select the name area in the sheet, and use the Format Bar, Font panel, or Text window in the Text Inspector.
To increase the spacing between the table name and the table body, select Name in the Table Inspector, click the name, and modify the value after the paragraph in the Text Inspector.

Defining Reusable Tables

You can add your own tables to the menu of predefined tables that appears when you click Tables in the toolbar or Insert > Table. Reusable tables should have the style and geometry of your choice and can contain header text, formulas, etc.

To define a reusable table:

1 Select a table.
2 Define a table style. This determines the formatting of the borders, background, and text of the table cells.

One way to define the table style is to follow the instructions in the section "Modifying the style of a table" on page 88.

You can also use the default table style that applies when you add a table to the spreadsheet created from the reusable table (to learn more about the default table style, refer to the section "Using the default table style" on page 89). Step 7 tells you how to use this option.

3 Define the table geometry.

To resize the table, refer to the sections "Resizing a table" on page 50 and "Resizing rows and columns" on page 79.

To define columns and rows, refer to the section "Using rows and columns" on page 75.

To split, merge, or resize table cells, refer to the section "Splitting table cells" on page 81 or "Merging table cells" on page 81.

4 Add and format any content you want to reuse. Refer to the section "Using the content of table cells" on page 58 for instructions. Any formula you add should only reference the table cells you define.
5 Select Format > Advanced > Capture the table.
6 Assign a name to the table.

7 Select "Use the default style of this document" so that the table uses the default style applied when you add the table to the spreadsheet. Otherwise, the table style used is the one defined in step 2.
8 Click OK.

A copy of the reusable table can be added to the current spreadsheet by selecting it from the preset tables menu that appears when you click Tables in the toolbar or Insert > Table.

To reorganize, rename, or delete tables from the menu, click Format > Advanced > Manage Tables. Double-click a preset table name to edit it. Select a table and click the up or down arrow buttons to move it within the table list. To delete a table, click the Delete (-) button. Click Done when you are finished.

The changes made to the table and menu only apply to the current spreadsheet. To apply these changes to other spreadsheets, save the spreadsheet as a template (refer to the instructions in the section "Designing a template" on page 208).

Copying tables between iWork applications

You can copy a table from one iWork application to another.

The table retains its appearance, data, and other attributes, but some features in Numbers are not supported in other applications:

Hidden rows or columns in Numbers are not visible in other applications unless you select the table and click Format > Table > "Show all rows" or "Show all columns"

Comments added to table cells in Numbers are not copied.

To copy a table from one iWork application to another:

1 Select the table to copy, as described in the section "Selecting a table" on page 54.
2 Click Edit > Copy.
3 In the other application, set an insertion point for the copied table, then choose Edit > Paste.

Selecting tables and their components

You must select the tables, rows, columns, table cells, and table cell borders before using them.

Selecting a table

When you select a table, selection handles appear on its edges.

There are several ways to select a table:

If the table cell is not selected, move the mouse pointer to the edge of the table. When the pointer turns into a black cross, click to select the table.

If a cell or a border segment is selected, click the Table handle in the upper left to select the table. You can also press Command + Return.

Selecting a single table cell

When you select a cell, the border of that cell is highlighted.

Selecting a cell also displays reference tabs at the top and on the sides of the table.

To select a single table cell:

1 Move the pointer over the cell. The pointer turns into a white cross.

2 Click the cell.

When a cell is selected, use the Tab, Return, and arrow keys to move the selection to an adjacent cell. If you select "The Return key moves the selection to the next cell" in the Table Options of the table inspector, you can modify the effect of the Return or Tab keys.

To select If the "Return key" option is selected If the "Return key" option is not selected
The next cell on the right Press the Tab key. If you press the Tab key when the last cell of a column is selected, a new column is added. If you add or modify data in the last column, press the Tab key twice to add a column. Press the Tab key. If you press the Tab key in the last column, the first cell of the next row is selected. If you press the Tab key in the last cell of the table, a new row is added.
The previous cell Press Shift and Tab simultaneously. Press Shift and Tab simultaneously. If you press Shift and Tab simultaneously in the first cell, the last cell is selected.
The next cell below Press the Down Arrow key or Return. If you used the Tab key to navigate between cells, you can use the Return key to select the next cell below from the cell where you started using the Tab key. If you press Return when the last cell of a row is selected, a new row is added. If you add or modify data in the last cell, press Return twice to add a row. Press the Down Arrow key.
The next cell above Press the Up Arrow or Shift + Return. Press the Up Arrow key.

Selecting a group of table cells

You can select multiple cells, whether they are adjacent or not.

There are several ways to select a group of cells:

To select adjacent table cells, select a single cell, then hold Shift while you select the adjacent cells.

You can also click on a cell, then drag the cursor over multiple cells while holding down the mouse button.

To select non-adjacent cells in a table, hold Command while you select the cells. Use Command while clicking on a cell in a group to deselect it.

Selecting a row or column

Select rows and columns using the corresponding reference tabs.

To select an entire row or column:

1 Select a cell to display the reference tabs.
2 To select a column, click the corresponding reference tab (above the column).

To select a row, click the corresponding reference tab (to the left of the row).

Selecting the borders of table cells

Select the border segments of the cell when you want to format them. A single border segment corresponds to a single side of a cell. A long border segment includes all adjacent border segments.

There are several ways to select border segments:

To select border segments in one step, select a table, row, column, or cell.

Click the Borders button in the formatting bar and select an option from the local menu.

You can also click the Cell Borders buttons in the Table Inspector to select a border segment.

To select and deselect segments by clicking on them in a table, use the border selection mode. Select "Allow border selection" from the local Borders menu in the formatting bar or select Table > Allow border selection, then work on the table on which you want to work.

The mouse pointer changes shape when it passes over a horizontal or vertical segment. The pointer seems to "straddle" the segment.

The pointer looks like this when it passes over a horizontal segment.

The pointer looks like this when it passes over a vertical segment.

To select a long segment, click on a horizontal or vertical border of a cell. To select only a single segment, click on it again.

Click to toggle between selecting a single segment and a long segment or a long segment and a single segment.

To add a single or long segment to the selection, click while holding Shift or Command.

To deselect a single segment, click on it while holding Shift or Command.

To stop using the border selection mode, select "Do not allow border selection" from the local Borders menu in the formatting bar or select Table > Do not allow border selection.

Using the content of table cells

You can add text, numbers, and dates to the cells of a table, and you can format the values of these cells. You can also add images and a background color, as well as checkboxes, sliders, and other controls. Additionally, the auto-fill feature allows you to use the content of a cell to automatically add values to adjacent cells.

Adding and modifying cell values

You can add, modify, and delete cell content.

There are several ways to add and modify values:

If the cell is empty, select it then type a value. Refer to the section "Selecting a single table cell" on page 54 to learn how to select cells.
To replace specific existing content in a cell, select the cell and select the content you want to replace by double-clicking on it while pressing Shift, and select more content if you want to replace more. Type text to replace the selected content.
To replace everything in the cell, select it and start typing. If the "Return key moves to the next cell" option is not selected in the table inspector, you can select the cell, press Return or Enter to select everything in the cell, and start typing.
To insert content into existing content, select the cell, click to set the insertion point, and start typing.
To delete the content of cells, rows, or columns in a table, select the cells, rows, or columns, then press Delete or choose Edit > Delete.

To delete the content, background fill, and all style settings, choose Edit > Clear All. The default style is then applied to the selection.

To copy, paste, and move cell values, follow the instructions in the section "Copying and moving cells" on page 83.
To add formulas and functions to cells, see the instructions in the sections "Using formulas" on page 91 and "Using functions" on page 106.

Using text in cells

You can control the formatting and alignment of text in table cells. You can also use the Find/Replace functions and spell checker.

When you type text in a cell, Numbers automatically suggests text present in the table whose first letters are identical to those of the text you are currently typing. You can select the suggested text if it fits or continue typing your text while overwriting the suggested text.

Here are some techniques for using text in table cells:

To insert a line break, press Control + Return simultaneously.
To insert a paragraph break when the "Return key moves the cursor to the next cell" option in the Table Options of the Table Inspector is not selected, press only the Return key. Otherwise, press Option + Return.
To insert a tab in a table, press Option and Tab simultaneously.
To adjust text alignment, use the alignment buttons in the formatting bar.

The text inspector contains other text formatting options. To do this, click Inspector in the toolbar and the Text Inspector button.

To set font attributes, use the text formatting buttons on the formatting bar.

You can also use the Font panel (accessible by clicking Fonts in the toolbar).

To check spelling, follow the instructions in the section "Checking spelling" on page 163.

To search and possibly replace text in cells, follow the instructions in the section "Search and replace text" on page 165.
To prevent Numbers from interpreting what you type as a number, use text format. Refer to the section "Using Text format" on page 69 to learn more.

Using numbers in cells

Some table operations, such as formulas and functions that perform mathematical operations, depend on cells that contain numeric values.

Here are some techniques for using numbers in table cells:

In a numeric cell, you must use only digits between 0 and 9 or one of the following characters: +, -, (), /, $, %, a period, %, E or e.
- You can type certain characters (such as %) in a cell, or use a cell format, as described in the section "Formatting cell values" on page 62.
To specify a negative number, precede it with a minus sign (-).

When you enter a number in a table cell that is too long to display entirely, Numbers converts it:

When a decimal number does not fit in a cell, the number is rounded. For example, 1.7777777777777777777 becomes 1.77777777777778.

When an integer does not fit in a cell, it is displayed in scientific notation. For example, 777777777777777777777 becomes 7.777778E+19. Scientific notation consists of expressing numbers in the form of a decimal number multiplied by a factor that is a power of 10. The value of this power appears after the E symbol.

If the converted number still does not fit in the cell, it is truncated. For suggestions, see the section "Displaying content that is too long for the cell" on page 61.

Instructions for using formulas and functions in table cells can be found in the sections "Using formulas" on page 91 and "Using functions" on page 106.

Using dates in cells

Unless a cell is already in date and time format, when you enter a value that can be interpreted as a date or time, Numbers may change its formatting.

For example, if you enter 22/1/45 or 22-1-45 in a cell that is automatically formatted, the value becomes January 22, 2045 when you move to another cell. If you enter a two-digit year value greater than or equal to 50, Numbers adds the prefix "19" to it, otherwise Numbers adds the prefix "20".

Also, if you type 12 pm, the value becomes 12:00 PM. You can, however, modify the value if needed.

For more information about date and time format, see the "Using Date and Time Format" section on page 67.

Displaying content that is too long for the cell

When a cell is too small to display all its content:

If the cell contains a number or date, an indicator containing a plus sign (+) appears.

56.565.656 Indicator

For other types of values, no indicator appears. You can see only the content visible within the cell boundaries.

You can enlarge a cell to display more content and you can let numbers and dates overflow into adjacent empty cells.

There are several ways to solve problems related to content that is too large to fit in a cell:

To allow a numeric or date value in a cell to extend across adjacent cells, uncheck "Fit text to cell" in the cell inspector.

If adjacent cells are empty, they display the overflow content. However, if they contain data, the excess content is not displayed and the overflow indicator appears.

To fit the content instead of letting it extend across other cells, select Fit inspector in the formatting bar or "Fit text to cell" in the cell inspector.

If cell values are not visible because columns are not wide enough, click the Fit button next to the Column Width controls in the table inspector to display values in full. Select a cell, one or more columns, or the table, then click the Fit button.

You can also resize a column by dragging the right edge of its reference tab or by using the Column Width commands in the Table Inspector.

If cell values are not visible because rows are not tall enough, click the Fit button next to the Row Height controls in the table inspector to display values in full. Select a cell, one or more rows, or the table, then click the Fit button. When content in a row is added or removed, its height is automatically adjusted to fit the content height.

You can also resize a row by clicking the bottom edge of its corresponding reference tab and dragging it down or by using the Row Height controls in the table inspector.

You can also resize columns and rows based on content using the reference tabs.

To fit the height of a row to the tallest content, double-click the bottom edge of the row's reference tab. A column's width does not adjust automatically when you modify the content.

To fit the width of a column to the widest content, double-click the right edge of the column's reference tab.

Formatting cell values

You can apply formatting to a cell so that its value displays in a particular way. For example, you can format cells that contain monetary values so that a currency symbol (such as $, £, or ¥) appears before the numbers they contain. You can also format cells so that they contain controls, such as checkboxes and sliders that are used to add or modify cell values.

When you use a cell format, you define only the display characteristics of a value. In formulas, the actual value is used, not the formatted value. The only exception occurs when there are too many digits after a decimal point, in which case the number is rounded.

You can define cell formats using the formatting bar or the Cell Format local menu in the cell inspector. To display cell values as you type them, select Automatic; otherwise, choose the element that applies the desired formatting.

There are several ways to use cell formats:

To add a value in an empty cell associated with a format, select the cell and enter a value. The format is applied when you leave the cell.
To apply a cell format to an existing value, select one or more cells containing values. Use the Cell Inspector or the formatting bar to define the format of a cell. The format you define is then applied to the values of the selected cells.
To display a value identical to what you enter, select the cell and select Automatic in the formatting bar or the Cell Format local menu in the cell inspector. The value remains, but the formatting is removed.
If you delete a value from a cell associated with a format, the format is not deleted. To remove the formatting, select Automatic in the formatting bar or the Cell Format local menu in the Cell Inspector.
- Once the format of a cell is defined, you can associate it with multiple cells using autofill. Refer to the "Auto-filling cells in a table" section on page 74 for instructions.

Using numeric format

Use numeric format to format the display of the number of digits after the decimal point, thousands separators, and negative values.

To define a number format that displays two digits after the decimal point, but no thousands separator or minus sign in front of negative numbers, select cells and click the Number Format button in the formatting bar. Click the "Decrease decimal places" and "Increase decimal places" buttons to the right of the Number Format button to change the number of decimal places.

Use the cell inspector to access other number format controls.

To define a number format using the cell inspector:

1 Select the cell or cells.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Cell Inspector button.
3 Choose Number from the Cell Format local menu.
4 To specify the number of decimal digits to display, use the Decimal Places field. If a value contains more decimal digits than the number you specified, the displayed value is rounded, not truncated. For example, if a cell is formatted to display two decimal digits, the value 3.456 is displayed as 3.46 and not 3.45.
5 To specify how negative values are displayed, choose an option from the local menu next to the Decimal Places field.
6 To specify whether to use a thousands separator, select Thousands Separator.

Using currency format

Use currency format to format the display of monetary values.

To define a currency format that displays two digits after the decimal point, a thousands separator, and a minus sign in front of negative numbers, select one or more cells and click the Currency Format button in the formatting bar. Click the "Decrease decimal places" and "Increase decimal places" buttons to the right of the Number Format button to change the number of decimal places.

Use the cell inspector to access other currency format controls.

To define a currency format using the cell inspector:

1 Select the cell or cells.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Cell Inspector button.
3 Choose Currency from the Cell Format local menu.
4 To specify a currency symbol, choose an option from the Symbol local menu.

You can display the complete list of options using the Symbol local menu by clicking Numbers > Preferences and then selecting "Show complete list of currencies in cell inspector" in the General window.

5 To specify the number of decimal digits to display, use the Decimal Places field. If a value contains more decimal digits than the number you specified, the displayed value is rounded, not truncated. For example, if a cell is formatted to display two decimal digits, the value 3.456 is displayed as 3.46 and not 3.45.
6 To specify how negative values are displayed, choose an option from the local menu next to the Decimal Places field.
7 To specify whether to use a thousands separator, select Thousands Separator.
To display the currency at the edge of the cell, select Accounting Style.

Using Percentage format

Use Percentage format to display numeric values followed by the % symbol.

If the value is used in a formula, its decimal form is used. For example, a value that displays 3% is used as 0.03 in a formula.

If you type 3% in a cell that is automatically formatted and then apply Percentage formatting to the cell, the displayed value is 3%. However, if you type 3 in a cell that is automatically formatted and then apply Percentage formatting to the cell, the displayed value is 300%.

To define a percentage format that displays two digits after the decimal point, a thousands separator, and a minus sign in front of negative numbers, select one or more cells and click the Percentage Format button in the formatting bar. Click the "Decrease decimal places" and "Increase decimal places" buttons to the right of the Number Format button to change the number of decimal places.

Use the cell inspector to access other percentage format controls.

To define a percentage format using the cell inspector:

1 Select the cell or cells.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Cell Inspector button.
3 Choose Percentage from the Cell Format local menu.
4 To specify the number of decimal digits to display, use the Decimal Places field. If a value contains more decimal digits than the number you specified, the displayed value is rounded, not truncated. For example, if a cell is formatted to display two decimal digits, the value 3.456 is displayed as 3.46 and not 3.45.
5 To specify how negative values are displayed, choose an option from the local menu next to the Decimal Places field.
6 To specify whether to use a thousands separator, select Thousands Separator.

If the cell you are formatting already contains a value, the value is treated as a decimal number and converted to a percentage. For example, 3 becomes 300%.

Using Date and Time format

Use Date and Time format to display date and/or time values.

To define a date and time format, click the "Other cell formats" button on the formatting bar, select cells, click Date and Time in the local menu, and select an option from the submenu.

Use the cell inspector to access other date and time format controls.

To define a date and time format using the cell inspector:

1 Select the cell or cells.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Cell Inspector button.
3 Select Date and Time from the Cell Format local menu.
4 To specify the date formatting, choose a format from the Date local menu.
5 To specify the time formatting, choose a format from the Time local menu.

Using Fraction format

Use Fraction format to control the display of values less than 1. For example, 27.5 displays as 27 1/2 when the format is set to Halves and as 27 4/8 when the format is set to Eighths.

To define a fraction format, select one or more cells, select Fractions from the "Other cell formats" local menu on the formatting bar. Then select a format from the submenu.

You can also use the cell inspector.

To define a fraction format for selected cells using the Cell Inspector:

1 Select the cell or cells.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Cell Inspector button.
3 Choose Fraction from the Cell Format local menu.
4 Choose a display format from the Precision local menu.

Using Scientific notation format

Scientific notation format allows you to express numbers as a decimal number multiplied by a power of 10. The power value appears after the E symbol. For example, the value 5.00 in scientific notation is displayed as 5.00E0. Similarly, the value 12345 is displayed as 1.2345E4.

To define a scientific notation format that displays two decimal places, select one or more cells, then select Scientific from the "Other cell formats" button on the formatting bar.

Use the cell inspector to define another number of decimal places.

To define a scientific notation format for one or more cells using the Cell Inspector:

1 Select the cell or cells.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Cell Inspector button.
3 Choose Scientific from the Cell Format local menu.
4 To specify the number of decimal places to display, use the Decimal Places field.

Using Text format

Use Text format when you want the entire content of a cell to be treated as text, even if it is a number.

Here are some ways to define a text format for one or more selected cells:

Click the "Other cell formats" button on the formatting bar and select Text.

Click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Cell Inspector button and select Text from the Cell Format local menu.

Using a checkbox and other control formats

You can add a checkbox, a slider, a scroll arrow or a pop-up menu to a cell:

A checkbox is intended for cells whose value indicates two states, for example enabled or disabled or yes or no.

A slider allows you to quickly change numbers over a large range and see the effects of such changes in other cells of the table or in a chart.

A scroll arrow allows you to increase or decrease a number by specific increments.

A pop-up menu allows you to predefine the values that a cell can contain.

When a cell is formatted to use a checkbox or pop-up menu, you can add or modify the content of a cell only by using the control. Cells that use a slider or scroll arrow allow you to enter a value or use the control; when you click outside the cell, the value changes based on the settings you made when you defined the slider and scroll arrow.

There are several ways to add controls to cells:

To add a checkbox, select the cell or cells.

Click the Checkbox button in the format bar. Unchecked boxes are added to the selected cells.

You can also click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Cell Inspector button. Select Checkbox from the Cell Format pop-up menu and the initial state (Checked or Unchecked).

To add a slider, click the "Other cell formats" button in the format bar, then select Slider from the pop-up menu. A slider with the default settings, and visible in the Cell Inspector, is then created.

You can also open the Cell Inspector and select Slider from the Cell Format pop-up menu.

In the Cell Inspector, you can modify the default settings:

Minimum and Maximum: indicate the lowest and highest cell value.

Increment: indicates how much the cell value increases or decreases when you move the slider (or press the arrow keys) by one increment.

Position: allows you to position the slider to the right or below the cell.

Display as: applies a number, currency, percentage or scientific format to cell values.

Decimals: specifies the number of decimal places to display.

To add a pop-up menu, click the Other cell formats button in the format bar, then select Pop-up menu from the pop-up menu to create a pop-up menu with the default settings.

You can also open the Cell Inspector and select Pop-up menu from the Cell Format pop-up menu.

In the Cell Inspector, modify the dummy parameter entries in the list, select them and type another value.

To add an item to the list, click the + sign and type the item. If you type a number, it is treated as a number not as text.

Click the - sign to remove an item.

To add a scroll arrow, click the Other cell formats button in the format bar, then select Scroll arrow from the pop-up menu to create a scroll arrow with the default settings.

You can also open the Cell Inspector and select Scroll arrow from the Cell Format pop-up menu.

In the Cell Inspector, modify the default settings if desired:

Minimum and Maximum: indicate the lowest and highest cell value.

Increment: indicates how much the cell value increases or decreases when you click the scroll arrow (or press the arrow keys) once.

Display as: applies a number, currency, percentage or scientific format to cell values.

Decimals: specifies the number of decimal places to display.

Cell value control

Numbers can change the fill color or text color of a cell if its content has specific conditions.

You can define simple rules that test the condition, then change the fill color and/or text color if the condition is met. For example, you can define a rule that applies blue color to a cell if it contains a specific value and another rule that applies green color to the cell if it contains a different value.

You can apply this type of rule to a single cell or to a range of cells. Rules applied to multiple cells trigger the color change if at least one of the cells meets the rule condition.

To define rules:

1 Select one or more cells.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar and click the Cell Inspector button.
3 Select Conditional Format, then click Show Rules.
4 Select "Highlight cells according to the following rules"
5 Choose a condition from the "Choose a rule" pop-up menu

Conditions in the upper section of the menu perform tests on numeric values. Conditions applicable to text values appear in the middle section of the list; date conditions are at the bottom.

Note that the Between condition requires entering two numbers. This condition is met if either of the two numbers or any number between these two numbers appears in the cell or cells.

6 Provide the additional information needed to define a particular condition to test.
7 Select Fill Color and/or Text Color, then click the color boxes (see the "Using the Colors window" section on page 179) to set the background and value colors to apply to the cell if the condition is met.
8 To add a rule, click + and repeat steps 5 to 7.

If multiple rules are defined for a cell and the cell content meets the conditions of multiple rules, the colors associated with the highest rule in the rules list are applied to the cell.

To stop using a rule, click the - button to delete the rule or deselect the Fill Color and Text Color option to disable the rule. To stop using a list of rules, uncheck "Highlight cells according to the following rules"

Adding images and colors to cells

You can add graphics or colors to certain cells or the entire table.

To add an image or color to a table cell:

1 Select the cell.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Table Inspector.
3 To add an image, select Image Fill from the Background pop-up menu. See the "Filling an object with an image" section on page 180 for instructions.
4 To add a background color, select Color Fill or Gradient Fill from the Background pop-up menu. See the "Filling an object with color" section on page 178 for more information.

Autofilling table cells

Autofill allows you to use the content of one or more cells to automatically add values to adjacent cells.

Here are some ways to autofill cells:

To paste the content and fill of a cell into adjacent cells, select the cell, then drag the handle in the lower right corner to the cells where you want to paste the content. You can drag it to the right to add values in the same row or down to add values to adjacent cells in the same column.

All data or formulas or all cell formats or fills associated with the cell are pasted, but not comments.

If the selected cell contains no data, autofill erases all data from the target cells.

You can also add values to cells based on value patterns. For example, if a cell contains the name of a day of the week or a month, you can select the cell and then drag it to the right or down to add the next day or month to the adjacent cell.

To create new values based on numeric patterns, select two or more cells before dragging them. For example, if the two selected cells contain the values 1 and 2, the values 3 and 4 are added when you drag the cursor over the two adjacent cells. Similarly, if the two selected cells contain the values 1 and 4, the values 7 and 10 are added when you drag the cursor over the two adjacent cells (the values are incremented by 3).

Autofill does not establish any relationship between the cells in the group. Once autofill is complete, you can modify the cells individually.

Using rows and columns

You can quickly add and delete rows and columns, create a row or column of headers or footer row, and more.

When you insert, delete, resize, hide or show rows or columns of a table, other objects on the worksheet may be moved to avoid overlap or maintain a relative position of objects. To prevent these automatic movements of objects, choose Numbers > Preferences and in the General pane, uncheck "Move objects automatically when resizing tables"

Adding rows

You can add rows within a table or at the end of a table. If the table contains a footer row, rows added at the bottom of the table are placed above the footer row.

Here are different ways to add rows:

To add a row, position the pointer over the reference tab of a row to display the menu arrow and click it. Then select "Insert row above" or "Insert row below" from the pop-up menu. These commands are also available in the Table menu.
To add a row at the end of the table, press the Return key when the last cell is selected. Press Return twice if you just added or modified the cell value.

If the "Return key moves to next cell" option in Table Options in the Table Inspector is not selected, press Tab from the first cell of the row.

To add one or more rows at the end of the table, you can use the Row handle located in the lower left, which becomes visible when you select a cell.

To add a row at the end of the table, click once on the Row handle.

To add multiple rows at the end of the table, drag down the Row handle or Column and Row handle (located in the lower right).

To add rows and columns simultaneously, drag the Column and Row handle diagonally.

You can divide cells into two equal rows. The "Dividing table cells" section on page 81 tells you how to do it.

Adding columns

You can add columns to a table.

Here are different ways to add columns:

To add a column, position the pointer over the reference tab of a column to display the menu arrow. Click the arrow and select "Insert column before" or "Insert column after" from the pop-up menu. These commands are also available in the Table menu.
- You can add a column to the right of the table by pressing the Tab key if the "Return key moves to next cell" option in Table Options is selected in the Table Inspector.

Press Tab once after selecting the last cell. Press Tab twice if you just added or modified the cell value.

To add one or more columns to the right of a table, you can use the Column handle in the upper right, which becomes visible when you select a cell.

To add a column to the right of the table, click once on the Column handle. To add multiple columns to the right of the table, drag the Column handle to the right or the Column and Row handle (located in the lower right).

To add rows and columns simultaneously, drag the Column and Row handle diagonally.

You can divide cells into two equal columns. The "Dividing table cells" section on page 81 tells you how to do it.

Rearranging rows and columns

Using a row or column reference tab, you can move or copy the row or column elsewhere in the same table or in another.

Here are different ways to rearrange rows and columns:

To move a column or row elsewhere in the same table or in another, click on the reference tab of the column or row, then click and drag the reference tab. Release the left mouse button where you want to insert the column or row when the bold line is highlighted.
To insert a copy of a row or column elsewhere in the table or in another, click on the reference tab, click again and drag the column or row where you want it while holding down the Option key and the reference tab.

You can also copy or move a single cell or a group of adjacent cells in the same table or in another. See the "Copying and moving cells" section for instructions.

Deleting rows and columns

There are several techniques for deleting one or more rows or columns from a table.

Here are different ways to delete rows or columns:

Select the rows or columns, or one of the cells in the column or row, then choose Table > Delete Row, or Table > Delete Column.
To delete a row or column, position the pointer over the reference tab of the row or column to display the menu arrow and select Delete row or Delete column from the pop-up menu.
To delete multiple adjacent rows or columns, select them and click "Delete selected rows" or "Delete selected columns" from the pop-up menu of a reference tab of a selected column or row.

Drag the Row handle located in the lower left or the Column handle in the lower right to delete empty rows.

To delete non-empty rows, drag them while holding down the Option key.

To delete empty columns, drag the Column handle in the upper right inward.

To delete non-empty columns, drag them while holding down the Option key.

Using a table header row or column

Use header rows and columns to identify the data in rows and columns. Header rows and columns are formatted so they stand out from other rows and columns. A header row is the top cell in each column. A header column is the leftmost cell in each row.

Header rows and columns are placed at the beginning of the table and on every page if the table spans multiple pages. If a table extends across multiple pages, changing the text or appearance of the header row or column in one place results in the same change throughout the table.

You cannot split a header row or footer into multiple rows or header columns into multiple columns.

Here are different ways to add or remove a header row or column:

Select the table and click the Header button in the format bar.

If the table does not contain a header row or column, one is added. If the table contains a header row or column, it is removed.

Select the table. Click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Table Inspector button, then click the appropriate "Headers and footers" button.

Select the table and one of the following options in the Table menu: Insert header row, Delete header row, Insert header column or Delete header column.
If a table extends across multiple pages and you want to repeat the headers at the beginning of each page, select "Repeat header cells on each page" in Table Options in the Table Inspector.

Cells in a header row or header column are called header cells. Header cells play an important role because they make it easier to read and create formulas in table cells. For more information, see the "Using cell references" section on page 100 and "Applying a formula to cells in a column or row at once" on page 103.

Using a footer row

Use a footer row to draw attention to the last row of a table. A footer row can contain the same data as any other row, but its formatting gives it more visual impact.

Here are different ways to add or remove a footer row:

Select the table and click the Footer button in the format bar.

— Add a footer row.

If the table does not contain any footer row, one is added. If the table contains a footer row, it is deleted.

Select the table. Click Inspector in the toolbar, then the Table Inspector button, then the appropriate "Headers and footers" button. If the table does not contain any footer row, one is added. If the table contains a footer row, it is deleted.

Select the table and "Insert footer row" or "Delete footer row" from the Table menu.

Options for hiding rows and columns

You can hide instead of delete certain rows or columns that you don't want to display or use. A hidden column or row cannot be formatted, merged, split or modified. However, this has no effect on formulas that use a hidden cell.

To hide a row or column:

Select Hide row or Hide column from the context menu of the reference tab.

To show hidden rows and columns, Select Table > "Show all rows" or Table > "Show all columns"

Columns or rows hidden in tables in Numbers are not visible when you copy tables to other iWork '08 applications. To show all hidden rows, Select the table, then choose Format > Table > Show all rows or Show all columns.

Resizing rows and columns

Resize all rows and columns so they are the same size, or resize only specific rows and columns.

Here are different ways to resize rows and columns:

To make all rows the same size, Select the table, then choose Table > "Distribute rows evenly"
To make all columns the same size, choose Table > "Distribute columns evenly"
To resize a single row, drag the bottom border of the row reference tab up or down.

You can also select the row and use the Row Height field in the Table Inspector.

To resize a column, drag the right border of the column reference tab left or right.

You can also select a cell and use the Column Width field in the Table Inspector.

To make multiple rows the same size, Select one or more cells in the rows and Select Table > "Distribute rows evenly". The rows do not need to be adjacent.

You can also drag the bottom border of a row reference tab up or down or use the Row Height field in the Table Inspector.

To make multiple columns the same size, select one or more cells in the columns and select Table > Distribute columns evenly. The columns do not need to be adjacent.

You can also drag the right border of a column reference tab left or right, or use the Column Width field in the Table Inspector.

To shrink a row or column to eliminate unused space by cell values, Select a cell and click the Fit buttons in the Table Inspector.

If cell content is truncated after resizing it, see the "Displaying content too long for the cell" section on page 61.

Alternating row colors

Alternate the background color of every other row to give the table a banded effect.

To alternate row colors:

1 Select the table.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar then click the Table Inspector button.
3 Select Alternate row color.
4 Click the color box next to it to open the Colors window, then select a color for the alternating rows. See the "Using the Colors window" section on page 179 for instructions.
5 To change the fill properties of other rows, use the Background controls in the Table Inspector. See the "Filling an object with color" section on page 178 for instructions.

Using table cells

You can split and merge table cells, resize them, format them, hide them, add comments, and more.

Merging table cells

Merging table cells means combining adjacent cells into a single cell, eliminating borders so they act as a single cell.

To merge table cells:

1 Select a group of two or more adjacent cells. The selected group of cells must form a rectangle; select only body or header cells.
2 Select Table > Merge cells.

You can also click the Merge button in the Table Inspector.

Horizontally merging adjacent cells containing only text or a mix of text, numbers, formatted values, and formulas amounts to joining the content of all original cells in text separated by tabs. Similarly, vertically merging adjacent cells containing only text or a mix of text, numbers, formatted values, and formulas amounts to joining the content of all original cells in text separated by a carriage return.

When merging column cells, the background of the cells takes the image or color of the topmost cell. When merging row cells, the background of the cells takes the image or color of the leftmost cell.

When a cell containing text, a number, a formula, or cell formatting is merged with an empty cell, the new cell retains the content of the non-empty cell.

When a cell containing a number format is merged with an empty cell, the new cell also retains the number format.

Splitting table cells

Splitting cells divides each selected cell into two equal parts, horizontally (rows) or vertically (columns). The two new cells have identical background colors or images. Any text in the original cell remains in the topmost or leftmost cell.

To split cells horizontally or vertically:

1 Select one or more cells in the table. To split an entire column or row, select all cells in the column or row.

2 To split cells into rows, choose Table > Split into rows. To split cells into columns, choose Table > Split into columns.

You can also click the Split button in the Table Inspector.

3 To create progressively smaller units, repeat steps 1 and 2 to split the cells.

To rejoin split cells, merge them as described in the "Merging table cells" section on page 81.

Formatting cell borders

You can change the thickness and color of cell borders in a table.
You can also hide the border of any cell.

To format table cell borders:

1 Select the cell border segments to format. See the "Selecting cell borders in a table" section on page 56 for instructions.

2 Use the controls in the format bar or Table Inspector.

Line Style menu: allows you to choose a line style. Select None to hide borders.

Line thickness: allows you to control the thickness of the line.

Color source: allows you to choose a line color.

When you click the color box in the format bar, a color table appears. Click a color to select it or click Show colors to open the Colors window that contains more colors.

When you click the color box in the Table Inspector, the Colors window appears. The "Using the Colors window" section on page 179 contains instructions for using this tool.

Copying and moving cells

To move or copy table cells, you can use commands or drag them.

Here are different ways to copy and move cells:

To move cells within a table or to another table, Select a cell or adjacent cells, then click and drag the selection by its border until the destination cells are selected. All values in the destination cells are replaced.
To copy cells within a table or to another, drag the selected cells while holding down the Option key. All values in the destination cells are replaced.

You can copy cells by selecting them and choosing Edit > Copy; then select the destination cells and choose Edit > Paste.

To insert copied cells without overwriting destination cells, Select Insert > Copied columns or Insert > Copied rows after selecting the destination cells.

Copied columns: adds new columns to receive the copied cells.

Copied rows: adds new rows to receive the copied cells.

When a cell value is replaced, any comment associated with the cell is also replaced.

To learn how to copy and move rows and columns using reference tabs, see the "Rearranging rows and columns" section on page 76.

See the "Copying or moving formulas containing cell references" section on page 102 for more information on techniques for duplicating or moving a cell containing a formula.

Adding comments

Use comments to clarify information about table cells.

There are different ways to work with comments:

To add a comment to a cell, Select it and click Comment in the toolbar. Type the comment in the corresponding field.
To move a comment, drag it.
To hide all comments, select Presentation > Hide comments. A yellow marker appears whenever a table cell contains a comment.

To hide a comment, click the minus sign in the upper right corner of the comment field.

To display a hidden comment, click the corresponding marker.
To show all comments, select Presentation > Show comments.
To delete a comment, click the X mark in the upper right corner of the comment field.
To display comments when printing a sheet, display the comments to print and Select File > Print sheet.

Reorganizing tables

You can use sort and filter options to reorganize data in tables.

Sort: allows you to arrange values in some or all cells in ascending or descending order. The rows containing the cells chosen for sorting are then reorganized.

Filtering: allows you to hide rows in a table that don't contain the values you specify.

Sorting table cells

You have the option to sort all or some values in a column in ascending or descending order. The rows containing the cells chosen for sorting are then reorganized. Header cells are excluded from this sorting.

Here are different ways to sort:

To sort all cells in a column, select "Sort in ascending order" or "Sort in descending order" from the context menu of the column reference tab.
You can also click Sort and filter in the toolbar or select "Show the Sort and filter panel" from the context menu of a reference tab. Use the context menus under Sort to select a column and sort order.
To re-sort values after modifying them, click Refresh in the Sort and filter panel.
To sort only certain cells in a column, select the cells, open the Sort and filter panel, select a sort order, and click Refresh.
To sort all cells in a column and re-sort the results taking into account values from another column, open the Sort and filter panel, Select a column and sort order in the Sort context menus, click the + sign, Select another column and sort order then click Refresh.

To add sort criteria, click the + sign to define each criteria you want to add.

The following table describes how each type of data is sorted in ascending or descending order.

Data type Ascending order Descending order
Text aA-zZ Zz-Aa
Dates Year (least recent first), then Month (January first) and Day (1-31) Year (most recent first), then Month (December first) and Day (3-11)
Numbers -2, -1, 0, 1, etc. 1, 0, -1, -2, etc.
Cells containing only text, combined with others containing only numbers -2, -1, 0, 1, etc., then aA-zZ Zz-Aa, then 1, 0, -1, -2, etc.
Cells containing a mix of text and numbers Values starting with numbers first (1z, 1Z, a1, A1) Values starting with text first (A1, a1, 1A, 1z)
Empty cells At the bottom of the list At the bottom of the list
Boolean (TRUE/FALSE) Below text and above empty cell Above text values

Filtering rows

You can hide rows in a table that do not contain the specified values.

To specify the criteria for rows you want to display:

1 Select the table.
2 Click Sort and filter in the toolbar or select "Show the Sort and filter panel" from the context menu of a reference tab.
3 Select "Show rows that match this" then the column whose values you want to use to filter criteria.
4 Use the other controls to set the column value of the rows to display.
5 To add filter criteria, click the + sign to define each criteria you want to add.

If you select "among the first n values" or "among the last n values", all values corresponding to the n top or bottom values are displayed, which may result in more values than n.

If the filter criteria hide a new empty row, you won't be able to add new rows until you redefine the filter.

To stop filtering rows in the table, uncheck "Show rows that match this"

This chapter explains how to use table styles to quickly manage the appearance of tables and give them visual consistency.

It can be wise to use distinct visual characteristics for different tables included in your Numbers spreadsheet. For example, you can use a blue background and border for a table containing entries and assumptions, and a gray background and border for a table containing calculation results.

The simplest way to change the appearance of a table is to apply a table style to it. Table styles ensure consistency in the formatting of these elements.

Numbers templates contain a number of ready-to-use styles. You can also modify template styles or create your own styles.

Using table styles

A table style corresponds to a predefined formatting applicable to a table with a simple click of the mouse.

A table style predefines the following attributes:

the background of the table (in the form of color or image) and its opacity;

the lines, color and opacity of the borders of body cells, as well as the outer borders of the header row and column and the footer row;

the background (in the form of color or image, as well as opacity) and the text attributes of the cells that make up the table, including header and footer cells.

Applying styles to tables

After applying a style to a table, you can modify the formatting defined by this style. This modification is known as override. If you then apply another style to the table, you can keep or remove the overrides you have made.

There are several ways to apply a style to a table:

To replace a table style and remove the overrides made, Select the table, click the arrow to the right of the style to apply, then Select Clear and apply style.

You can also select Format > Apply table style again.

To replace a style applied to a table but keep the overrides made, Select the table, then click on the name of a style in the Styles panel located to the left of the window. You can also Select a table, click the arrow to the right of the style to apply, then Select 'Clear and apply style'

You can also drag the name of a style from the Styles panel onto a table. It is not necessary to select the table in this case.

To replace the style of all tables on a sheet but keep the overrides, drag the name of a style from the Styles panel onto the icon representing a sheet in the Sheets panel.

Modifying table style

In most cases, you can change the appearance of a table by applying another style to it. You can also redefine attributes of the style applied to the table or copy/paste the style to modify the style of a table.

Modifying attributes of a table style

You can modify the appearance of a table by acting on the attributes of its style.

There are several ways to modify the attributes of a table's style:

To modify the background color of a table, header cells, or body cells, select the table or cells and click the Fill box on the formatting bar.

You can use the 'Cell background' commands from the Tables Inspector to make other changes to the selection. Refer to the 'Filling an object with an image' section on page 180 and 'Filling an object with color' section on page 178 to learn more about these commands.

To modify the opacity of the background, use the Opacity commands from the Graphics inspector. Refer to the 'Adjusting opacity' section on page 176 for instructions.

To modify the line and color of table cell borders, follow the individual instructions in the 'Formatting cell borders' section on page 82.
To format the text of one or more cells, select them.

To modify the color, alignment, and spacing of text in a cell, use the formatting bar of the Text Inspector (to open it, click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Text Inspector button).

To modify font attributes, use the Font panel (accessible by clicking Fonts in the toolbar).

If you want to use the changes to redefine the table style and apply it to the entire spreadsheet, click the arrow to the right of the style, then choose 'Redefine style from table'. All tables in the spreadsheet that use the style are then updated to reflect the changes you have made, but the overrides remain intact.

You can also create a style using the changes you have made, by clicking the arrow to the right of the style, then choosing 'Create a new style'

Copying and pasting table styles

You can modify the appearance of a table by copying/pasting table and cell styles.

Here are different ways to copy and paste table styles:

To copy the style of a cell, select it and select Format > Copy Style.
To apply a copied cell style to other cells, Select those cells and Choose Format > Paste Style.
To paste a copied table using the default table style of the spreadsheet, Choose Edit > Paste and apply current style.

Using the default table style

Each spreadsheet has a style, applicable to tables, designated as the default table style. This is the style applied by default to new tables.

To change the default style of tables:

Click the arrow to the right of the style you want to use as the default style and select 'Set as default style for new tables'

To use the default table style applicable to a reusable table, follow the instructions in the 'Defining reusable tables' section on page 52.

Creating table styles

You can create a table style by modifying the formatting of a table and saving it as a table style.

To create a table style:

1 Follow the instructions in the 'Modifying table style attributes' section on page 88 to apply the desired visual effects.
2 Select the table, click the arrow to the right of the desired style in the Styles panel, then choose 'Create a new style'
3 Assign a unique name to each new style, then click OK.

The new table style, which now appears in the Styles panel, can be applied to any table in your spreadsheet.

For the new style to be available in other spreadsheets, create a template from this sheet. See 'Designing a template' on page 208 for more information.

Renaming a table style

You can change the name of a table style.

To rename a table style:

1 Click the arrow to the right of the style in the Styles panel.
2 Choose Rename Style.
3 Modify the name of the style ensuring it is unique in the spreadsheet.
4 Press Return.

Deleting a table style

If you delete a table style used in a spreadsheet, you must Choose another to replace it.

To delete a style:

1 Click the arrow to the right of the style in the Styles panel.
2 Choose Delete Style.
3 If the style you want to delete is used in the active spreadsheet, Choose a style to replace it, then click OK.

This chapter explains how to perform calculations in table cells using formulas and functions.

For instructions on adding and formatting tables and the data they contain, refer to Chapter 3, 'Using tables' on page 46. For detailed information about each function, refer to Chapter 12, 'Function Dictionary' on page 214.

Using formulas

A formula is a mathematical expression using operations to determine a value. You can add a formula to a table cell to display a value derived from the values of other cells.

For example, you can add a formula to the cell at the bottom of a column adding the numbers found in the other cells of the column. If one of the values in the column changes, the total in the cell at the bottom then changes automatically.

Formulas allow you to obtain values through a calculation performed using operators and functions.

Operators perform basic arithmetic operations such as addition (+) and multiplication (*)

Here is a formula that adds values: =A2 + 16. A2 is a reference to a cell; the second cell of the first column. The value 16 is a constant because it is a particular value that uses no operator and no function.

The value of cell A2 is added to the value 16. The sum appears in the cell containing the formula.

Formulas always begin with the equals sign (=). For simplicity, the equals sign is omitted in the examples throughout the Numbers documentation.

While functions are named and predefined operations, such as SUM and AVERAGE.

To use a function, you must assign it a name and then specify, in parentheses after that name, the arguments it needs. The arguments specify the data the function must use when performing the operations intended for it.

Here is a formula that adds the values of nine adjacent cells in the first column: SUM(A2:A10). In this case, we have a single argument, namely 'A2:A10'. The colon symbol indicates that the formula uses the values of cells A2 through A10 inclusive.

You do not need to know more to be able to use formulas in tables. The templates (such as Loan Comparison and Mortgage Calculation) and formula editing tools (such as the formula editor and the formula bar) simplify the use of basic formulas.

Guided tour of using formulas

Reviewing the formulas built into Invoice mode is a good introduction to using formulas in Numbers.

1 Create a Numbers spreadsheet using the Invoice template.

Open Numbers; in the template selector, click Business, select Invoice and click Choose.

The Invoice table in this template uses formulas to calculate the values in the Cost column.

2 Double-click on the dollar value at the top of the Cost column. The Formula Editor then opens, highlighting that this value is the result of a formula.

The names in the header row (Quantity and Unit Price) are used in the formula to refer to two cells. Using the header text to refer to cells makes the formulas more readable. But you can also use the letters and numbers of the reference tabs as we will see in step 4.

3 If the value of one of the cells in the Quantity or Unit Price column changes, the formula associated with Price updates the value displayed there. To verify this, type a value in the Quantity and Unit Price cells in a row as needed and observe the refresh of the adjacent Cost cell value.
4 Double-click on the cell in the Cost column in the row containing Subtotal. In this formula, two cells are identified using the identifiers of the reference tabs. When you use these identifiers to identify a cell in a formula, specify the column letter first, then the row number.

The notation used to refer to a cell is called a cell reference. As we have seen, you can create a cell reference by using header text or by using a reference tab identifier.

5 The Subtotal formula uses a function named SUM.

A function is a predefined operation. The SUM function adds the values specified in parentheses. In this example, the SUM function adds the values of cells D2 through D9. The colon (:) is a shorthand way to refer to a range of cells.

6 The values in the Cost column are formatted to be displayed using a cell format (currency).

To see the cell format settings, first close the Formula Editor by clicking outside the table. Then click on the table, then on any cell in the Cost column. Then click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Cell Inspector button.

In this example, a $ sign is displayed in front of the cell numbers.

To learn more about the options for displaying values in table cells, refer to the 'Formatting cell values' section on page 62.

Performing instant calculations

The results of the most common calculations using the value of at least two selected cells are displayed in the lower left part of the Numbers window.

To perform instant calculations:

1 Select at least two cells in the table. They do not need to be adjacent. The result of the calculations of the values of these cells is instantly displayed in the lower left part of the window.

Sum: sum of the numerical values found in the selected cells.

Avg: average of the numerical values found in the selected cells.

Min: the smallest number among the selected cells.

Max: the largest number among the selected cells.

Count: total of the numerical values and date and time values found in the selected cells.

Empty cells and cells containing other types of values are not used in the calculations.

2 To perform another series of instant calculations, Select other cells.

If a particular calculation proves very useful and you want to integrate it into a table, you can add it as a formula in an empty cell of the table. Simply drag the sum, average or any other element found in the lower left part of the window to an empty cell. The empty cell does not need to be in the same table as the cells used for the calculations.

Adding a quick formula

A simple way to perform a basic calculation from values found in adjacent cells is to add a quick formula through the context menu visible when you click Function in the toolbar.

Here are operations you can perform using the context menu:

Choose one of the following options to perform calculations using the values of selected cells. Empty cells and cells containing unmentioned values are ignored.

Sum: calculates the sum of the numerical values of the cells.

Average: calculates the arithmetic average of the values of the cells.

Minimum: determines the smallest value of the cells.

Maximum: determines the largest value of the cells.

Count: determines the total of numbers or date or time values in the cells.

Product: multiplies all the numerical values of the cells.

Select Other Functions to open the function browser. For more information about this tool, see the 'Using functions' section on page 106.

Select Formula Editor to open this tool. You will find usage instructions in the 'Using the Formula Editor' section on page 97.

Basic calculation with values from the same row

Using the context menu of the Function button in the toolbar, it is easy to perform basic calculations from adjacent values in the same column and display the results.

Here are several ways to perform basic calculations from values found in the same column:

To use the values of adjacent cells, Select the cells, click Function in the toolbar and Select a calculation formula from the context menu.

Numbers places the formula and its result in the first empty cell found below the selected ones. If there is no empty cell, Numbers adds a row to preserve the result.

To use all the values in a column, click on the column header cell or the reference tab, then on Function in the toolbar, and finally select a calculation formula from the context menu.

Numbers places this formula and its result on a footer row. If this row does not exist, Numbers adds one.

Basic calculation with values from the same row

Using the context menu of the Function button in the toolbar, it is easy to perform basic calculations from adjacent values in the same row and display the results.

Here are several ways to perform basic calculations from values found on the same row:

To use the values of adjacent cells, select the cells, click Function in the toolbar and select a calculation formula from the local menu.

Numbers places the formula and its result in the first empty cell found to the right of the selected ones. If there is no empty cell, Numbers adds a column to preserve the result.

To use all the values of a row, click on the row header cell or on the reference tab, then on Function in the toolbar, and finally select a calculation formula from the local menu.

Numbers places this formula and its result in a new column.

Deleting a formula

If you can no longer use a formula associated with a cell, you can delete it quickly.

To delete a formula from a cell:

1 Select the cell.
2 Then press the Delete key.

Using the Formula Editor

The Formula Editor allows you to create and modify formulas.

You can open the Formula Editor in several ways:

Select a cell in the table, then type the equal sign (=) .
Double-click on a cell in the table containing a formula.

Click Function in the toolbar and select Formula Editor from the local menu.

When it opens, the Formula Editor appears above the selected cell. To move it, place the cursor on the left side of the Formula Editor until it takes the shape of a hand, then click and drag.

When you select a cell containing a formula, its arguments appear in color and the formula is displayed in the formula bar which is also used to modify formulas. For more information, refer to the section "Using the formula bar" on page 98.

Adding a new formula using the Formula Editor

To create a formula, use the Formula Editor.

To add a new formula using the Formula Editor:

1 Select the cell in which you want to display the result of the formula.
2 Open the Formula Editor. For example, type the equal sign (=) .
3 Use the text field to specify the formula, ensuring that the equal sign is the first character used.

To learn the techniques that allow you to include cell references in formulas, refer to the section "Using cell references" on page 100.

To learn more about using operators in formulas, refer to the section "Using operators" on page 104.

To learn how to insert a function in a formula, refer to the section "Using functions" on page 106.

4 To save the changes, press Return, press Enter or click the Accept button in the Formula Editor. You can also click outside the table.

To close the Formula Editor and cancel the changes, press the Escape key or click the Cancel button in the Formula Editor.

Modifying a formula using the Formula Editor

To modify a formula, you can use the Formula Editor.

To modify a formula:

1 Double-click on a cell in the table containing a formula. The Formula Editor opens, the formula appears in the text field and its arguments are highlighted in color.
2 Make the necessary changes. You can use the arrow keys to move the insertion point in the text field.
3 To save the changes, press Return, press Enter or click the Accept button in the Formula Editor. You can also click outside the table.

To close the Formula Editor and cancel the changes, press the Escape key or click the Cancel button in the Formula Editor.

Using the formula bar

The formula bar, located below the formatting bar, allows you to create or modify the formula of the selected cell.

If you click on a selected formula cell, the formula editor opens where you can modify the formula instead of using the formula bar. Refer to the section "Modifying a formula using the Formula Editor" on page 98 for more information.

Adding a new formula using the formula bar

To create a formula, use the formula bar.

To add a new formula using the formula bar:

1 Select the cell in which you want to display the result of the formula.
2 Click in the text field of the formula bar to enter the formula. Verify that the equal sign (=) is the first character of the formula.

To learn the techniques that allow you to include cell references in formulas, refer to the section "Using cell references" on page 100.

To learn more about using operators in formulas, refer to the section "Using operators" on page 104.

To learn how to insert a function in a formula, refer to the section "Using functions" on page 106.

3 To save the changes, press Return or Enter, or click the button Accept from the formula bar.

To cancel the changes, press Escape or click the Cancel button in the formula bar.

Modifying a formula using the formula bar

To modify a formula, you can use the formula bar.

To modify a formula:

1 Select a cell in the table containing a formula.

The formula appears in the text field of the formula bar and its arguments are displayed in color.

2 Click in the formula bar and make the necessary changes. You can use the arrow keys to move the insertion point in the text field.
3 To save the changes, press Return or Enter, or click the Accept button in the formula bar.

To cancel the changes, press Escape or click the Cancel button in the formula bar.

Using cell references

You can use cell references to identify specific cells within formulas. For example, if you add a formula to calculate the average of the values of two cells, you can identify these cells using cell references. The cells can be found in any table in the document other than the one with the formula.

You can create cell references using the letters and numbers shown on the reference tabs or using the name of the header cells:

If your table includes both a row header and a column header, you can identify a cell using the column name followed by the row name. For example, if a column is titled 2006 and a row has the header Number of registered students, the cell at the intersection of this column and this row can be designated as Number of registered students 2006.

You can use the letters and numbers of the reference tabs to identify a particular cell. You just need to specify the letter of the column then the number of the row.

For example, C55 refers to the fifty-fifth row of the third column.

Adding cell references to a formula

To insert a reference to a cell, you can click on a cell or a reference tab, or select a range of cells when the insertion point is in the text field of the formula editor or formula bar. You can also insert a reference to a cell by typing it using the keyboard.

When you insert a cell reference by selecting cells or reference tabs, Numbers adds cell references that use the name of the header cells if the option "Use the name of header cells as a reference" is selected in the General sub-window of Numbers preferences.

When you type a cell reference containing the name of a header cell, a table or a sheet, Numbers proposes a list of suggestions as you type the characters. You can select a suggestion from the list or continue typing on the keyboard.

Here are several ways to add a cell reference to the insertion point in the text field:

To create a reference to a particular cell using the mouse, click on the cell in question.

You want to enter the reference to this particular cell using the keyboard. To do this, type the letter of the column followed by the row number (A4) as they appear in the reference tabs or type the name of the column followed by the name of the row (2006 Number of students).

If the other table is located on another sheet, click on it in the Sheets sub-window before selecting the cell.

To reference a cell in another table, use the name of the table followed by a colon repeated twice (::) and the cell identifier (Table 2::B5). To reference a cell on another sheet, first use the name of the sheet (Sheet 2::Table 2::Course Registration 2006) if the table name is not unique in the spreadsheet.

To add a reference to a list of specific cells, click on each of them. If the references are arguments of a function, Numbers automatically inserts a comma (,) between the references, which you may replace with another character if needed. For example, if you are in a location where the decimal separator is a comma, you may separate the different cell references with a semicolon instead of a comma.
To add a reference to a range of adjacent cells, drag the cursor over the cells you want to add.

You can also type or click on the first cell, type the colon character, then type or click on the last cell. For example, B2:B5 refers to four cells in the second column. B2:C3 refers to two cells in the second column and to two cells in the third column.

To reference all cells in a column, click on the column reference tab or on its header cell, if applicable.

You can enter the reference by typing the letter of the column (C or C:C) or its name if it includes a header cell. For example, SUM(B) or SUM(B:B) adds all the values of the cells in the second column.

To reference all cells in a row, click on the row reference tab in question or on its header cell, if applicable.

You can enter the reference by typing the row number (1:1) or its name if it includes a header cell. For example, SUM(1:1) adds all the values found in the cells of the first row.

Copying or moving formulas containing cell references

You can copy or move a formula containing cell references without making them invalid.

Here are some techniques for moving formulas:

To place a formula in another cell, drag the cell in which it is located to the desired destination cell.

If the table is large and you want to move the formula to a cell not visible on the screen, select the original cell, click Edit > Mark for Move, select the destination cell and click Edit > Move. For example, if the formula =A1 is in cell D1 and you want to move this formula to cell X1, select D1, click Edit > Mark for Move, then select X1 and click Edit > Move. The formula =A1 is now displayed in cell X1.

To move a cell that a formula references, move the cell by dragging it or click Edit > Mark for Move, then Edit > Move.

For example, if the formula =A1 is in cell D1 and you want to move cell A1 to cell D95, select A1, click Edit > Mark for Move, then select D95 and click Edit > Move. The formula in D1 becomes =D95.

To paste a copy of a formula into another cell and use the same cell references in both formulas, add the dollar sign () before the column and row identifiers (=A$1). This technique creates what is called an absolute cell reference.

For example, if the formula =A1 appears in cell D1 and you want to paste a copy into cell E1, change the formula to =A1, then select cell D1, copy it and paste the copy into cell E1. The formula =A1 is copied to cell E1. If you do not modify the formula before copying it so that it uses an absolute cell reference, it will appear in cell E1 as =B1.

Applying a formula to cells in a column or row at once

When a table has header cells, you can use them to quickly apply a formula to all cells in a row or column. The values of the cells are recalculated based on the formula. This formula is called a header formula.

To apply a header formula to cells in a column or row:

1 Select the header cell of the column or row.
2 Open the Formula Editor. For example, type the equal sign (=) .
3 Enter the formula you want to apply to each cell in the column or row.

For example, to assign values to cells in column C that are five times larger than those in the corresponding cells of column B, the formula to use would be B*5 or B:B*5.

The formula is duplicated in all cells of the column or row. In this example, cell C4 would contain the value calculated using the formula B4*5.

4 Click the Accept button or press Return or Enter to save the formula.

Error and warning management

If a formula in a table cell is incomplete, contains invalid cell references or is incorrect, or if an import operation causes an error in a cell, Numbers displays an icon in the affected cell. A blue triangle in the upper left of a cell shows alerts. A red triangle in the middle of a cell indicates an error caused by a formula.

To display warning and error messages:

Click on the icon.

A message summarizes each error and warning associated with the cell.

To have Numbers display an alert when a cell referenced in a formula is empty, click Numbers > Preferences and select "Display warnings when formulas reference empty cells" in the General sub-window.

Using operators

Using operators in formulas allows you to perform arithmetic operations and compare values:

Arithmetic operators perform arithmetic operations, such as addition or subtraction, and give numerical results.

Comparison operators compare two values and give only the value TRUE or FALSE.

Calculating arithmetic operations

To create a formula that performs an arithmetic operation, you must use arithmetic operators. For example, to add three values in a column, you could create a formula like the following: A2 + A3 + A5.

Here is a summary of arithmetic operators. For more information on the arithmetic operators that Numbers supports, refer to the section "Explanation of arithmetic operators" on page 105.

To perform this operation Use this arithmetic operator For example
Sum of two values + A2 + B2
Subtraction of two values - A2 - B2
Multiplication of two values * A2 * B2
Division of one value by another / A2 / B2

To add an arithmetic formula to a cell:

1 Select an empty cell intended to display the results of the formula.
2 Open the Formula Editor. For example, type the equals sign (=).
3 Enter the formula in the text field after the equals sign.

For example, to enter the formula A3 * B5 + B6, in the text field after the equals sign, you can click on cell A3 or type "A3", then type * (the multiplication operator), click on B5 or type "B5", and finally click on B6 (if you don't enter an operator before clicking, Numbers automatically adds the plus sign (+)) when you don't specify an argument for the function.

4 Click the Accept button or press the Return or Enter key to save the formula.

Explanation of arithmetic operators

The arithmetic operators used in the formulas of table cells allow you to perform arithmetic operations and obtain numeric results.

The arithmetic operators are as follows (the examples assume that cell A2 contains the value 20 and cell B2 contains the value 2):

The + operator allows you to add two values.

For example, A2 + B2 gives 22.

The - operator allows you to calculate the difference between two values.

For example, A2 - B2 gives 18.

The * operator allows you to obtain the product of two values.

For example, A2 * B2 gives 40.

The / operator allows you to obtain the result of dividing one value by another.

For example, A2/B2 gives 10.

The operator allows you to obtain the result of raising one value to the power of another value.

For example, A2 B2 gives 400.

The % operator allows you to obtain the result of dividing a value by 100.

For example, A2% returns the value 0.2 displayed as 20%.

If the reference to a cell points to an empty cell, 0 is the value used.

If the reference to a cell points to a cell containing the value FALSE, 0 is also the value used. If the cell contains TRUE, 1 is the value used in this case.

For example, TRUE + 1 returns 2.

Using a character string containing an arithmetic operator returns an error. For example, 3 + "hello" is not a correct arithmetic operation.

Explanation of comparison operators

Comparison operators compare two values and return the value TRUE or FALSE.

The comparison operators are as follows (the examples assume that cell A2 contains the value 20 and cell B2 contains the value 2):

The = operator returns TRUE if two values are equal.

For example, A2 = B2 returns FALSE.

The < > operator returns TRUE if two values are not equal.

For example, A2<>B2 returns TRUE.

The > operator returns TRUE if the first value is greater than the second.

For example, A2 > B2 returns TRUE.

The < operator returns TRUE if the first value is less than the second.

For example, A2 < B2 returns FALSE.

The > = operator returns TRUE if the first value is greater than or equal to the second.

For example, A2 >= B2 returns TRUE.

The <= operator returns TRUE if the first value is less than or equal to the second.

For example, A2 <= B2 returns FALSE.

Character strings are considered greater than numbers. For example, "hello" > 5 returns TRUE.

TRUE and FALSE can be compared with each other but cannot be compared with numbers or character strings. TRUE > FALSE and FALSE < TRUE because TRUE is interpreted as 1 and FALSE as 0. TRUE = 1 returns FALSE and TRUE = "Text" returns FALSE.

Using functions

A function is a predefined operation to which a name has been assigned (for example, SUM or AVERAGE) and which can be used to perform a calculation in a table cell.

There are several families of functions, from financial functions which allow you to calculate interest rates, investment values, etc. to statistical functions which allow you to calculate averages, probabilities, standard deviations, etc. To learn everything about functions, including the arguments to specify to indicate to functions the data to use in calculations, refer to the section "About functions" on page 214.

You can enter a function in the text field of the Formula Editor or the formula bar, but the fastest method to add a function to a formula is to use the Function Browser.

To add a function using the Function Browser:

1 Select the cell in which you want to add a function.
2 Open the Formula Editor and click in the text field at the location where you want to insert the function. You can also click in the text field of the formula bar.

3 Click the Function Browser button in the formula bar or click Insert > Function. The Function Browser then opens.

4 Select a function.

To find a function, scroll through the list on the right. If you wish, you have the option to subdivide this list by selecting a function category on the left. You can also search for a particular function in the selected function category using the search field at the top right.

5 Click Insert.

Numbers inserts the function in the text field, followed by one or more dummy argument parameters in parentheses.

6 Using the Formula Editor or formula bar, replace each of the dummy parameters with a cell range or another value, or make other changes to the formula if necessary.

You can convert table data into attractive charts. This chapter describes how to create and format charts.

Numbers provides tools to create attractive charts to present some or all of the data in table form. By default, the appearance of the charts corresponds to the template you are using, but you can adjust the colors, textures, shadows, labels and other settings to highlight various elements of the chart.

About charts

You can convert data from multiple tables into charts. Charts can reveal trends or relationships that are not obvious when data is displayed as rows and columns.

A chart is associated with the data of the tables it is based on. If you modify the data in a table, the chart automatically updates.

You have a choice between many types of charts to present your data, including pie, line, bar, column, area, and scatter charts. 2D and 3D versions are available for most charts.

For example, a company can use a table to calculate the number of employees working in Region 1 and Region 2 each year. This type of table would have two rows (one for Region 1 and another for Region 2) and four columns (one for each year from 2007 to 2010).

2007 2008 2009 2010
Region 1 17 26 53 96
Region 2 55 43 70 58

There are several ways to represent the data in this table as a chart. In a bar chart, for example:

You can represent the number of employees in 2007 working in Region 1 and in Region 2 with bars side by side, followed by pairs of bars representing each of the years 2008, 2009, and 2010. If such a chart existed, it would have two data series and four data sets.

Regions 1 and 2 are called value series; each region is represented by a series of values. The values (known as data points) of each region are represented by bars grouped side by side on the chart; each group is called a data set (2007 is a data set, 2008 is another, etc.).

Alternatively: you can modify the orientation of the chart so that the data points are grouped by region rather than by year. In this case, the years are data series and the regions are data sets. The bar chart would then contain two groups of bars, one for Region 1 and the other for Region 2.

When you select a chart, the cells it contains are highlighted in the associated table. Additionally, colored squares located near the columns and rows of the table indicate which color represents each data series in the chart.

A button in the upper left part of the table allows you to swap the columns and rows as data series.

When the button looks like this, the data series are displayed in columns. Click this button to display the data series in rows.

When the button looks like this, the data series are displayed in rows. Click this button to display the data series in columns.

You can also click on an element of the data series in the chart to highlight the corresponding data in the chart and the underlying table.

Data series are represented differently depending on the type of chart:

In column charts and bar charts, a data series is represented by a series of bars with the same fill (color or texture).

In a line chart (also called a graph), a data series is represented by a single line.

In an area chart, a data series is represented by an area.

In a pie chart, only one data set (the first data point of each series) is represented on the chart.

In a scatter chart, two columns of data are used to place the points representing the values of a single data series. Each pair of values thus determines the position of each data point.

Adding a chart

You can add a chart representing all the data in a table or only the data from selected cells in one or more tables.

When you add a chart, Numbers defines the axis labels and data series by default. However, you can modify the series or labels:

Generally, if a table forms a square or if the width of the table is greater than its height, the rows represent the data series by default. If not, the columns represent the data series by default. To modify the orientation of the data series, select the chart and click the data series button, located in the upper left part of the corresponding table.

If a table contains row headers or cells, Numbers creates default axis labels from their content. In the absence of header cells, Numbers uses the text from the first column or first row to create axis labels. Otherwise, the text reserved for the dummy parameter is used to designate the labels.

Series labels identify the elements of data series (for example, the different bars) in the chart.

Category labels identify the data sets (for example, the groups of bars) in the chart.

You can display or hide, modify, move, reorient and format the axis labels as described in the section "Adding axis labels and marks" on page 120.

Here are different ways to add a chart:

To add a chart from a table, select the table, click Charts in the toolbar, and select a chart type from the pop-up menu.

The table values are plotted in the chart. If the table is empty, the chart remains blank until you add values to the table cells.

To add a chart based on a range of adjacent cells in a table, click on a cell and drag the cursor over other cells; you can also select a single cell then hold down the Shift key to select cells. Then click Charts in the toolbar and select a chart type.
To add a chart from non-adjacent cells, select the table cells while holding down the Command key. Then click Charts in the toolbar and select a chart type.
To add a chart from data in multiple tables, create a chart by selecting a table or the cells in the table. Then select the chart and click or drag cells from another table while holding down the Command key to add the corresponding data to the chart.
To add a chart and an associated table containing dummy parameter values, verify that nothing is selected, click Charts in the toolbar and select a chart type.
To add a scatter chart, refer to the section "Scatter Charts" on page 131.
To draw a chart, click Charts in the toolbar while holding down the Option key. Select a chart type. The mouse pointer turns into a crosshair. Then drag the pointer on the drawing surface to get the desired chart size. To maintain the proportions of a chart, hold down the Shift key while resizing.

Modifying a chart

You can modify the data plotted on a chart, the orientation of the plot to switch from data series to data sets, the chart type, move data series, etc.

Modifying the plot orientation

The button in the upper left part of the table allows you to choose between displaying the data in columns or rows.

To modify the plot orientation:

1 Select the chart.
2 Click the data series button.

Modifying the data plotted on a chart

When you modify the data in the cells of a table associated with a chart, the chart automatically updates. You can also add or remove data from a chart without modifying the associated table.

Adding data to a chart

You can add data from adjacent or non-adjacent cells to cells already plotted. You can also add data to a new column or new row.

There are different ways to add data to a chart:

To add data from non-adjacent cells to cells already plotted, select the chart and click or drag the table cells while holding down the Command key.
To add data from adjacent cells to cells already plotted, select the chart and click the table cells while holding down the Shift key.

To add adjacent cells to values already plotted, select the chart. In the table, drag the circular handle located in the lower right part of the data range to the right or down.

If the chart is a scatter chart, dragging the circular handle only allows you to add an even number of rows or columns.

To add cells from a new row or new column, select the table and insert the row or column between cells already plotted. When you add data to the new cells, the data is plotted on the chart.

Adding data to a chart from multiple tables

You can add data to a chart from cells in multiple tables.

To add chart data from multiple tables:

1 Create a chart from the data in a table.
2 Select cells in another table.
3 Drag the selected cells into the chart. They are added as a new data series.

To display or modify the chart's source data, click on a data series in the chart to display the original table and cells.

Deleting chart data

You can delete only the values of a chart without affecting those in the associated table, or delete both the values of a chart and the associated table.

There are different ways to delete data from a chart:

To delete a data point, select the table then the cell containing the value to delete and press the Delete key. The value is deleted from the table and the chart.
If you delete a column or row that is part of two columns or rows of a scatter plot chart, the data point with two associated values is also deleted from the chart.
To delete multiple cells, select the table then, while holding down the Shift or Command key, select the cells to delete and press the Delete key. The values are deleted from the table and the chart
To reduce the range of adjacent cells whose values are plotted, select the chart. In the table, drag to the left or up the circular control located in the lower right part of the data range. The deselected cells are no longer represented in the chart but the values are retained in the table.

To delete a data series, click on the chart and select an item in the series or click on the series label in the table, then press the Delete key. The values are deleted from the chart but not from the table.
To delete a dataset, click on the chart, select the category label in the table and press the Delete key. The values are deleted from the chart but not from the table.

If no label is associated with the category in the table, click on the data series button in the table to convert the category to a series, select the series containing the data to delete and press the Delete key.

Replacing a data series

You can replace the row or column on which the data series is based with another row or another column.

To replace a data series:

1 Select the chart.
2 Select the series to move by clicking on the data series in the chart, or by clicking on the data series label in the table.
3 Drag the data series in the table to the row or column to replace the data it contains.

Deleting a chart

You can delete a chart by deleting the associated table or tables, or delete only the chart.

Here are different ways to delete a chart:

To delete the chart and not the associated table or tables, select it and press the Delete key.
To delete the chart and also the associated table or tables, select the tables in question and press the Delete key.

Moving a chart

You can move a chart within a spreadsheet by drag and drop or cut and paste. Its links with the associated cells are preserved.

Here are different ways to move a chart:

To move a chart within the same spreadsheet, select it and drag it.
To move a chart to another spreadsheet, select it in the sidebar and drag it to the new spreadsheet.

You can also select and cut the chart (Command+X), then select the other spreadsheet and paste it (Command+V). You can define the position of the chart on the sheet more precisely by simply dragging it.

Changing the chart type

You can change chart types as you wish.

To replace a chart with another type:

1 Select the chart.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Chart Inspector button, then choose another chart type from the local menu that appears when you click the chart icon in the top left.

If you switch to a pie chart, the first data point of each series is represented as a slice. See the "Pie charts" section on page 126.

If you switch to a scatter plot chart, two values are needed for each point. If the chart is based on an odd number of rows or columns, the last row (or last column) is not processed. See the "Scatter plot charts" section on page 131.

If you change the chart to a bar chart, column chart, layered chart or line chart, each series in the new chart corresponds to a row or column in the table.

If you switch to the 3D version of a chart, the chart inspector provides commands to: manage the depth of the object, the lighting style, etc. See the "3D charts" section on page 132.

The formatting applied to the chart you are modifying may not apply to the new chart. For example, the color fill attribute of data point elements (bars, slices, etc.) has a different default value for each chart type. If you changed the color fill of a column then changed the chart to a bar chart, the fill modification is not retained.

Depending on the chart type, attributes likely to change if you switch from one chart type to another are the value labels displayed, the position of these labels, the text style, line, shadow and fill of series, the symbol of data points as well as the fill of these.

Simple or stacked bar or column charts share their attributes except for the position of value labels. However, bar or column charts have distinct fills.

The shadows of 3D charts are shared between chart types.

If you change the chart type to another sharing some of the attributes, the latter are then retained. Shared attributes include axes, grids, tick marks, axis labels, minimum value display, number format, borders, object rotations, shadows and 3D lighting style.

You will learn more about these attributes throughout the rest of this chapter.

Formatting the general attributes of a chart

You can resize and reposition charts and legends. You can add a title to the chart. You can format the elements of charts (fonts, textures, colors, axis labels and data point labels, as well as tick marks). You can adjust the angle and lighting style of 3D charts.

Using a legend

The chart legend describes the meaning of the colors used to represent the data points in each data series.

Region 1

Region 2

You can display or hide the legend of a chart and reposition it.

Here are different ways to use a chart legend:

To display the legend, select the chart then select Display legend in the Chart Inspector.
To modify the labels in the legend, modify the series labels in the associated table or select the legend and modify the text directly in the legend.
To format the legend text, see the "Formatting titles, labels and legends" section on page 125.
To hide the legend, select the chart then deselect Display legend in the chart inspector.

You can also select the legend and press the Delete key.

To move the legend, select it and drag it.

Using a chart title

You can add a title to the chart. This can be formatted.

Here are different ways to use a chart title:

To add a title, select the chart then choose Display title in the chart inspector. Replace the placeholder text with your title.
To format the text of a title, see the "Formatting titles, labels and legends" section on page 125.
To hide the title, select the chart then disable the Display title option in the Chart Inspector.

Resizing a chart

You can increase or decrease the size of a chart by dragging one of its selection handles or using the measurements inspector.

Here are different ways to resize a chart:

Select the chart, then drag a selection handle.
To preserve the proportions of a chart, hold down the Shift key when dragging the chart to resize it.
To resize a chart in one direction, drag a side handle instead of a corner handle.
To resize by specifying exact dimensions, click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Measurements Inspector button then Measurements. This sub-window allows you to specify a new width, height and rotation angle, and also to modify the distance between the chart and the margins.

Rotating charts

There are several rotation techniques for 2D charts. You cannot rotate (or flip) 3D charts. If a 3D chart is grouped with 2D charts, you can rotate the group but note that the 2D charts will also rotate.

Here are different ways to rotate 2D charts:

Select the chart, hold down the Command key and move the pointer to a selection handle until it transforms into a double curved arrow, then drag the handle.
To rotate a chart in 45-degree increments, press the Shift and Command keys while dragging a selection handle.

Click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Measurements Inspector button then drag the rotation wheel or use the angle commands to set the angle of the chart.

Pie charts can also be rotated through the chart inspector (see "Rotating 2D pie charts" on page 128).

Adding axis labels and tick marks

Use the Axes sub-window of the chart inspector to format the grid and overall appearance of the chart axes.

Most charts have two axes (X and Y). Depending on the chart type, data points are plotted on one axis and data values are grouped on the other axis. The axis of data points is called the value axis and the axis of data values is called the category axis.

Displaying axes and borders

You can display all of the following elements of a chart: the X axis, the Y axis and the borders of the chart.

To display the axes and borders:

1 Select a chart.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Chart Inspector button, then on Axes.
3 Choose one or more items from the Axes and borders local menu to select them.

A selected item has a checkmark next to it; choose the item again to deselect it.

To format the color and line of the borders, select the chart and use the line style commands for bars and formatting.

Using axis titles

You can add a title on the X axis and on the Y axis of a chart. This can be formatted.

Here are different ways to use an axis title:

To add an axis title, select the chart, then the "Display category titles" option in the X axis local menu or "Display value titles" in the Y axis local menu of the Axes sub-window of the chart inspector. Replace the placeholder text with your title.
To format the text of a title, see the "Formatting titles, labels and legends" section on page 125.
To hide an axis title, select the chart, then uncheck the "Display category titles" option in the X axis local menu or "Display value titles" in the Y axis local menu of the Axes sub-window of the chart inspector.

Displaying data point labels

You can display the values of data points on columns, bars, pie chart slices and other elements of 2D and 3D charts.

To format data point labels:

1 Select the chart.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Chart Inspector button, then on Series.
3 Choose Display value in the Data point settings local menu.

To display the value as a percentage or logarithmic value instead of an absolute value, choose Percentage or Logarithmic in the X axis or Y axis local menu of the Axes sub-window.

For pie charts, choose "Display slice values as %" in the "Data point settings" local menu to display values as percentages. To display the name of the data series of a slice, choose "Display series name" in the Data point settings local menu.

4 Select a location for the label in the Data point settings local menu (for example, In the middle or Bottom right).
5 Specify the number of decimal places to display by entering a number in the Decimals field.
To format data point labels, see the "Formatting titles, labels and legends" section on page 125.

Formatting the value axis

You can define the values and units to display along the value axis, that is, the axis along which you read the values of the data points. For column charts (vertical bars), line charts and layer charts, the Y axis is the value axis. For horizontal bar charts, the X axis is the value axis. In the case of scatter plot charts, both axes are value axes. Pie charts do not have a value axis. For more information on formatting pie charts, see the "Pie charts" section on page 126.)

To format the value axis:

1 Select a chart.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Chart Inspector button, then on Axes.
3 To set the value at the origin of the chart, type a number in the Minimum field (under Value axis format).

The Minimum value cannot be greater than the minimum value of the entire dataset.

4 To set the highest number displayed on the value axis, type a number in the Maximum field.

The Maximum value cannot be less than the maximum value of the entire dataset.

9 To display values as percentages on the value axis of stacked charts, select Percentage in the X axis or Y axis local menu of the Axes sub-window.

5 To specify the number of marks on the axis between the minimum and maximum values, specify a number in the Intervals field.
To display the minimum data value on the value axis, select "Display value labels" and "Display minimum value" in the X axis, Y axis or "Labels, graduations, grid" local menu depending on the chart.
7 To specify units for axis values, enter them under Number format in the Prefix or Suffix field (or choose a symbol from the local menus).
To display logarithmic values on the value axis, choose Logarithmic in the X axis or Y axis local menu, depending on the chart. This option is available only for 2D bar/column charts that are not stacked and for line charts. You cannot plot negative values on the logarithmic axis.

For pie charts, choose "Display slice values as %" in the Data point settings local menu to display values as percentages.

Setting labels, grid and tick marks

The X axis and Y axis local menus (Axes sub-window of the chart inspector) provide a series of options for placing tick marks, labels and grids along the value axis or the category axis. The options in these local menus vary depending on the chart type you select.

For vertical bar charts (column charts), line charts and layer charts, the Y axis is the value axis and the X axis is the category axis. For horizontal bar charts, the X axis is the value axis. In the case of scatter plot charts, both axes are value axes. As for 3D charts, the X and Y axes are the same as for their 2D version.

To format the axis marks:

1 Select the chart.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Chart Inspector button, then Axes.
3 To format the X axis, choose an option from the X Axis local menu. For a column chart, the menu appears as follows:

4 To format the Y axis, choose an option from the Y Axis local menu. The menu appears in the following form for a column chart:

5 To modify axis labels from the values of rows or header columns, select the table and modify the labels.

For axis labels to not be the same as the values corresponding to rows or header columns, select the chart and modify the labels. Modifying header cells will no longer have an effect on axis labels once you have modified the labels in the chart.

Formatting elements of a data series

You can use a complete set of visual effects to enhance the elements that make up the data series (e.g. bars, slices and layer shapes).

To format data series elements:

To format all data series, select the chart.

To format the elements of an individual data series, select the chart then click on one of the elements of the series.

For all chart types, except pie charts, selecting an element of a series (a bar, for example) automatically selects the entire series. In pie charts, you select individual slices.

2 To fill data series elements with a color or texture, click Inspector in the toolbar, on the Chart Inspector button, then on Chart Colors.

Choose a fill type (for example, among 3D fill textures) from the first local menu, then a fill collection (for example, Marble or Wood) from the second.

To fill elements in all data series, click Apply All. The first fill is applied to the elements of the first series, the second fill to the second series, and so on.

To fill elements in a single data series, drag the fill to an element (bar, column, etc.) of the series.

3 To adjust the opacity, stroke, shadow and other graphic attributes of series elements, click the Graphics Inspector button. You can also use the formatting toolbar to set the color, opacity and shadow of an entire chart or certain data series of the chart.

4 To adjust the colors of series elements, see the topic 'Filling an object with color' on page 178.

5 To fill series elements with one of your images, see the topic 'Filling an object with an image' on page 180.
6 To format data point labels, see the topic 'Displaying data point labels' on page 121.

You will find instructions for formatting charts of specific types in the topic 'Formatting specific chart types' on page 126.

Formatting titles, labels, and legends

You can modify the size and appearance of chart and axis titles, axis labels, data point labels, and legends.

To format the text of labels and legends:

1 Select the text to format.
To format all chart titles and labels, click on it to select it. If you select the text for a data point or axis label, all text of that type is also selected. You must modify the font of the legends separately.
2 You can use the formatting toolbar to quickly format the style and font type. Use the Format menu or Font panel to discover more formatting options. For instructions, see the topics 'Using the Format menu to format text' on page 135 and 'Using the Font panel to format text' on page 137.

Adding descriptive text to a chart

You can add descriptive text to a chart, such as when you want to provide reference information for a particular data point.

To add text:

1 Create a text box. See the topic 'Adding text boxes' on page 157 for instructions.
2 Drag it to the desired location on the chart.
3 Type your text in the corresponding box.

You may want to group the chart and the text box so that the text stays close to the chart. Click while pressing the Shift key to select both the chart and the text box, then choose Arrange > Group.

Formatting specific chart types

Several chart styles offer unique options for formatting their elements.

Pie charts

For pie charts, Numbers plots only the first data point for each data series. If the data series are organized in rows, only the first column is displayed; if they are organized in columns, only the first row is displayed.

Therefore, a pie chart displays a single dataset and each slice represents an element of that dataset. You can display any dataset by moving it to the first row or first column.

You can format an entire pie chart or individual slices of it.

Selecting individual slices in a pie chart

If you want to format one or more slices, you must first select them.

Here are different ways to select slices on a selected pie chart:

To select a single slice, click on it.
To select all slices, select one and press Command and A simultaneously.
To select non-adjacent slices, hold down the Command key while selecting each slice.
To select a set of adjacent slices, select the first slice then hold down the Shift key while selecting the last slice.

Displaying the series name in a pie chart

In the case of pie charts, you can display the series name.

To display the series name in a pie chart:

1 Select the chart or individual slices.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Chart Inspector button, then Series.
3 Choose 'Display the series name' from the 'Data point label' local menu.
4 Choose Inside or Outside from the Data point label local menu.

Separating individual slices from the chart

To increase the visual impact of slices, you can separate them from the chart. You can add a series name to separated slices to make them stand out more, as described in the topic 'Displaying data point labels' on page 121.

Separate a slice by using the Explode slider and assigning it a series name.

Here are different ways to separate individual chart slices:

To separate a slice from the center of a 2D or 3D pie chart, select it and drag it or use the Explode setting in the Series pane of the Chart Inspector.
To separate all slices from the center of a 3D pie chart, select the chart before using the Explode setting.

Adding shadows to pie charts and slices

You can add shadows to individual slices or to the entire chart. Applying shadows to individual slices gives the impression that the slices are on different layers.

When adding a shadow to a chart slice, it is wise to separate it first. See the topic 'Separating individual slices from the chart,' above, for instructions.

To add shadows:

1 Select the chart or individual slices.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Chart Inspector button, then Series.
3 To add shadows to slices, CHOOSE Individual from the Shadow local menu. To add shadows to the entire chart, choose Group from the Shadow local menu.
4 To set object attributes, use the Graphics Inspector. See the topic 'Adding objects' on page 174 for instructions.

Adjusting the opacity of pie charts

You can modify the opacity of the chart and individual chart elements, such as the legend. See the topic 'Adjusting opacity' on page 176 for more information.

Rotating 2D pie charts

You can use several techniques to rotate a 2D pie chart.

Here are different ways to rotate a pie chart:

Select the chart, click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Chart Inspector button, then Series, and finally use the Rotation Angle wheel or the corresponding field.

Click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Measurement Inspector button then drag the rotation wheel or use the angle controls to set the chart angle.

Select the chart, hold down the Command key and move the pointer toward a selection handle until it transforms into a curved double arrow, then drag the handle.
To rotate the chart in 45 degree increments, press Shift and Command while dragging a selection handle or the rotation wheel.

Bar and column charts

It is possible to apply shadows to a specific data series or to the entire chart. You can adjust the opacity of the chart as a whole or for individual series (but not individual bars). You can also adjust the spacing between data series or between individual bars.

Adjusting the spacing of bar and column charts

You can adjust the space between different bars or data groups.

To adjust spacing:

1 Select the chart.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Chart Inspector button, then Series.

3 To change the spacing between bars, type a value (or click the arrows) in the Space Between Bars field.

To change the space between data groups, specify a value in the 'Space Between Series' field

The value is the percentage of the bar thickness. Reducing the space between bars makes them thicker.

You can also move the pointer near the edge of a bar until it becomes a double arrow, then drag it to make the bars thicker or thinner.

Adding shadows to bar and column charts

You can add shadows to each bar of the chart or to each group of bars.

If you want to add shadows to individual bars, it is wise to space them first. See the topic 'Adjusting the spacing of bar and column charts' on page 128 for instructions.

To add shadows:

1 Select the chart.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Chart Inspector, then Series.
3 To add shadows to individual bars, CHOOSE Individual from the Shadow local menu.

To add shadows to each group of bars, CHOOSE Group from the Shadow local menu.

4 To set object attributes, use the Graphics Inspector. See the topic 'Adding objects' on page 174 for instructions.

Adjusting the opacity of bar and column charts

You can modify the opacity of the chart and individual chart elements, such as the legend. See the topic 'Adjusting opacity' on page 176 for more information.

Area and line charts

In the case of area and line charts, you can represent data points with symbols (circles, triangles, squares and diamonds).

Here are different ways to format area charts and line charts:

To format symbols, select a data series (area shape or layer line), click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Chart Inspector button, then Series. Choose a symbol from the Data Point Symbol local menu.

Use the options from the Symbol Fill local menu to apply color or images to symbols. For instructions, see the topics 'Filling an object with an image' on page 180 and 'Filling an object with color' on page 178.

To set the line color on line charts, select a line, click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Graphics Inspector button, then use the stroke settings. See the topic 'Modifying the stroke style' on page 172 for instructions.
To add shadows on area or line charts, select a data series (area shape or layer line), click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Graphics Inspector button, then use the shadow settings. See the topic 'Adding shadows' on page 174 for instructions.

Scatter charts

On scatter charts, data is displayed differently from other chart types. They require at least two columns or rows of data to plot the points representing the values of an individual data series. To display multiple data series, you must use pairs of additional columns or rows.

Each pair of values determines the position of each data point. The first value in the pair corresponds to the X axis of the point. The second value corresponds to the Y axis of the point.

Here are different ways to use a scatter chart:

To add the default scatter chart and an associated table containing sample parameter data, verify that nothing is selected, click Charts in the toolbar and select the scatter chart.
To set up a table whose data is intended for a scatter chart, use two columns or two rows of data for each data series. If the cells selected when you add the chart represent an odd number of rows or columns, the first column or last row is not plotted.
To format a symbol for a data series, see the topic 'Formatting data series elements' on page 124.
To specify the settings that apply to the axes, use the Axes pane of the Chart Inspector. Since both axes of scatter charts have values, the value axis formatting settings apply to both the X and Y axes. Each axis can, however, have its own number format. See the topic 'Formatting the value axis' on page 122 for instructions.

3D charts

All chart types, except scatter charts, can be converted to 3D charts.

Here are the 2D and 3D versions of a pie chart.

And here are the 2D and 3D versions of a line chart.

To define the 3D scene settings:

1 Select a 3D chart.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Chart Inspector, then 3D Scene.
3 Modify the chart's viewing angle, lighting style, and depth as desired, using the 3D Scene commands.

Viewing angle arrows: drag one of the arrows to fine-tune the angle. Click the vertical arrow and drag it up or down to move the chart accordingly. Click the horizontal arrow and drag it left or right to move the chart accordingly. To move the chart in both directions, click at the intersection of the arrows and drag.

Lighting style: select an item from this local menu to adjust the lighting effect.

Chart depth: drag this setting to increase or decrease the depth of 3D elements.

This chapter will help you learn more about defining and changing the appearance of text, including lists.

In Numbers spreadsheets, you can place text in text boxes, cells, and shapes.

Adding text

To add text, type it in a text box, shape, or table cell.

For information about adding text in a text box or shape, see the topic "Using text boxes and shapes to highlight text" on page 157.

To learn how to add text to table cells, see the topic "Using text in cells" on page 59.

To add text as a list, see the topic "Using bulleted, numbered, and ordered lists (Structures)" on page 153.

Delete, copy, and paste text

The Edit menu contains commands that help you perform text editing operations.

Here are different ways to edit text:

To copy (or cut) and paste text, select the text and choose Edit > Copy or Edit > Cut. Click where you want to paste the text.

For copied text to retain the style formatting, CHOOSE Edit > Paste.

Click Edit > Paste Style and Apply to change the formatting of the pasted text so it matches the formatting of the surrounding text.

To delete text, Select the text and choose Edit > Delete or press the Delete key.

If you accidentally delete text, choose Edit > Undo to restore it.

When you use the Copy or Cut command, the selected text is placed in a temporary area called the Clipboard, where it remains until you select the Copy or Cut command again or turn off your computer. The Clipboard keeps only one copy or cut operation at a time.

Text selection

Before formatting or performing any other operation on text, you must select the text you want to use.

You can select text in different ways:

To select one or more characters, click before the first character and drag the cursor across the characters you want to select.
To select a word, double-click it.
To select a paragraph, click it three times quickly.
To select blocks of text, click at the beginning of the text block, then click at the end of another text block while holding the Shift key.
To make a selection from the insertion point to the beginning of the paragraph, press the Up Arrow key while holding the Shift and Option keys.
To make a selection from the insertion point to the end of the paragraph, press the Down Arrow key while holding the Shift and Option keys.
To extend the selection one character at a time, press the Left Arrow or Right Arrow key while holding the Shift key.
To extend the selection one line at a time, press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key while holding the Shift key.
To select multiple words or text blocks that are not adjacent, select the first portion of text you want, then select other text portions while holding the Command key.

Formatting text size and appearance

You can change the font, color, and style of text using the Format menu, the Font panel, and the format bar.

The Format menu and the Font panel are the primary tools for formatting cell text. The format bar is useful for formatting text in text boxes and shapes.

Using the format bar to format text

With the format bar, you can quickly and easily change the size and appearance of text in a text box, shape, or comment. When you have selected a text box, shape, or comment, you can change the font style and size, text color, or display text in bold, italic, or underlined characters, align text, set line spacing, and arrange text in columns.

Using the Format menu to format text

The options in the Font submenu of the Format menu give you basic control over text size and appearance.

Applying Bold or Italic attributes to text using menus

You can make characters bold or italic.

To make text bold or italic:

1 Select the text you want to make bold or italic, or click where you want to enter new text.
2 Choose Format > Font > Bold. Or choose Format > Font > Italic.

Some fonts have multiple bold and italic styles. To choose among multiple bold and italic styles, use the Font panel. See the topic "Using the Font panel to format text" on page 137.

Framing text using menus

You can modify text so it appears with a well-defined outline.

To create framed text:

1 Select the text you want to apply an outline to, or click where you want to enter new text.
2 Choose Format > Font > Outline.

Text with an outline in Numbers may not appear the same when you open the spreadsheet in another application. If you plan to share a spreadsheet containing outlined text with people who do not have Numbers, export the spreadsheet as a PDF and share the resulting file.

Underlining text using menus

You can underline text and then format the underline to change its style or color.

To underline text:

1 Select the text you want to underline, or click where you want to enter new text.

2 Choose Format > Font > Underline.

To change the style or color of the underline, click Fonts in the toolbar and use the Underlined text button in the Font panel. See the topic "Using the Font panel to format text" on page 137.

Changing text size using menus

You can change the text size (in points) to make it larger or smaller.

To change the text size:

1 Select the text to resize.
2 To change the text size in 1-point increments, CHOOSE Format > Font > Larger. Or CHOOSE Format > Font > Smaller.

You can also add the Larger and Smaller icons to the toolbar. To do this, CHOOSE View > Customize Toolbar and drag the icons to the toolbar, then click Done.

To specify a precise size for the selected text, click Fonts in the toolbar and use the Size controls in the Font panel. See the topic "Using the Font panel to format text" on page 137.

Making text subscript or superscript using menus

You can raise or lower text relative to its baseline.

To make text subscript or superscript:

1 Select the text you want to raise or lower, or click where you want to enter new text.
2 To create subscript or superscript with a smaller font size than the accompanying text, choose Format > Font > Baseline > Subscript. Or choose Format > Font > Baseline > Superscript.
3 To raise or lower text without reducing the font size, CHOOSE RAISE or Lower in the Baseline submenu.
4 To restore text to the same baseline as the body text, CHOOSE Default in the Baseline submenu.

You can also add the Subscript and Superscript icons to the toolbar. To do this, choose View > Customize Toolbar and drag the icons to the toolbar, then click Finish.

Changing text case using menus

You can quickly change blocks of text to uppercase or lowercase, or transform text to title case.

To change text case:

1 Select the text you want to change, or click where you want to enter new text.
2 Choose Format > Font > Case then select an option from the submenu.

Choose All Uppercase to make the text all uppercase.

Choose Small Capitals to make the text small capitals with larger letters for the capitals.

Choose Title to transform text to title case, which capitalizes the first letter of each word.

Choose None to return to the original capitalization. Uppercase characters such as the first word of each sentence remain uppercase but all other letters become lowercase.

Using the Font panel to format text

The Mac OS X Font panel allows you to access all fonts installed on your computer. It provides a preview of available features (such as bold and italic) as well as the size of each font. The buttons in the Font panel allow you to underline or strikethrough text, add color and shadows to text. You can even change the background page color in the Font panel.

To learn more about installing fonts, creating and managing font collections, or troubleshooting font issues, consult Mac Help.

To open the Font panel:

Click Fonts in the toolbar.

You can change the appearance of any text in a spreadsheet by selecting it and then activating options in the Font panel. When you apply formatting changes in the Font panel, the selected text changes immediately, allowing you to test different formatting options and quickly see which one works best.

Here is a summary of the effects of local menus on text, from left to right:

The Underlined text local menu allows you to choose an underline style (single or double line, for example).

The Strikethrough text local menu allows you to select a strikethrough style for text (single or double line, for example).

The Text color local menu allows you to apply a color to text.

The Document color local menu allows you to apply a color to the background of a paragraph.

The Text shadow button applies a shadow to selected text.

The "Object Opacity," "Object Blur," "Object Offset," and "Object Angle" commands control the appearance of the object.

If the text effects buttons do not appear, choose Show Effects from the Action local menu located in the lower left corner of the Font panel.

Simplifying Font panel use

If you use the Font panel frequently, different techniques allow you to save time.

Here are some tips for using the Font panel:

To quickly find the fonts you use most often, place them in font collections. Click the Add (+) button to create a font collection, then drag a font type to the new collection.
To make it easy to change fonts frequently, just leave the Font panel open. If it takes up too much space on screen, you can reduce it by dragging the resize control (in the lower right corner of the panel) so that only the font families and styles of the selected collection are visible. To close the panel, click the Fonts button again or click the close button in the upper left corner of the Font panel.

Changing fonts using the Font panel

The Font panel allows you to completely control fonts. Use the size controls and typographic settings to personalize the appearance of your text.

To change the font of selected text:

1 Click Fonts in the toolbar.
2 In the Font panel, Select a font style from the Family column, then Select the style from the Style column.

If you do not see all the font families installed on your computer, select All Fonts in the Collections column or type the name of the font you are looking for in the search field at the bottom of the Font panel.

A preview of the selected font appears in the preview window at the top of the Font panel. If the preview window is not displayed, choose Show Preview from the Action local menu in the lower left corner of the Font panel.

3 Set the font size using the slider or other size controls.
4 Adjust the typography settings of the selected font by CHOOSING Typography from the Action local menu. In the Typography window, click the disclosure triangles to view and select the different typographic effects available for the selected font. The available typographic effects depend on the font. See the topic "Using advanced typographic features" on page 144 for more information.

Changing underline using the Font panel

You can use the Font panel to change the appearance of underlines.

To change the underline of selected text:

1 Click Fonts in the toolbar.
2 Click the Underline text button in the Font panel (first button on the left) and CHOOSE Simple or Double from the local menu.
3 To change the underline color, CHOOSE Color from the Underline text local menu, then select a color from the Colors window.

Adding strikethrough to text using the Font panel

You can add strikethrough to text and use a line color different from the text color.

To add strikethrough to selected text:

1 Click Fonts in the toolbar.
2 Click the Strikethrough text button in the Font panel (second button from the left), then choose None, Single, or Double from the local menu. A single or double line strikes through the selected text in the same color as the text.
3 To change the color of strikethrough lines, CHOOSE Color from the Strikethrough text local menu, then select a color from the Colors window. The strikethrough line takes on the color selected in the Colors window, but the text retains its original color.

Changing text color using the Font panel

Changes made to text color in the Font panel replace those made in the text inspector, and vice versa. (To learn more about changing text color using the text inspector, see the topic "Changing text color" on page 149.)

To change the color of selected text:

1 Click Fonts in the toolbar.
2 Click the Text color button in the Font panel (third button from the left), then select a color from the Colors window. See the topic "Using the Colors window" on page 179 for instructions.

Changing the background color of a paragraph using the Font panel

The Font panel allows you to add a color behind a paragraph.

To change the background color of a selected paragraph:

1 Click Fonts in the toolbar.
2 Click the Document Color button in the Font panel (fourth button from the left), then select a color in the Colors window.

See the topic "Using the Colors Window" on page 179 for instructions.

Creating shadows on text using the Font panel

The Font panel allows you to create and format shadows on text.

To add shadows to selected text:

1 Click Fonts in the toolbar.
2 Click the Text Shadow button in the Font panel (fifth button from the left).
3 Drag the Shadow Opacity slider (first slider on the left) to the right to make the shadow darker.
4 Drag the Shadow Blur slider (middle slider) to the right to make the shadow more blurred.
5 Drag the Object Offset slider (third slider) to the right to separate the object from the text.
6 Turn the Shadow Angle wheel to set the direction of the shadow.

You can also set text shadows in the graphics inspector, as described in the topic "Adding Shadows" on page 174.

Adding accents and special characters

If you need to type characters with accents, mathematical symbols, arrows, or other special characters, you can use the International Preferences sub-window or the Character Palette. You can also see where characters are located on keyboards used in other languages using the Keyboard Viewer (for example, you can see the key layout of an Italian keyboard).

All these tools are integrated into Mac OS X.

Adding accents

You can use the System Preferences Keyboard Viewer to add accents to characters.

To add accents:

1 Choose Apple > System Preferences and click International.
2 Click Input Menu, then select the checkbox next to Keyboard Viewer.
3 Choose Show Keyboard Viewer from the Input Menu on the right side of the menu bar (the one that looks like a flag or alphanumeric symbol).

The Keyboard Viewer displays the keyboard characters. (If you have selected a different keyboard layout or a different input method for the keyboard in the Input Menu, the characters of the selected keyboard layout are displayed.) For example, if you choose American in the Input Menu, you see in the Keyboard Viewer the characters that appear on an American keyboard.

4 To see highlighted in the Keyboard Viewer the different accents you can type, press Option, or press Option + Shift.

The accented keys are outlined in white. Depending on the keyboard, you may not need to press the modifier keys to display the accented characters.

5 Place the cursor in the spreadsheet at the location where you want to type text.
6 Press the modifier key you pressed in step 4 (Shift, Option, Option + Shift, or none) and press the key that is in the same position as the accent shown in the Keyboard Viewer. Then release the modifier key and press the key corresponding to the character you want to accent.

The accented key modifies the next key you type. For example, on an American keyboard, to display the character é, press Option and E (the accented key), then press E (the key where you want the accent to appear).

Displaying keyboard layouts in other languages

You can use the System Preferences Keyboard Viewer to display the location of characters on keyboards used for other languages.

Fonts must be installed for the language you want to view in the Keyboard Viewer.

To display keyboard layouts for different languages:

1 Choose Apple > System Preferences and click International.
2 Click Input Menu, then select the checkbox next to Keyboard Viewer.
3 To display the layout of characters on keyboards used in different countries, select the On checkbox next to the keyboard layout or input method of the country

4 Choose Show Keyboard Viewer from the Input Menu on the right side of the menu bar (the one that looks like a flag or an alphanumeric character).

The Keyboard Viewer displays the characters of the keyboard layout or input method selected in the Input Menu. For example, if you choose American in the Input Menu, you can see in the Keyboard Viewer the characters that appear on an American keyboard.

5 To display the keyboard layout of another country, choose it from the Input Menu.

Entering special characters and symbols

Using the Mac OS X Character Palette, you can insert special characters, such as mathematical symbols, accented letters, arrows and other "dingbats," and much more. This palette also allows you to enter Japanese, Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, Korean and other language characters.

To insert special characters or symbols:

1 Place the cursor at the location where the special character or symbol should appear.
2 Choose Edit > Special Characters to open the Character Palette (or choose Characters from the Action menu in the lower left corner of the Font panel).
3 Choose the type of character you want to display from the Show popup menu at the top of the Character Palette. If the popup menu doesn't appear, click the button in the upper right corner of the window to show the upper part of the window. Click the button again to hide the upper part of the window.
4 Click an item in the list on the left to see the available characters in each category.
5 Double-click the character or symbol on the right that you want to insert into your spreadsheet, or select the character and click Insert.

If the character or symbol has variants, they appear at the bottom of the window when you click the character Info triangle or the Font Variant triangle at the bottom of the palette. Double-click a variant to insert it into your spreadsheet.

If the character doesn't insert into your spreadsheet, Numbers may not support it.

Using curved quotation marks

Curved quotation marks are opening and closing quotation marks that are curved; the opening quotation mark is different from the closing quotation mark. When you don't use curved quotation marks, the quotation marks are straight and identical.

——Curved quotation marks
II Straight quotation marks

To use curved quotation marks:

Choose Numbers > Preferences, click Auto Correction, then select "Use curved quotation marks".

Using advanced typography features

Some fonts, such as Zapfino and Hoefler, have advanced typography features that allow you to create different effects. If you use such a font, you can modify many effects in the Font submenu of the Format menu. For example, you can adjust the following:

Kerning: adjusts the spacing between characters.

Ligature: uses or avoids elaborate styles between letters, at the beginning or end of lines combining multiple characters into a single graphic symbol

fi fl-Ligature not used
fi fl-Ligature used

In the Ligature submenu, choose Default to use the ligature settings specified in the Typography window for the font you are using, choose None to disable ligatures for the selected text, or choose All to enable additional ligatures for the selected text.

Baseline: raises or lowers the text relative to the surrounding text.

Capitals: converts all characters to uppercase, small capitals, or initial capitals (title case).

Advanced typography features are available in the Typography window.

To open the Typography window:

1 Click Fonts in the toolbar.
2 In the Font panel, choose Typography from the Action popup menu (in the lower left corner).

Adjusting font smoothing

If fonts appear blurry or uneven on the screen, you can change the font smoothing style or change the text size from which Mac OS X starts smoothing fonts.

To smooth fonts on the screen:

1 Open System Preferences and click Appearance.
2 Choose a font smoothing style from the popup menu at the bottom of the window. Depending on your screen type, the differences between smoothing styles may be very subtle.
3 If you plan to use small-sized fonts in your spreadsheet, choose a point size from the "Turn off text smoothing for fonts this size and smaller" popup menu. When text smoothing (or "antialiasing") is enabled, the smallest fonts become difficult to read.

Setting text alignment, spacing, and color

The main tools for adjusting alignment, spacing, and color are the text inspector and the formatting bar. You can align text horizontally (center it or align it to the left, for example) using the Format menu.

Color, spacing, and alignment commands are also available in the formatting bar when you select text in a table. When text in a text box, comment, or shape is selected, you can set its color, align it, and set the line spacing.

When working on text in a cell, you can use the formatting bar to align the text horizontally and vertically in the cell.

The Text sub-window of the Text Inspector provides access to other alignment and line spacing settings.

To open the Text sub-window of the Text Inspector:

Click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Text Inspector button and finally click Text.

Horizontal text alignment

You can change the text alignment in a column, cell, text box, or shape to align the text to the left or right edge, center it, or align it left and right (justified).

To align text left, center, right, or justify it:

1 Select the text to modify.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Text Inspector button and finally click Text.
3 Click one of the five horizontal alignment buttons to the right of the color box. From left to right, these buttons have the following effects.

The Align Left button places each line of text along the left margin of the object.

The Center button aligns the center of each line of text with the center of the object.

The Align Right button places each line of text along the right margin of the object.

The Justify button spaces the characters of each line so that the text spreads between the left and right margins of the object.

The "Auto Align Table Cell" button places text on the left and numbers on the right in a cell.

The five horizontal alignment buttons are also available in the formatting bar when a cell is selected. The first four are available in the formatting bar when text in a text box, shape, or comment is selected.

You can also align text horizontally by selecting Format > Text > Align Left, Center, Align Right, Justify, Auto Align Table Cell.

If you want to apply an indent to the first line of text in a paragraph, or to learn how to remove an indent, see the topic "Creating Indents" on page 152.

Vertical text alignment

You can change the alignment of paragraphs in a table cell, text box, or shape so that the text is aligned along the top or bottom edge or centered between the two edges.

To align text at the top, center, or bottom of a text box, table cell, or shape:

1 Select the text box, table cell, or shape whose alignment you want to change.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Text Inspector button and finally click Text.
3 Click one of the three vertical alignment buttons under Color and Alignment to align the text at the top, middle, or bottom of the cell, text box, or shape.

The vertical alignment buttons are also available in the formatting bar when you are working in a cell.

Adjusting line spacing

You can increase or decrease the distance between lines of text.

To adjust spacing:

1 Select the text to modify.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Text Inspector button and finally Text.
3 Move the Line slider to the left to decrease the line spacing and to the right to increase it.

To specify a precise line spacing value, enter a point value in the Line field or click the Up or Down arrow next to the field.

4 Choose a line spacing option from the Line Spacing pop-up menu that appears when you click the text below the Line field.

Line field: to specify the line spacing of paragraph text, type a value (or click the arrows).

Line Spacing pop-up menu: click the text below the Line field and CHOOSE line spacing.

Standard line spacing (Single, Double, Multiple): line spacing is proportional to the font size. Use this option when the relative distance between the ascenders (parts of the letters above the top of the line) and descenders (parts below the bottom of the line) must remain fixed. Single line spacing defines single line spacing and double spacing defines double line spacing. The Multiple option allows you to define line spacing values less than single, between single and double, or greater than double.

At least: the distance from one line to the next will never be less than the specified value, but it can be greater for larger fonts to prevent overlapping lines. Use this option when the distance between lines must remain fixed, but overlapping is not desired if the text enlarges.

Exactly: the distance between the baselines.

Between: the specified value increases the space between lines, not their height. Conversely, double line spacing therefore increases the height of each line by two times.

It is also possible to adjust line spacing using the Line Spacing pop-up menu from the Format bar when the text is selected in a text box, shape, or comment.

Click to modify the space between lines of text.

To adjust spacing:

1 Select the text to modify.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Text Inspector button and finally click Text.
3 Move the Line slider to the left to decrease line spacing and to the right to increase it.

To specify a specific line spacing value, enter a point value in the Line field or click the Up or Down arrow next to the field.

4 Choose a line spacing option from the Line Spacing popup menu that appears when you click the text below the Line field.

Line field: to specify the line spacing of a paragraph's text, type a value (or click the arrows).

Line Spacing popup menu: click the text below the Line field and choose a line spacing.

Standard line spacing (Single, Double, Multiple): line spacing is proportional to the font size. Use this option when the relative distance between ascenders (parts of letters above the top of the line) and descenders (parts below the bottom of the line) must remain fixed. Single line spacing sets single spacing and double spacing sets double line spacing. The Multiple option allows you to set line spacing values less than single, between single and double, or greater than double.

At least: the distance from one line to the next will never be less than the value set, but it can be greater for larger fonts, to prevent lines from overlapping. Use this option when the distance between lines should remain fixed, but overlapping is not desirable if the text grows.

Exactly: the distance between baseline to baseline.

Between: the defined value increases the space between lines, not their height. Conversely, double line spacing increases the height of each line by two times.

It is also possible to adjust line spacing using the Line Spacing popup menu in the formatting bar when text is selected in a text box, shape, or comment.

Click to change the space between lines of text.

Adjusting spacing before and after a paragraph

You can increase or decrease the spacing before and after paragraphs.

To adjust the amount of space before or after a paragraph:

1 Select the paragraphs to modify.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Text Inspector button and finally click Text.
3 Drag the Before Paragraph or After Paragraph slider. You can also enter a specific value (for example, 5 pt) in the text fields.

If the values of the Before Paragraph and After Paragraph sliders are different for adjacent paragraphs, the highest spacing value is used. For example, if the Before Paragraph slider value for the current paragraph is 12 points and the After Paragraph value for the previous paragraph is 14 points, the space between these two paragraphs will be 14 points.

Space before a paragraph does not apply to the first paragraph in a text box, shape, or table cell.

To define spacing around text in boxes, shapes, and table cells, use the Inset Margins command, described in the topic "Changing Text Inset Margins in Objects" on page 153.

Character spacing adjustment

You can increase or decrease the character spacing.

To adjust the spacing between characters:

1 Select the text you want to modify, or click where you want to type new text.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Text Inspector button and finally click Text.
3 Drag the Character slider or specify a new percentage in the Character field.

You can also adjust the spacing between selected characters by choosing Format > Font > Kerning and selecting an option from the submenu.

Changing text color

You can change text color using the format bar, the text inspector, and the Font panel. Changes you make with one of these tools overwrite color changes made with other tools.

Before changing text color, select the text whose color you want to change or click in the text to place the insertion point.

Here are different ways to change text color:

Click the Text Color or Background Color ink well in the format bar. In the color table that appears, click a color to select it or click Show Colors to open the Colors window which contains additional colors.

Click the Inspector button in the toolbar, click the Text Inspector button, and then click the Document color frame. The Colors window opens.

The section "Using the Colors window" on page 179 provides instructions on using the Colors window.

Setting tab stops to align text

You can align text at specific points by setting tab stops in a text box, table cell, or shape. When you press the tab key (or Option+Tab simultaneously if you are working in a table cell), the insertion point (and any text to its right) moves to the next tab stop; the text you type begins at that point.

You can quickly set tab stops using the symbols on the horizontal ruler. You see the symbols of existing tab stops on the horizontal ruler by clicking View in the toolbar, choosing Show Rulers, and then selecting text on the page.

To set tab stops in lists, see the section "Using bullet, numbered, and ordered lists (Outlines)" on page 153 for more information on indenting list items.

There are different ways to use rulers:

To show or hide rulers, click View in the toolbar and choose Show Rulers or Hide Rulers.
To change the units of measurement for rulers, choose Numbers > Preferences, click Rulers and choose an item from the Ruler Units local menu

Setting a new tab stop

You can use the horizontal ruler to add a tab stop.

To create a new tab stop:

1 Click Layout in the toolbar and choose Show Rulers.
2 Click on the horizontal ruler to place the tab symbol where you want to insert a tab stop.
3 Click the tab symbol while pressing the Control key and choose an option from the local menu.

Left Tab

Center Tab
Right Tab
Decimal Tab

Choose from these

tab types.

Left Tab: aligns the left edge of text with the tab stop.

Center Tab: places the center of text on the tab stop.

Right Tab: aligns the right edge of text with the tab stop.

Decimal Tab: for numbers, aligns the decimal separator (such as a comma or period) on the tab stop.

You can also double-click several times on the tab symbol in the ruler until the desired tab type appears.

Modifying a tab stop

You can modify the location and type of tab stop using the horizontal ruler.

To modify tab stops:

1 Click Layout in the toolbar and choose Show Rulers.
2 To move a tab stop, drag its blue symbol along the horizontal ruler.
3 To change the tab type, click while holding the Control key on the tab symbol and choose an option from the local menu.

You can also double-click several times on the tab symbol in the ruler until the desired tab type appears.

Deleting a tab stop

You can quickly delete a tab stop using the horizontal ruler.

To delete a tab stop:

1 Click Layout in the toolbar and choose Show Rulers.
2 Drag the tab symbol off the horizontal ruler.

Text margins

You can modify the amount of space between text and the inner edge of a text box, shape, or table cell comment.

Setting indents for paragraphs

You can modify a paragraph indent by dragging the indent controls on the text ruler.

To set indents using rulers:

1 Click Layout in the toolbar and choose Show Rulers.
2 To change the right indent, drag the right indent symbol (blue triangle pointing down on the right side of the horizontal ruler) to the position where you want the right edge of the paragraph to end.

3 To change the left indent, drag its symbol (blue triangle pointing down on the left side of the ruler) to the location where the left edge of the paragraph should begin.

To change the left margin independently of the left indent, hold down the Option key while dragging.

4 To change the first line indent, drag the first line indent (blue rectangle) to the location where the first line should begin.

If you want the first line to remain aligned with the left margin, verify that the rectangle is aligned with the left indent symbol.

If you want to create a hanging indent, drag the rectangle to the left of the left indent symbol.

To apply the ruler settings to another location in your spreadsheet, choose Format > Text > Copy Ruler, then Format > Text > Paste Ruler.

Changing text margin in objects

You can modify the space between text and the inner edge of a text box, shape, or table cell. This measurement is called the text margin. The amount of space you specify is applied uniformly around the text on each side.

To adjust the spacing between text and the inner edge of an object:

1 Select the object if it does not contain an insertion point.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Text Inspector button and finally click Text.
3 Drag the Text Margin slider to the right to increase the space between text and the inner edge of the object, or type a number in the Text Margin field and press Return. You can also click the arrows to increase or decrease the space.

Setting indents for lists

Use the text inspector to set the indent of bullets, numbers, and accompanying text in bullet lists, numbered lists, and ordered lists. See the section "Using bullet, numbered, and ordered lists (Outlines)" for more information.

Using bullet, numbered, and ordered lists (Outlines)

Numbers provides predefined bullet and numbering styles for creating simple or ordered lists. Bullet and numbered lists are simple lists without hierarchical nesting of information as seen in outlines.

Automatic list generation

When you use the automatic list generation feature, Numbers automatically formats a list based on what you type. To use this feature, first choose Numbers > Preferences, click AutoCorrect, and make sure the "Automatic list detection" option is enabled.

Here are different ways to generate lists automatically:

To create a bullet list, press Option-8 to type a bullet (), a space, text, then press Return.
To create lists with asterisk (*) or dash (-) symbols, type the symbol, a space, text, then press Return.
To create a list with numbers or letters, type the number or letter, a period, a space, text, then press Return.

You can use any character format from the Numbering Style local menu in the text inspector. To access this menu, click Bullet in the text inspector and choose Numbers from the Bullet and Numbering local menu.

To end the list, press Return twice.

Using bullet lists

Although you can use automatic list generation to create a simple bullet list, the text inspector offers many formatting options for bullet lists. For more information on automatic list generation, see the section "Automatic list generation" on page 153.

To add and format a bullet list using the text inspector:

1 Place the insertion point where you want the list to begin.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Text Inspector button and finally click Bullets.
3 Choose a bullet style from the Bullet and Numbering local menu.

To use a typed character as a bullet, choose Text Bullets, then select the character from the list or type a new character in the field.

To use one of the image bullets built into Numbers, choose Image Bullets and then choose an image from the drop-down list.

To use your own image as a bullet, choose Custom Image in the Open dialog that appears.

4 To change the size of an image bullet, specify a percentage of the original image size in the Size field. Or, check the "Fit to text" option and specify the percentage of text size; this option maintains the image-to-text proportions of bullets even if you change the text font later.
5 To adjust the space between bullets and the left margin, use the Bullet Indent field. To adjust the space between bullets and text, use the Text Indent field.
6 To place bullets higher or lower relative to text in a text box or shape, use the Alignment field.

You can use these techniques to add and adjust indents of bullet list items:

To add a new item at the current indent level, press Return.

To create a paragraph separate from the list in an item, press Return while holding the Shift key.

To add a new item at the next lower indent level, press the Tab key. To add a new item at the next higher indent level, press Shift and Tab simultaneously. You can also click a bullet and hold the mouse button, then drag it right, left, bottom right, or bottom left.

To return to normal text at the end of your list, press Return, then choose No Bullets from the Bullets and Numbering local menu. You can also adjust the indent level.

Using numbered lists

Although you can use automatic list generation to create a simple numbered list, the text inspector offers many formatting options for numbered lists. For more information on automatic list generation, see the section "Automatic list generation" on page 153.

To add and format a numbered list:

1 Place the insertion point where you want the list to begin.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Text Inspector button and finally click Bullets.
3 Choose Numbers from the Bullets and Numbering local menu, then choose the desired numbering style from the local menu just below.
4 To adjust the space between numbers and the left margin, use the Numbers Indent field. To adjust the space between numbers and text, use the Text Indent field.

You can use these techniques to add and adjust indents of list items:

To add a new item at the current indent level, press Return.

To create an unnumbered paragraph in an item, press Return while holding the Shift key.

To add a new item at the next lower indent level, press the Tab key. To add a new item at the next higher indent level, press Shift and Tab simultaneously. You can also click and hold a number, then drag it right, left, bottom right, or bottom left.

To return to normal text at the end of your list, press Return, then choose No Bullets from the Bullets and Numbering local menu. You can also adjust the indent level.

To add an existing paragraph to a numbered list, click the paragraph, choose a Numbering Style, then click "Continue from previous"

To start a new numbered series in a list, click "Start at" then specify the number from which you want the series to begin.

If you want list items to contain sub-items with titles (as in an outline), use an ordered list rather than a numbered list.

Using ordered lists (Outlines)

Ordered lists (or outlines) provide different numbering styles for each indent level of the list, allowing you to organize your information hierarchically. For example:

You can create a structure using a numbering series comparable to the following from the highest level to lower levels: I, A, 1, a), (1), (a), i), (1) and (a).

You can create a more administrative and formal style outline that adds a number or additional digit to each lower level: 1, 1.1, 1.1.1, and so on.

You can add and format ordered lists using the text inspector.

To add and format an ordered list:

1 Place the insertion point where you want the list to start.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Text Inspector button and finally Bullets.
3 To create a legal-style list, choose Progressive Numbering from the local Bullets and Numbering menu. Otherwise, choose Numbers instead.
4 Choose a numbering style from the local menu located just below.
5 To adjust the space between the numbers and the left margin, use the Number Indent field. To adjust the space between the numbers and the text, use the Text Indent field.

You can use these techniques to add and indent the elements of your content:

To add a new section at the current indentation level, press Return.

To create an unnumbered paragraph in a section, press Return while holding the Shift key.

To add a new section at the next lower indentation level, press the Tab key. To add a new section at the next higher indentation level, press the Shift key and the Tab key simultaneously. To navigate among the levels, you can also click and hold a number, then drag it right, left, down-right, or down-left.

To return to normal text at the end of your list, press Return, then choose No Bullets from the local Bullets and Numbering menu. You can also adjust the indentation level.

To add an existing paragraph to a numbered list, click the paragraph, CHOOSE a numbering style, then click "Continue from previous"

To start a new numbered series in a list, click "Start at" then specify the number you want the series to start with.

Using text boxes and shapes to make text stand out

Use text boxes and shapes to make text stand out.

Adding text boxes

You can add a text box on a sheet and place it where you want by dragging it.

To create a text box:

1 Click Text Box in the toolbar (or choose Insert > Text Box).
2 In the area that appears, double-click on the text and type your text.

Automatically, text boxes expand or shrink to fit the length of the text.

3 After entering your text, click outside the text box. You can also press the Command and Return keys simultaneously to stop editing and select the text box.
4 Drag the selection handles in the text box to change its width.
5 Position the text box on the sheet by dragging it.

It is not possible to enlarge a text box by dragging it up or down. However, you can force the box to extend vertically by dragging the selection handles inward to make it narrower.

You can also draw a text box. Click Text Box in the toolbar while holding the Option key, then drag the pointer on the spreadsheet window to create a text box of the desired size.

For more information about modifying text boxes, see the "Formatting a text box or shape" section on page 159.

Presenting text in columns

You can organize the text of a text box or rectangular shape into columns. When the text fills a column, it extends to the next column.

Use the Columns local menu in the format bar to quickly distribute text across 1 to 4 columns in the selected text box or rectangular shape.

For more options, use the Text Inspector.

To create and format columns using the Text Inspector:

1 Select the text box or rectangular shape whose text you want to divide into columns.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Text Inspector button and finally Columns.
3 To specify the desired number of columns, use the Columns field.
To use columns of equal width, Select "Identical column width"

To configure columns of different widths, deactivate the "Identical column width" checkbox, double-click on a column value and enter a new width.

5 To change the space between columns, double-click on a spacing value and modify it.

Adding text to a shape

All shapes, except lines, can contain text.

To add text to a shape:

1 Place a shape at the desired location on the sheet. For more information about adding shapes, refer to the "Adding a pre-drawn shape" section on page 182 and "Adding a custom shape" section on page 182.
2 Double-click on the shape and type the desired text. If the text extends beyond the border of the shape, a clipping indicator appears.

The clipping indicator shows that the text extends beyond the borders of a shape.

3 To resize the shape, Select it and drag the selection handles. If the insertion point is inside the shape, press Command + Return to exit text editing mode and Select the shape.

You can format text in a shape. You also have the option to rotate a shape while keeping the text in its horizontal position. After rotating the shape, Select Format > Shape > "Reset object and text handles"

To add text to a shape that is part of a group, double-click in the text area of any shape in the group. If you resize the group, everything that comprises it is also resized, except for the text. Of course, you always have the option to select the text and change its font size.

Refer to the "Grouping and locking objects" section on page 177 for details on grouping objects.

Formatting a text box or shape

You can modify the space between the text and the inner border of a text box, shape, or table cell. Refer to the "Modifying the inner text margin in objects" section on page 153 for instructions.

Use the Graphics Inspector and the format bar to format the borders, shadows, opacity, fill color and other options for text boxes or shapes. For more information about adjusting object properties, refer to the "Modifying objects" section on page 171 and "Filling objects" section on page 178.

Using hyperlinks

Hyperlinks are used in spreadsheets displayed on screen, either as HTML files or as Numbers spreadsheets. You can add hyperlinks to open an email or a web page on the Internet.

Use this type of link To access Remarks
Web page A page in a Web browser Specify the URL of the page you want to open.
Email message A new email message with the specified subject and recipients Type the recipient's address and a subject.

Link to a Web page

You can add a hyperlink that opens a web page in your default web browser.

To add a hyperlink that opens a web page:

1 Select the text you want to convert to a link.
If you use text that starts with "www" or "http", the text automatically becomes a hyperlink. To disable this function, CHOOSE Numbers > Preferences, click AutoCorrect, then uncheck "Automatically detect email addresses and Web page addresses". This setting is specific to each computer; therefore, if the spreadsheet is opened on a computer with a different configuration, the computer's setting is used.
2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Hyperlink Inspector button, then select "Enable as link"
3 Choose Web Page from the Link to local menu.
4 Type the web page address in the URL field.

Link to a pre-addressed email message

You can add a hyperlink that you can click to create a pre-addressed email message in your default email application.

To add a hyperlink to an email message:

1 Select the text you want to convert to a link.

If you add an email address in a spreadsheet, the text automatically becomes a hyperlink. To disable this function, Select Numbers > Preferences, click AutoCorrect, then uncheck "Automatically detect email addresses and web page addresses". This setting is specific to each computer; therefore, if the spreadsheet is opened on a computer with a different configuration, the computer's setting is used.

2 Click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Hyperlink Inspector button, then select "Enable as link"
3 Choose Email message from the Link to local menu.
4 Type the email address of the recipient in the To field.
5 You can also specify the subject of the message in the Subject field.

Modifying the text of a hyperlink

You can modify the text of a hyperlink in different ways.

Here are different ways to modify the text of a hyperlink:

Deactivate hyperlinks, modify the hyperlink text, then reactivate the hyperlinks. Activate and deactivate hyperlinks by clicking on Inspector in the toolbar, on the Links Inspector button and by checking the "Disable all links" checkbox
- Click next to the link text, then use the arrow keys to move the insertion point in the text

Inserting page numbers and other variable values

You can insert values such as page numbers, the number of pages, and the date and time in a spreadsheet using formatted text fields that Numbers automatically updates when they change. These values are most often inserted in headers and footers (refer to the "Using headers and footers" section on page 42), but you can also insert formatted text fields anywhere in your spreadsheet.

Here are different ways to insert formatted text fields:

To add page numbers, place the insertion point at the location where the page number should appear, then click Insert > Page Number.

To change the formatting of page numbers, click on a page number while holding the Control key, then choose a new number format.

To add the total number of pages, place the insertion point at the location where the total number of pages should appear, then click Insert > Number of Pages.

To include the total number of pages with each page number (such as "2 of 10", for example), add a page number, type "of", then choose Insert > Number of Pages.

To change the formatting of page numbers, click on a page number while holding the Control key, then choose a different number format.

To add and format the date and/or time, place the insertion point at the location where the value should appear, then choose Insert > Date and Time.

To change the date and time format, click on the date and time value while holding the Control key, Select "Edit Date and Time", then choose a date and time format from the local menu. For the spreadsheet to always display the current date and time, Select "Automatically update on open".

Automatic text substitution

Numbers can be configured to recognize and replace certain text elements with others. For example, if you type the misspelled article "dse", Numbers can automatically replace it with "des"

To configure the automatic text substitution function:

1 Choose Numbers > Preferences.

2 Click AutoCorrect and define the settings as you wish.

To automatically convert straight single or double quotes to curly quotes so that opening and closing quotes are different, Select "Use curly quotes"

To be sure that the first word of a sentence starts with a capital letter, check Capitalize first letter of sentences.

To automatically convert letters in numeric suffixes (such as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc.) to superscripts, check "Numeric suffixes as superscript"

To have Numbers automatically detect the email addresses or URLs you enter, check Automatically detect email addresses and Web page addresses. The URLs and email addresses entered then automatically become links to Mail or Safari.

To use automatic list generation, Select Automatic list detection.

To replace one or more characters with others, check "Text and symbol substitution". Then use the rows of the table to define and activate substitutions as you wish. For example, if you type the copyright symbol as (c), you can order Numbers to automatically convert it to © by placing a checkmark in the Enabled column. To add a row to the table and define your own substitution, click the Add (+) button. To delete a selected item, click the Delete (-) button.

After specifying the substitution settings, they apply to any text you edit or add in a Numbers spreadsheet.

Inserting a non-breaking space

You can insert a non-breaking space between words to ensure they always appear on the same line of text.

To insert a non-breaking space:

Press the spacebar while holding the Option key.

Spell checking

Numbers can detect spelling errors in your spreadsheet and help you find the correct spelling of certain words.

Finding misspelled words

You can configure the spell checker so that it indicates errors while typing, or you can simply check the entire spreadsheet or selected text.

Misspelled words are underlined with red dotted lines.

Here are different ways to find misspelled words:

To check spelling while typing, CHOOSE Edit > Spelling > Check Spelling as You Type.

To disable spell checking while typing, click on Edit > Spelling > Check Spelling as You Type, then disable this option (make sure the checkmark no longer appears next to the menu command).

To check spelling from the insertion point to the end of the spreadsheet, click where you want to place the insertion point, then choose Edit > Spelling > Check Spelling. To limit spell checking to a specific portion of the spreadsheet, Select the text you want to check before selecting the command.

The first misspelled word is highlighted. You can correct it or select the same menu command again to continue checking the spreadsheet.

To scroll through the text more quickly, press Command + semicolon to continue checking the spreadsheet.

To check spelling and get correction suggestions, CHOOSE Edit > Spelling > Spelling.

The Spelling window opens; you can use it as shown in the "Using spelling correction suggestions" section

Using spelling correction suggestions

Use the Spelling window to discover spelling suggestions.

To use spelling correction suggestions:

1 Choose Edit > Spelling > Spelling.
The Spelling window opens and the first misspelled word is highlighted.
2 Make sure to select the appropriate language in the Dictionary local menu. Each language has a different dictionary.
3 To replace the misspelled word in the text, double-click on the word or correct spelling in the list of suggestions.
4 If the correct word is not in the Suggestions list but you know the spelling, select the misspelled word in the Spelling window, type the correct word, then click Correct.
5 If the word is correctly spelled and you want to leave it as is, click Ignore or Remember Spelling. Click Remember Spelling if you use the term often and want to add it to the dictionary.

If you have used Remember Spelling and want to remove the word from the dictionary, type the word in the text box below the Suggestions list, then click Delete.

6 If no other suggestion appears in the Suggestions list, select the misspelled word in the Spelling window, then try another spelling. Click Suggestions so that new suggestions appear in the Suggestions list.
7 Click Find Next and repeat steps 3 to 6 until you find no more errors.

You can also hold down the Control key and click on a misspelled word. In the local menu, you can choose another spelling, click Remember Spelling or Ignore.

Find and Replace Text

You can search for all instances of a word or phrase in your spreadsheet and optionally replace them with another word or phrase.

Here are different ways to find and replace text:

Choose Edit > Find > Find, click Simple or Advanced to configure the find/replace criteria, then click a button to start the find/replace operations.

Simple: in the Find field, type the text you want to search for, then type the text you want to replace it with in the Replace field.

Advanced: in addition to entering text in the Find and Replace fields, you can define other search or replacement criteria. Use the help tags to understand the fields that appear.

Replace All: automatically performs find/replace operations without your intervention.

Replace: replaces the current selection with the replacement text.

Replace & Find: replaces the selection with the replacement text and immediately searches for the next occurrence of the text to find.

Next or Previous: searches through the entire spreadsheet for the next or previous occurrence of the entered text without replacing it, starting from the active sheet or selected cell(s).

Use the other commands in Edit > Find.

Find Next or Find Previous: searches through the entire spreadsheet for the next or previous occurrence of the entered text without replacing it, starting from the active sheet or selected cell(s).

Search the SELECTION: searches for the next occurrence of the SELECTED text.

Go to Selection: displays the selected text when it doesn't appear on screen.

This chapter describes the techniques for adding and modifying images, figures, sound, and other objects.

An object is an element that you can add to a spreadsheet and then manipulate. Images, figures, sequences, sound files, tables, charts, and text boxes are all objects.

Images include photographs or PDF files. Video sequences and sound relate to spreadsheets viewed on screen. Figures include simple pre-drawn shapes (such as triangles and arrows) and custom shapes that you draw yourself. Text boxes contain text.

Selecting Objects

Before you can move, modify, or perform other operations on objects, you must select them. A selected object has handles that allow you to move it or manipulate it.

Here are several ways to select and deselect objects:

To select an object, click on it (to select an object without fill, click on the border).
To select multiple objects, click on the objects while holding down the Shift key.
To select all objects on a sheet, select the sheet and press Command + A or select Edit > Select All.
To select an object that is part of a group, you must first ungroup the objects. Select the group, then choose Arrange > Ungroup.
To deselect objects from a group of selected objects, hold down the Command key, then click on the objects you want to deselect.

Copying and Duplicating Objects

The technique to use for copying an object depends on where you want to place the copy. When the copy is intended for a location far from the original or to another spreadsheet, the easiest method is usually to copy and paste. When working with an object that is close to the original, it is usually easier to duplicate it.

Here are several ways to copy objects:

To copy and paste an object, select it, then choose Edit > Copy. Click on the sheet where you want the copy to appear. Click Edit > Paste.
To copy an object within the same sheet, you can drag it while holding down the Option key.

You can also duplicate the object. Select the object and click Edit > Duplicate. The copy appears above the original and slightly offset from it. Drag the copy to the desired location.

To copy an image between two Numbers spreadsheets, select the image and drag its icon from the File Information field, from the Measures Inspector, onto a sheet in the other Numbers file.

You can also select Edit > Copy and Edit > Paste.

Deleting Objects

Deleting objects is quick and easy.

To delete objects:

Select the object(s) and press the Delete key.

If you delete an object unintentionally, choose Edit > Undo Delete.

Moving Objects

To move objects, you can drag them or copy/paste them.

Here are several ways to move objects:

Click on the object to select it (selection handles appear) then drag it to the new location.
To constrain the object to move horizontally, vertically, or at a 45-degree angle, press the Shift key and hold it down before starting to drag it.
To move the object in small increments, press one of the arrow keys to move the object one point at a time. To move the object in ten-point increments, hold down the Shift key while pressing an arrow key.

To display the position of the object as you move it, choose Numbers > Preferences, then select 'Show size and position of objects while moving' in the General pane.
To precisely align objects relative to their edges or center, you can use alignment guides. See the 'Using Alignment Guides' section on page 169 for more information.
- Select the object and click Edit > Cut. Place the insertion point where you want the object to appear, then click Edit > Paste.

Avoid dragging an object by holding its SELECTION handles, as you might resize it unintentionally.

Moving an Object to the Front or Back

When objects overlap or when text and objects overlap, you can change the order of objects in the stack.

To move an object so it appears in front of or behind text or another object:

1 Select the object to move.
2 To move an object one plane at a time, choose Arrange > Bring Forward or Send Backward.
3 To bring the object to the bottom or top of the stack, choose Arrange > Send to Back or Bring to Front.

If you frequently overlap objects, you can add the Front, Back, Bring Forward, and Send Backward buttons to the toolbar for more efficient work. For more information on customizing the toolbar, see 'The Toolbar' section on page 24.

Aligning Objects

There are different functions for aligning objects.

Aligning Objects Relative to Each Other

You can quickly align objects relative to each other if they are on the same page.

To align objects:

1 Select the objects to align.
2 Choose Arrange > Align Objects, then in the submenu, choose one of the alignment options.

Left: this option positions the objects so their left edge is aligned vertically with the first object you selected.

Center: this option positions the objects so their center is aligned vertically with the first object you selected.

Right: this option positions the objects so their right edge is aligned vertically with the first object you selected.

Top: this option positions the objects so their top edge is aligned horizontally with the first object you select.

Middle: this option moves the objects vertically so their center is aligned horizontally with the first object you select.

Bottom: this option positions the objects so their bottom edge is aligned horizontally with the first object you selected.

You can also align objects relative to each other by dragging them and using the alignment guides which allow you to determine if they are correctly positioned. See the 'Using Alignment Guides' section for more information.

Uniform Spacing of Objects on the Page

You can quickly make the space between the objects the same everywhere,
regardless of their size.

To space objects uniformly:

1 Select the objects.
2 Choose Arrange > Distribute Objects, then choose an option in the submenu.

Horizontally: adjusts the horizontal spacing between objects.

Vertically: adjusts the vertical spacing between objects.

Using Alignment Guides

You can enable alignment guides that will help you align objects on a sheet.

Alignment guides appear when the center or edge of an object is aligned with the center or edge of another object, depending on your preferences.

Alignment guides do not appear on the printed spreadsheet; they are only visible when editing.

To define alignment guides:

1 Select Numbers > Preferences and click General.
2 To show or hide guides when the center of an object is aligned with another object, select or deselect 'Show guides at the center of the object'
3 To show or hide guides when the edge of an object is aligned with another object, select or deselect 'Show guides on the edges of the object'
4 To change the color of the alignment guides, click on the color swatch, then select a color in the Colors window.

The alignment guide settings apply to all spreadsheets displayed in Numbers as long as you don't change them.

To temporarily hide the alignment guides, press and hold the Command key, then drag an object.

You can also create your own alignment guides to help you position objects.

Creating Alignment Guides

You can create your own alignment guides to help you position objects.

To create an alignment guide:

1 Click on Presentation in the toolbar and select Show Rulers.
2 Place the pointer on a ruler, click and drag it onto the page. An alignment guide appears.
3 Drag it on the page to the desired location.

To delete an alignment guide you created, drag it outside the page.

Defining the Precise Position of Objects

Use the Measures Inspector to indicate the location of objects precisely.

To define the precise position of an object:

1 Select the object you want to position.
2 In the toolbar, click Inspector, then click the Measures Inspector button.
3 Enter the X and Y values in the Position fields.

The specified coordinates determine the position of the upper left corner of the object's container.

The X value is measured from the left edge of the presentation.

The Y value is measured from the top edge of the presentation.

If you rotate an object, the X and Y coordinates specify the upper left corner of the rotated container.

If you enter the X and Y coordinates for the positions of lines in the Measures Inspector, the Start coordinates represent the first line endpoint you created. If you later return or rotate the line, the start coordinates always correspond to the same line endpoint.

Modifying Objects

You can resize objects, change their orientation, modify their border style, add shadows and reflections, and adjust their opacity.

Resizing Objects

You can resize an object by dragging its handles or by entering its exact dimensions.

Here are several ways to resize objects:

To resize an object by dragging it, select it, then drag one of its selection handles. To resize an object in one direction, drag a side handle rather than a corner handle.

To resize the object from the center, press the Option key while dragging the mouse.

To maintain an object's proportions, press and hold the Shift key while dragging. You can also click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Measures Inspector button, then select 'Maintain proportions' before dragging.

To display the size of an object as you drag a SELECTION handle, choose Numbers > Preferences, then select 'Show size and position of objects while moving' in the General pane.

To resize an object with exact proportions, select it, click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Measures Inspector button and use the Width and Height controls.
To resize multiple objects at once, select them, click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Measures Inspector button, and then enter the new values in the Width and Height fields.
- Select the object, then click Original Size in the Measures Inspector.

Flipping and Rotating Objects

You can flip or rotate any object. For example, if you have an image of an arrow that you want to use in a spreadsheet, but the arrow needs to be oriented the other way, you can flip it vertically or horizontally or rotate it to any direction.

Here are several ways to change the orientation of an object:

To flip an object horizontally or vertically, select it, then choose Layout > Flip Horizontal or Layout > Flip Vertical. You can also click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Measurement Inspector button, then use the Mirror buttons.
To rotate an object, select it and, while holding down the Command key, move the pointer to a selection handle until it transforms into a curved two-headed arrow, then drag the selection handle. To rotate an object in 45-degree increments, press the Shift and Command keys while dragging the selection handle.

You can click Inspector in the toolbar, click the Measurement Inspector button, then drag the rotation wheel or use the angle controls to define the orientation of the object.

To rotate a shape while keeping its text in horizontal position, once you have rotated the shape, choose Format > Shape > Reset the object and text handles.

Modifying border style

For shapes, chart elements and text boxes, you can either choose a stroke style and color for the border of the object, or indicate that you do not want any border. You can also place a border around imported images.

You can use the formatting bar to modify the style, thickness and color of the lines of the border of one or more selected objects.

You can also use the Graphics Inspector to make other adjustments.

To modify the border style using the Graphics Inspector:

1 Select the object(s) you want to modify.
2 In the toolbar, click Inspector, then click the Graphics Inspector button.
3 Choose Line from the Stroke local menu.
4 Choose a line style from the local menu.

5 To change the stroke thickness, enter a value in the Size field (or click the arrows).
6 To change the stroke color, click the color box and select a color.
7 To set line endpoints, for example arrowheads or circles, choose left and right line endpoint styles from the local menus.

To modify the borders of a table and cells, follow the instructions in the "Format cell borders" section on page 82.

Framing objects

Surround images, shapes, text boxes, video sequences, audio files and other fictional multimedia parameters with a picture frame.

There are several ways to use picture frames:

To add a picture frame, select the object, click Inspector in the toolbar, then click the Graphics Inspector button.

Choose Picture Frame from the Stroke local menu, then click the thumbnail to CHOOSE FRAME. Click the color box to CHOOSE FRAME COLOR.

It is possible to adjust certain frames. To adjust the frame, use the Scale slider or enter a specific percentage in the adjacent field.

To change a picture frame, select a framed image or multimedia parameter, click Inspector in the toolbar and click the Graphics Inspector button. Select Picture Frame from the Stroke local menu, click the arrow next to the thumbnail to select another picture frame.
To remove an object frame from an image or multimedia parameter, select the image or parameter, then choose a line style (or None) from the Stroke local menu.

Adding shadows

Shadows added to objects give an impression of depth. The shadow of an object appears on top of any object behind it. You can create a variety of object effects or remove the shadow of an object.

To quickly add or remove a shadow, you can select the object and activate or deactivate the Shadow option in the formatting bar. The Graphics Inspector allows you to well control the formatting of the object.

To apply a shadow to an object using the Graphics Inspector:

1 Select the object.
2 In the toolbar, click Inspector, then click the Graphics Inspector button.
3 Select Shadow to add a shadow to the object. Deselect Shadow to remove an existing shadow.
4 Set the orientation of the object using the angle controls.
5 To set the distance between the object and the shadow, use the offset controls. A high shadow offset value makes the shadow appear longer and slightly separated from the object.
6 To soften the edge of the shadow or make it sharper, use the blur controls. A higher blur value makes the shadow appear more diffuse; a lower value gives the shadow sharper edges.
7 To modify the transparency of the shadow, use the opacity controls. Do not use the opacity slider at the bottom of the Graphics Inspector; it is used to control the opacity of the object itself.
To change the shadow color, click the shadow color box, then select a color.

You can use the shadow controls in the Graphics Inspector to add shadows to text. Select the text to which you want to add shadows, then use the controls as indicated above.

Adding a reflection

You can add a reflection to an object that reflects vertically downward.

You can add or remove a reflection by selecting an object and activating or deactivating the Reflection option in the formatting bar. The Graphics Inspector also allows you to control the reflection level.

To apply a reflection to an object using the Graphics Inspector:

1 Select the object.
2 In the toolbar, click Inspector, then click the Graphics Inspector button.
3 Select Reflection, then drag the slider to increase or decrease the intensity of the reflection.

Adjusting opacity

You can create interesting effects by making objects more or less opaque.

Thus, when you place a low opacity object on another object, the object below shows through the object above. Depending on the value set for opacity, the objects below can be easily visible, partially obscured or completely invisible (100% opacity).

Here are several ways to change the opacity of an object:

Use the Opacity local menu in the formatting bar to apply a percentage opacity.
For finer control, click Inspector in the toolbar and the Graphics Inspector button, then drag the opacity slider or enter a percentage in the adjacent field.

For shapes, you can separately set the opacity of the fill and stroke colors and that of the object. If you move the Opacity slider in the Colors window to modify the fill or stroke color, that opacity value becomes the maximum opacity of the object. Then, when you change the object's opacity in the Graphics Inspector, you are changing it relative to the opacity set in the Colors window.

If you change the opacity of an object and cannot restore the fill color of the object to 100 percent, it may be because the opacity was set to less than 100 percent in the Colors window. To fix this, Select the object, choose View > Show Colors, then in the Colors window, set the opacity to 100 percent.

Grouping and locking objects

Group the objects you want to keep together and lock those you want to avoid moving accidentally.

Grouping and ungrouping objects

You can group objects (except tables) so you can move, copy, resize and orient them as if they were a single object. You can also modify the text associated with a shape or text object that is part of a group, but it is not possible to modify other attributes of individual objects within a group.

To group objects:

1 Press and hold the Command key (or Shift), then select the objects you want to group. These objects must not be locked.
2 Choose Layout > Group.

To ungroup an object that is part of a group, Select the group, then choose Layout > Ungroup. If the group is locked, unlock it first.

Locking and unlocking objects

You can lock objects to avoid moving them involuntarily when working on the document.

Once locked, individual or grouped objects cannot be moved, deleted, or modified unless they are unlocked first. You can still select, copy or duplicate a locked object. If you copy or duplicate a locked object, the new object is also locked.

To lock objects:

1 Hold down the Command key (or Shift) while selecting the objects to lock.
2 Choose Layout > Lock.

To unlock an object, Select it, then choose Layout > Unlock.

Filling objects

Fill an object with a solid color, a color gradient or an image.

Filling an object with color

Use the formatting bar to quickly add a fill color to a selected object. Click the Fill box, then choose a color from the color chart or click Show Colors to open the Colors window which contains other colors. Use the Opacity command to adjust the transparency of the color.

Use the Graphics Inspector to fill an object with a solid color or with a color gradient in which two colors blend progressively into each other.

To modify the fill color of an object using the Graphics Inspector:

1 Select the object.
2 In the toolbar, click Inspector, then click the Graphics Inspector button.

3 To apply a solid fill color, CHOOSE Color Fill from the Fill local menu. Click the color box below the Fill local menu to open the Colors window, then select a color from that window.
4 To fill an object with a color gradient, CHOOSE Gradient Fill from the Fill local menu. Click each color box and choose each color from the Colors window.

To set a direction for the gradient, use the wheel or Angle field. To flip it horizontally or vertically, click the arrow Angle buttons.

To reverse the gradient, click the double arrow next to the color boxes.

You will find below instructions on how to use the Colors window.

Using the Colors window

The Colors window is used to select the color of objects.

You can use the color wheel in the Colors window to select colors. The color you select appears in the area at the top of the Colors window. You can save this color for later use by placing it in the color palette.

To apply to a page object the colors you have selected in the Colors window, you must place the color in the appropriate color box of a sub-window of the Inspector. You can select a color box from one of the Inspectors, then click a color on the color wheel. Or, you can drag a color from the palette or color area to the color box of one of the Inspectors.

To select a color:

1 Open the Colors window by clicking Colors in the toolbar or a color box in one of the Inspectors.
2 Click anywhere on the color wheel. The selected color appears in the color area at the top of the Colors window.
3 To make the color lighter or darker, drag the slider on the right side of the Colors window.
4 To make the color more transparent, drag the Opacity slider to the left or type a percentage in the Opacity field.
5 To use the color palette, open it by dragging the handle at the bottom of the Colors window. To save a color in the palette, drag it from the color area to the palette. To remove a color from the palette, drag a white square over it.
6 To duplicate the color of an element displayed on screen, click the magnifying glass to the left of the color area of the Colors window. Click on the element on screen whose color you want to use. The color appears in the color area. Select the element in the spreadsheet to which you want to apply the color, then drag the color from the color area to the element.

Filling an object with an image

You can fill a shape, text box, table, cell, background chart or chart series with an image.

To fill an object with an image:

1 Select the object you want to fill with an image.
2 If the Graphics Inspector is not open, click the Inspector button in the toolbar, then the Graphics Inspector button.
3 In the Graphics Inspector, select Image Fill or Tinted Image Fill, then choose an image.

You can also drag an image from the Finder or media browser to the image frame of the Graphics Inspector or directly into a cell or chart area.

4 Choose an image scale from the local menu.

Fit: resizes the image so it best fits the dimensions of the object. If the shape of the object is different from that of the original object, some parts may not appear; empty space may also appear around the object.

Fill: makes the image appear larger or smaller by sizing it to leave minimal space around it, even if it does not have the same shape as the object.

Stretch: sizes the image to fit the size of the object but distorts it if the object has a different shape from the original image.

Original Dimensions: places the image in the object without changing its original dimensions. If the object is larger than the object, you only see part of the object in the object. If the object is smaller than the object, it is surrounded by empty space.

Tile: repeats the object inside the object if it is smaller than the object. If the object is larger than the object, you only see part of the object in the object.

5 To place a transparent tint over the image, CHOOSE Tinted Image Fill from the Fill local menu.

Click the color box next to the Choose button, then select a color from the Colors window. Drag the Opacity slider in the Colors window to make the tint darker or lighter. If you drag the Opacity slider in the Graphics Inspector, the opacity of the tint and image changes.

Using shapes

Numbers includes pre-drawn shapes. You can also create your own custom shapes.

Adding a pre-drawn shape

You can insert pre-drawn shapes, such as triangles, arrows, circles, and rectangles, to use as simple graphics.

Here are several ways to add a pre-drawn shape:

Click on Shapes in the toolbar, then choose a shape from the Figures submenu.

You can also choose Insert > Figure > Figure type.

You can also draw the shape yourself. In the toolbar, click on Figures while holding down the Option key, release the Option key and choose a shape, then drag the crosshair pointer in the spreadsheet to create a shape of the desired size.

To constrain the shape (for example, so that the three sides of a triangle are equal to each other), keep the Shift key pressed while dragging.

Adding a custom shape

You can use the drawing tool to create your own shapes.

To create a custom shape:

1 Click on Figure in the toolbar, CHOOSE Figures, then select the Drawing tool icon. You can also select the menus Insert > Figure > Draw a Figure.

The pointer, initially representing an arrow, then changes to a kind of pencil tip.

2 Click anywhere on the sheet to create the first point of the custom shape.
3 To create a second point and connect it to the first via a straight line, simply click on another location.

To create a curved segment instead of a straight line segment, click on the second location and drag it with the mouse to modify the angle of the curve or enlarge it. Release the mouse button when the curve drawing suits you.

The line connecting the two points follows the default line style defined by the template you are using. Later, you will be able to change the type of line used through the line settings defined in the graphics inspector.

4 Repeat step 3 to create additional points as needed. Each time you add a new point, Numbers connects it to the previous point with a line representing the defined line style and to the first point, but without adding a line. It then fills the shape with the default color defined by the template you are using. You can change the fill color later in the Graphics Inspector using the Fill settings.

To delete a segment you just created, simply press the Delete key. Press the Delete key again to delete the previous segment, and so on.

5 To end the drawing and close the shape (that is, add a solid line between the last and the first point), click on the first point.

To stop tracing but leave the shape open (that is, no line is drawn between the last and the first point) so you can continue to manipulate it later, press the Escape key or double-click on the last point created.

To finish and close an open shape, click on it once to select it, then click a second time to display its points. Double-click on one of the points at one of the ends of the open segment. The pointer then takes the form of a pen nib.

If you want to add additional points, click on other locations as needed. When the drawing is complete, click on the point at the end of the open segment to close the shape.

Editable shapes

Before modifying the points of a shape, you must make sure that the shape is editable.

Here are several ways to make shapes editable:

To modify the points of a pre-drawn shape, select it, then choose Format > Figure > Make Editable.

Red points appear on the shape. Drag the points to modify it. Subsequently, to modify a pre-drawn shape that has become editable, double-click on it slowly.

To make a custom shape editable, click on it once to select it, then click a second time to display its points.

Manipulating the points of a shape

You can modify the outline of a shape by adding, moving, or deleting points. You must make the shape editable, as described in the "Editable Shapes" section on page 184.

Click on a point and drag it to modify the shape.

Here are several ways to manipulate the points of a shape:

To add a point, make the shape editable, then press the Option key and place the pointer on the edge of the shape. The pointer changes and takes the form of a pen nib accompanied by a plus sign (+). Click on the edge where you want to add a point, then move it if needed.
To move a point, make the shape editable, then click on the point in question and drag it to a new location. You can move multiple points at the same time by clicking on each of them while holding down the Shift key, then dragging them all at once.
To delete a point, make the shape editable, then click on the point to eliminate and press the Delete key. You can also delete multiple points at the same time by clicking on each of them while pressing the Shift key, then pressing the Delete key.

Modifying the curve trace

You can enlarge or reduce a curve or modify its angle.

To redraw a curve:

1 Make the shape editable.
2 Click on one of the red circular controls of the curve that you can redraw. A control handle appears on both sides of the circular control.

3 To enlarge or reduce the curve, drag the circular control or one of the control handles.
4 To change the angle of the curve, move the control handles clockwise or counterclockwise. You can thus produce various effects by moving handles at the same time or independently of each other. Take the time to test the options offered until you get the desired result.

To move all control handles at once, press the Option key and drag one of them.

To move only one of the control handles, press the Command key before dragging the handle.

Modifying the trace of a straight segment

You can modify the angle formed by two segments or modify the length of a segment.

To redraw a straight segment:

1 Make the shape editable.
2 Click on a corner point.
3 To modify the angle formed by two segments that meet, drag the point clockwise or counterclockwise.
4 To modify the length of one of the segments, drag the point outward or inward.

Converting corner points to curve points and vice versa

You can transform one or more points to curves or curves to points.

Here are several ways to convert corner points to curve points, and vice versa:

To convert a corner point to a curve point, make the shape editable and double-click on the corner point.
Conversely, to convert a curve point to a corner point, make the shape editable and double-click on the curve point.
To convert all corner points of one or more shapes to curve points, make the shapes editable, select the shape(s) concerned, then select Format > Figure > Round Outline.
To convert all curve points of one or more shapes to corner points, make the shapes editable, select the shape(s) concerned, then select Format > Figure > Sharpen Outline.

After a shape is configured to be editable, you can use the Round Outline and Sharpen Outline commands without having to reconfigure it as editable again.

Modifying specific pre-drawn shapes

Some pre-drawn shapes have special built-in editing controls.

Modifying a rounded rectangle

The rounded rectangle includes a circular control that allows you to modify its angles.

To modify a rounded rectangle:

Select the shape, then drag its circular control to the left to straighten the corners and to the right to round them.

Modifying single and double arrows

Arrows have three special controls.

Here are several ways to modify single and double arrows after selecting them:

Drag the selection handle on the tail or head of the arrow to increase or decrease the length and width of the tail without changing the shape of its head.

Drag the circular control up or down to modify the width of the tail.

Drag the circular control to the left or right to resize the arrow head.

Modifying a star

The star-shaped figure has a slider allowing you to increase or reduce the number of its branches and a circular control allowing you to modify the angles between them.

Here are several ways to modify a star:

When you select a star-shaped figure, the slider appears. Drag the slider to increase or reduce the number of points making up the star.
- Drag the circular control to modify the angles formed by the branches of the star.

Modifying a polygon

The polygon has a slider that allows you to increase or reduce the number of its sides.

To modify a polygon:

When you select the polygon, the SLIDER appears. Drag the SLIDER to increase or reduce the number of sides making up the polygon.

Using multimedia placeholders

Some Numbers templates contain multimedia placeholders. You can drag your own images, video clips, and audio files onto these placeholders. Your multimedia file is then automatically resized and correctly positioned. You can easily replace an element on a multimedia placeholder by dragging a new file to it; it is not necessary to delete the old file first.

You can recognize a multimedia placeholder if you place the mouse pointer over it; a help tag appears and invites you to drag your image to this location.

Here are several ways to use multimedia placeholders:

Drag a file from the Media Browser, Finder, or another application onto the multimedia placeholder.

To open the Media Browser, click on Multimedia in the toolbar. Click on one of the buttons at the top of the window to search for photos, audio files, or video clips.

To modify the content of a multimedia placeholder, drag a new multimedia file onto the existing content.
To convert a placeholder image to an ordinary image, select it, choose Format > Advanced, then uncheck "Set as multimedia placeholder" in the submenu. To replace an ordinary image, you must first delete it.

To delete a multimedia placeholder, select it and press the Delete key.
To create a multimedia placeholder, follow the instructions in the section "Creating multimedia placeholders in a custom template" on page 212.

Using images

Numbers accepts all formats supported by QuickTime, including the following image file types:

TIFF
GIF
JPEG
- PDF
- PSD
EPS
- PICT

Once you have imported an image into a spreadsheet, you can mask (or crop) it and modify its brightness and other settings. You can place an image inside a shape, text box, chart element, or table cell. Numbers also allows you to produce graphics with transparency (graphics with alpha channel).

Importing an image

Import an image directly from the Finder or Media Browser.

There are different ways to import an image file:

Drag an image file from the Finder onto the spreadsheet and place it in the desired location.

Click on Multimedia in the toolbar, on Photos in the media browser window, select the album containing the photo, then drag the thumbnail to the desired location.

Choose Insert > Choose, select the image file, then click Insert. Drag the image to position it in the desired location.
To add an image file using a multimedia placeholder, see the section "Using multimedia placeholders" on page 188.

Masking (cropping) images

You can crop images without actually modifying the files by masking parts of images.

Cropping an image using the default rectangular mask

You can use a rectangular mask to define the limits of an image.

To crop an image using the default rectangular mask:

1 Import the image you want to mask (for more information, see the section "Importing an image" on page 189).
2 Select the image, then choose Format > Mask. A resizable mask overlays the image and controls appear.

3 To resize the image, move the horizontal cursor.
4 Fine-tune the mask.

Drag the selection handles to resize the mask. To maintain the proportions of the mask, press and hold the Shift key while dragging the selection handles.

To rotate the mask, hold down the Command key while dragging a corner selection handle.

Place the mask on the part of the image to display. You can click on the edge of the selected mask and drag it. You can also click on the image but outside the mask and then drag the image.

5 To display only the part under the mask, double-click on the mask, press the Return key, or click outside the image, or click Edit Mask. The edges of the masked image are represented by dotted lines.
6 To resize or rotate the masked image, drag the selection handles (respectively by holding or not holding the Command key).
7 To deselect the image and hide the mask controls, click outside the image.

To display the entire image, double-click on it. To modify the mask, click Edit Mask.

Masking an image with a shape

You can use a shape to define the limits of an image.

To mask an image with a shape:

1 Select the image, then Format > Mask with a shape > shape.
You can also click while holding the Shift key to select a shape and an image, then click Mask in the toolbar (or select Format > Mask with the selected shape).
2 Drag the image to position the part you want to display. To move the mask, click the dotted border of the mask and drag it.
3 To resize the image, drag the slider located above the Edit Mask button.
4 Drag the selection handles to resize the mask.
5 To make only the part under the mask visible, double-click the mask or the image, press the Return key, or click outside the image, or click Edit Mask.
6 To resize the masked image, click Edit Mask and drag the selection handles.
7 To deselect the image and hide the mask controls, click outside the image.

To edit a masked image, double-click it.

Note: if you use a shape containing text as a mask, the text is deleted. To restore the text, select Edit, then "Undo Mask with Shape"

You can also drag an image onto the shape to mask it.

Removing the mask from an image

You can remove a mask and restore the original image.

To stop masking an image:

Select the masked image, then click Format > Unmask.

Removing background or unnecessary elements from an image

The Alpha tool lets you convert certain colors in an image to transparent colors. This function is useful for removing a background or other unnecessary colors.

You will get optimal results if you remove solid colors with well-defined boundaries. To remove less well-defined areas, select a smaller area and repeat the process.

To remove unnecessary elements:

1 Select the image.
2 Select Format > Instant Alpha.
3 Click the color you want to make transparent, then slowly drag the slider over it.

As you drag the pointer, you select the adjacent area of the same color.

As you drag the pointer, the selection expands to include the area that is the same color. The more you drag, the larger the selected area of the image becomes.

4 Repeat step three as many times as you like.

5 When you're done, click outside the image or press the Return key.

At any time, you can restore the deleted parts of the image. To restore the original image, select Format > Remove Instant Alpha. To restore parts of an image deleted using the Instant Alpha command, select Edit > Undo until the parts are restored.

Changing brightness, contrast, and other image settings

You can adjust the brightness, contrast, and certain other image settings to improve their quality or create interesting effects. The adjustments you make do not modify the original image, only its appearance in Numbers.

To adjust an image:

1 Select the image.
2 Select Presentation > Show "Adjust Image" to open the Adjust Image window.

3 Use the following controls to make adjustments.

Enhance: this button automatically adjusts the image.

Brightness: adjusts the brightness of the image.

Contrast: adjusts contrast and light and dark tones. This way, you can make shadows darker, enhance object edges, or bring out colors. If you greatly increase the contrast of a photo, it will look more like an illustration.

Saturation: changes the intensity of colors.

Temperature: lets you favor warmer tones (more orange) or cooler tones (more blue).

Hue: changes the amount of red or green tones in the image.

Sharpness: makes the image focus more or less sharp.

Exposure: lets you favor shadow areas or light areas.

The histogram: helps you understand the distribution between shadow areas (shown on the left of the display) and light areas (shown on the right) of the image.

Levels: changes the levels of light and dark tones.

Auto Levels: makes Numbers automatically improve colors.

4 To restore the original settings, click Reset Image.

To save all the changes you made, save the spreadsheet. The settings when you save the spreadsheet can be viewed at any time in the Adjust Image window.

Using PDF files as graphics

If you plan to greatly increase or decrease the dimensions of a graphic, consider converting it to PDF format before inserting it into Numbers. PDF files do not lose their precision when resized. Other file types may not retain all their sharpness when enlarged or reduced.

PDF files also provide a good way to move tabular data from Excel or AppleWorks documents into Numbers. If you want to incorporate tables from an Excel or AppleWorks spreadsheet with complex formatting into your spreadsheet, you can save the sheet as a PDF and then place this PDF file on a page as you would with any other external image file.

To convert an Excel or AppleWorks file to a PDF file:

1 In your Excel or AppleWorks spreadsheet, select the range of the table you want to display in your spreadsheet.
2 Choose File > Print.
3 In the Print dialog, choose "Save as PDF" from the PDF menu.
4 In the Save dialog, type a name for the PDF file, select a location, then click Save.

You can copy a range of cells from an Excel document and paste them with their content directly into your spreadsheet. Numbers then creates a new table to hold the Excel data.

You can also convert an image to a PDF file using the Capture application. Open Capture (found in the Applications/Utilities folder). Choose Capture > Selection to select the screen area you want to create an image from. Select File > Print to save the image as a PDF.

Using sound and video

You can add sound, video sequences, and Flash files to your spreadsheet if you plan to display it on a screen as a Numbers file. Playback of the video or audio file starts when you double-click the corresponding icon.

Note: some media files are protected by copyright. Some downloaded music may only be playable on the computer that was used to download it. Make sure you have the necessary permission to use the files you want to include.

Numbers accepts any QuickTime or iTunes file type, including the following:

MOV
FLASH
MP3
MPEG-4
- AIFF
AAC

Important: to verify that sequences or other multimedia data will be able to be played and displayed if your document is transferred to another computer, check that the "Copy audio and video in document" option is selected; when you have selected Save or Save As, click the disclosure triangle next to the field, then click Advanced Options.

Adding an audio file

Add an audio file that you can play by double-clicking its icon.

Here are several ways to add an audio file:

Drag an audio file from the Finder onto a sheet.

Click Multimedia in the toolbar, click Audio, select an audio file, and drag the file to the sheet.
To add an audio file using a multimedia placeholder, refer to the "Using multimedia placeholders" section on page 188.

Adding a video file

Add a video file that you can play by double-clicking its icon.

Here are several ways to add a video:

Drag a video file from the Finder onto a sheet.

Click Multimedia in the toolbar, click Sequences, select a file, then drag it to the sheet.

To display the sequences listed in the Sequences sub-window of the media browser, you must place them in the Sequences folder in the Finder, in iTunes, or in iPhoto.

Choose Insert > Choose, select the video file, then click Insert.
To add a video file using a multimedia placeholder, see the "Using multimedia placeholders" section on page 188.

Adjusting playback options for multimedia files

In the QuickTime Inspector, you can change settings such as the start or end of a sequence and the frame to display until the sequence starts.

To set playback preferences:

1 In the toolbar, click Inspector then the QuickTime Inspector button.
2 Click the sequence or audio object to select it.
3 To start or stop playback of the sequence on particular frames or at available times, drag the start and end sliders.
4 To specify the sequence frame (called "poster") to display while waiting for playback to begin, drag the Poster slider until the desired frame of the sequence appears.

5 Choose a repeat option from the Repeat menu:

None: play once.

Loop: continuous playback.

Bidirectional loop: continuous playback forward and backward.

To increase or decrease volume, drag the Volume slider to the right or left.

Adding Address Book data to a table

This chapter explains how to add contact information stored in the Address Book and vCards to a Numbers table.

Address Book fields are an abundant source of names, phone numbers, addresses, and personal data. You can use Address Book data to quickly create tables that bring together the information you need about your professional contacts, close ones, contact points for your vacations, etc.

Using Address Book fields

You can insert data from Address Book fields into Numbers tables. You can also add data from a virtual business card (called a vCard) that was sent to you.

If a table contains a header row with names that match those found in the Address Book or in vCards, you can add contact data by dragging the desired cards onto the table. You can also create a table by dragging cards onto the canvas.

Mapping column names to Address Book field names

The following table lists the Address Book fields that Numbers supports. Synonyms are alternate names that you can add to the value of a particular Address Book field.

Address Book field names Field name synonyms
Prefix Title, name prefix
Last name Last name
First name
Suffix Name suffix, professional suffix, academic suffix
Nickname
Maiden name
Profession
Department Department of employment
Company
Phone (first available number)
Phone (main)
Office phone
Home phone
Mobile Mobile phone, cell phone, cellular phone, cellular
Home fax
Work fax
Pager Beeper
Other phone
Email (first available address) Email
Work email
Personal email
Other email
Web address (first available URL)
Work web address
Personal web address
Other web address
Birthday
Address Book field names Field name synonyms
AIM (first available address) Instant message, instant message alias, instant message name, instant message address, chat, chat alias, chat name, chat address
Professional AIM address AIM (work), instant message (work), instant message alias (work), instant message name (work), instant message address (work), chat (work), chat alias (work), chat name (work), chat address (work)
Personal AIM address AIM (home), instant message (home), instant message alias (home), instant message name (home), chat (home), chat alias (home), chat name (home), chat address (home)
Other AIM address AIM (other), instant message (other), instant message alias (other), instant message name (other), instant message address (other), chat (other), chat alias (other), chat name (other), chat address (other)
Yahoo
Yahoo! address
Personal Yahoo! address
Other Yahoo! address
Address
Address (first available address) Street
City (first available city) Municipality
Region/Province (first available region/province)
Postal code
Country (first available country)
Professional address
Address (work) Street (work)
City (work) Municipality (work)
State (work)
Postal code (work)
Country (work)
Personal address
Address (home) Home
City (home) Municipality (home)
State (home)
Postal code (home)
Country (home)
Other address
Address (other) Street (address)
City (other address) Municipality (other)
State (other address)
Postal code (other address) Postal code (other)
Country (other address)
Note Notes

Adding Address Book data to an existing table

You can add data from the Address Book or a vCard to a table if the header row of the table contains names that correspond to field names listed in "Mapping column names to Address Book field names" on page 199.

To add data from contacts to an existing table:

1 Identify the fields from the Address Book or vCards whose values you want to copy to the table.
2 Make sure it has a header row whose cells contain Address Book or vCard field names.

Data from fields that cannot be associated with a header row cell will not be added to the table.

3 In the Address Book, select the contacts or groups you want, then drag them onto the table.

Similarly, you can also drag vCards onto the table.

Rows are added as needed to incorporate all the data.

If a contact's data already appears in the table, another row is added for that contact. You can find duplicate rows by sorting, as described in the "Sorting table cells" section on page 85.

Adding data extracted from Address Book to a new table

You can use data extracted from Address Book or a vCard to create a table containing a row for each contact.

There are several ways to create a table containing contact-specific data:

In Address Book, select the desired cards or a group, then drag your selection onto the canvas.

Drag the chosen vCards onto the canvas.

The table contains a column for each named vCard or Address Book field, as indicated in the section "Mapping column names to Address Book field names" on page 199. However, only the Name, First Name, Phone, and Email fields are visible, with other columns being hidden. To display these hidden columns, choose Table > Show all columns. You can then delete or rename columns if necessary.

This chapter describes the various ways you have to distribute your Numbers spreadsheet so that other users can view or use it.

In addition to printing or faxing a spreadsheet, you can share it electronically. By exporting it to other document formats, you can collaborate with other people who use Excel or other applications. You can also send a document directly to iWeb to attach it to a blog entry.

Printing a sheet

You can use Print mode to preview a sheet across multiple pages before printing it.

To print a sheet:

To format a sheet across multiple pages, see the section "Dividing a sheet into pages" on page 41.
2 Select the sheet to print.
3 Choose File > Print sheet.
4 To preview the sheet before printing, click the Preview button in the Print dialog. The sheet opens in the Preview window, which allows you to view each page as it will appear when printed. For more information on using the preview, see the help. Choose Help > Preview Help when the Preview window is active.

Select Proof-screen in the lower left corner of the Preview window to account for your printer's capabilities. For example, if you are printing a color document on a black and white printer, the Proof-screen option displays the preview of the document in black and white.

Click Print to print your sheet directly from the Preview window. Click Cancel, click somewhere on your sheet, then choose File > Print sheet to configure additional print options.

5 Choose the printer you want to use from the Printer pop-up menu.

Type the number of copies you want to print in the Copies field, then check the Sorted box if you want to print each group of pages in order before printing the next group. If you want to print a batch of pages 1, then pages 2, then pages 3, etc., uncheck the box.

6 Through the Copies and Pages pop-up menu in the Print dialog, you can select print options. You can print your sheet in reverse order, print only odd pages or only even pages, print a cover page (separator page), etc.

To learn how to print double-sided, see "Choosing layout options for printing"; to learn how to manage color settings, see the section "Adjusting print color with ColorSync" on page 205.

7 Click Print.

Choosing layout options for printing

Print double-sided and set other options that control how each page of a sheet is printed.

To select layout options:

1 Choose File > Print sheet.

2 In the Print dialog, choose Layout from the pop-up menu located below the Presets pop-up menu.

3 To print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper, choose Page Setup from the pop-up menu located below the Presets pop-up menu.

Choose the number of pages to display on each page from the "Pages per sheet" pop-up menu. Select an orientation, then choose the desired line style to separate each printed page from the Border pop-up menu.

4 To print double-sided, choose Page Setup from the pop-up menu located below the Presets pop-up menu, then select a binding option.

Bind long edge: prints pages to be bound along the length.

Bind short edge: prints pages to be bound on the short side of the paper.

Not all printers can print double-sided. See the documentation provided with your printer.

5 To save your print options as a preset that you can reuse later, choose Save as from the Presets pop-up menu in the Print dialog, then give a name to the preset.

To use the same settings later, choose the preset name from the Presets pop-up menu.

Adjusting print color with ColorSync

You can lighten or darken printed sheets, apply a sepia tint to them, or add other effects by adding a Quartz filter to the output for your printer. The filter uses ColorSync technology to modify the printed sheet without modifying the sheet itself.

Not all printers can print in color. See the documentation provided with your printer.

To adjust printed color:

1 Choose File > Print sheet.
2 Choose ColorSync from the pop-up menu below the Presets pop-up menu in the Print dialog.
3 Choose an option from the Color Conversion pop-up menu.

Standard: uses the default settings in Numbers to control color management of the printed sheet.

By printer: allows the printer you are using to control color management of the printed sheet.

4 Choose an option from the Quartz Filter pop-up menu.

To preview the printed sheet with the Quartz filter you need, click Preview.

After selecting the desired Quartz filter, you can save this setting in your preset.

For more information on ColorSync and Quartz filters, see the ColorSync Utility Help by opening the ColorSync application (located in Applications/Utilities), then choosing Help > ColorSync Utility Help.

The ColorSync utility icon

Exporting to other document formats

You can share your Numbers spreadsheets across different platforms by exporting them to an Excel, PDF, or CSV file (comma-separated values).

To export a spreadsheet to another file format:

1 Choose File > Export.
2 Choose a document format.

PDF: PDF files can be generated using image quality set to good, better, or best. They can be viewed or printed in Preview, viewed or printed in Safari, and edited with a PDF application. Select All sheets from the Layout pop-up menu to create a PDF file displaying each sheet on a different page. Select Active sheet from the Layout pop-up menu to create a PDF file of the selected sheet.

Excel: these files can be opened and edited in Microsoft Excel on a computer running Mac OS X or Windows. Each table is converted to an Excel spreadsheet and all other objects are placed on separate spreadsheets if multiple tables are available. Some formula calculations may be different in Excel.

CSV: most spreadsheet applications support the CSV file format. In a CSV file, cell values on each row are separated using a comma, and each row is separated using a line feed character. Each table is placed in its own CSV file and all files are placed in a folder. Graphics are not exported. The last calculated values are exported.

3 Click Next.
4 Give the document a new name.
5 Choose the location to save the document.
6 Click Export.

Sending a spreadsheet to iWeb

If you use (or plan to use) iWeb to create a website, you can send a Numbers spreadsheet directly to your iWeb blog or podcast. The spreadsheet appears as an attachment that visitors to your website can download.

To send a spreadsheet to iWeb:

1 Verify that iWeb 08 or a later version is installed on your computer.
2 Open your Numbers spreadsheet and choose File > Send to iWeb > PDF, or choose File > Send to iWeb > Numbers Document.

PDF creates a PDF version of your spreadsheet.

Numbers Document creates an archive of your spreadsheet.

3 If iWeb is not open, it opens and you can then select a blog or podcast, new or existing, to which you can attach your spreadsheet. If you have created only one blog or podcast, the spreadsheet is attached to it.

When you publish your website, visitors subscribing to your blog or podcast will automatically receive the latest attachments in their iTunes library (PDF format only).

To learn more about using iWeb to design and publish web pages, open iWeb and choose Help > iWeb Help.

Designing your custom Numbers spreadsheet templates

This chapter is for people who want to create their own spreadsheet templates.

It assumes that you are already familiar with the Numbers features described in the previous chapters.

Designing a template

The templates provided with Numbers represent ideas for developing the visual appearance of charts, tables, and other objects.

Creating custom templates can be as simple as adding your company logo to an existing template. You can also modify the attributes of a Numbers template using:

table styles;

reusable tables accessible by clicking Tables in the toolbar;

default formatting for different types of charts;

default attributes for text boxes, shapes, and images;

numbers and number of sheets;

predefined content inserted into sheets, such as text, tables, and dummy multimedia settings.

You can also create a template from a blank spreadsheet.

Step 1: Define styles for your tables

A template has one or more table styles so you can format a selected table with a single click. Table styles are useful for applying consistent formatting to tables.

You can use or redefine the table styles in a Numbers template or create your own styles. To learn more, see the section "Using styles for tables" on page 87.

Step 2: Define reusable tables

A template has reusable tables that allow you to add tables that are already sized and have styles already applied. They also contain predefined content, such as formulas and text.

When using a template, you can then add a reusable table by clicking Tables on the toolbar and selecting a table from the pop-up menu.

You can use or redefine the reusable tables in a Numbers template or you can create your own. To learn more, see the section "Defining reusable tables" on page 52.

Step 3: Define default tables, text boxes, shapes, and images

A template has default values defined for the following objects, which take effect if the user adds one of these objects:

a chart;

a text box;
-a shape;

an imported image.

You can use the default settings included in the template or modify them.

Defining default attributes for charts

You can set the default appearance of each chart type. Default attributes must be set separately for each chart type.

To set the default attributes of charts:

1 Place a chart on the page by clicking Charts in the toolbar and selecting a chart type.
2 Select the chart, then define its attributes.

To resize a chart, rotate it, and define other attributes that charts have in common, see the section "Formatting general attributes of a chart" on page 118.

To learn how to format pie charts, bar charts, and other chart types, see the section "Formatting specific chart types" on page 126.

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each chart type to which you want to associate default attributes.
4 Select a chart, then choose Format > Advanced > Set default style for chart type.
Repeat this step for each chart to which you assigned default settings.
5 Delete the charts from the spreadsheet.

Defining default attributes for text boxes and shapes

The default attributes of text boxes and shapes determine the fill, outline, and shadow the first time they are inserted on a page. Default attributes also determine the appearance of text that you place in boxes or shapes.

To define default text boxes and shapes:

1 Add the objects to a sheet.

Click Text Box on the toolbar to add a text box, and click Shapes on the toolbar then select a shape.

2 To set the attributes of text included in a text box or shape, select the object, add text to the object, and format the text.

See the section "Formatting text size and appearance" on page 134 for instructions.

3 To set the attributes of the object, select the text box or shape, then follow the instructions in the section "Modifying objects" on page 171 and the section "Filling an object with color" on page 178.
4 Save the text box and shape as default objects.

To save the text box, select it, then choose Format > Advanced > Set default text box style.

To save the shape, select it, then choose Format > Advanced > Set default shape style.

5 Delete the text box and shape from the sheet.

Defining default attributes for imported images

For imported graphics, you can define shadows, opacity, borders, etc.

To define the default attributes of images:

1 Import an image as described in the section "Importing an image" on page 189.
2 Select the image, then define its attributes.

To format borders around the image, see the sections "Changing the border style" on page 172 and "Framing objects" on page 173.

To learn how to add a shadow, see the section "Adding shadows" on page 174.

To add a reflection, see the section "Adding a reflection" on page 176.

To adjust the image transparency, see the section "Adjusting opacity" on page 176.

3 Choose Format > Advanced > Set default image style.
4 Delete the image from the page.

Step 4: Create starting content for the spreadsheet

You can use predefined content to model the appearance of a finished spreadsheet or to provide instructions and other productivity information for template users.

Predefinition of tables and other objects for a custom model

Add tables, charts, text boxes, images, figures, and any other starter content to your templates to allow users to be more productive and improve the visual impact of the spreadsheet.

For example, you can:

add names to tables and titles to charts and their axes;

add formulas and other predefined content to table cells;

configure cells so their values display in a particular way, for example, using a numeric format or checkboxes;

create text boxes or comments that provide instructions and suggestions for template use;

use color to highlight the importance of certain elements in tables and charts.

Definition of placeholder multimedia parameters in a custom template

When you drag an image, a series, or an audio file of your choice to a placeholder multimedia parameter, your multimedia data is automatically resized and placed. You can easily replace data in the placeholder multimedia parameter by dragging another file to it; there is no need to delete the old element first.

To create a placeholder multimedia parameter:

1 Add an image, an audio file, or a sequence to the spreadsheet.

See the sections "Importing an image" on page 189, "Adding a sound file" on page 195, and "Adding a sequence file" on page 196 for instructions.

2 Select the imported object and place it at the desired location in the spreadsheet, as described in the section "Moving objects" on page 167.
3 Format the imported object, as described in the section "Modifying objects" on page 171.
4 Select the object, then choose Format > Advanced > Set as placeholder multimedia parameter.

To delete a placeholder multimedia parameter, select it and then press the Delete key.

Predefinition of sheets for a custom template

Add multiple sheets to a template when you want to divide its content into groups.

There are several ways to configure sheets in a template:

You can add sheets or delete sheets from a Numbers template. See the section "Adding and deleting sheets" on page 39 for more information.
To move sheets and reorganize their content, see the section "Reorganizing sheets and their content" on page 39.

Step 5: saving a custom template

You can save your new template so it appears in the template selector.

To save a custom template:

1 Choose File > Save as Template.
2 Give the template a name.
3 Specify a folder to save your template.

By default, it saves in your home folder, in the Library/Application Support/iWork/Numbers/Templates/My Templates/ folder, and appears in the My Templates window of the template selector.

To save the template in another location in your home folder, go to Library/Application Support/iWork/Numbers/Templates/ and create a subfolder. The folder name is used as the template category in the template selector.

4 Click Save.

To delete a custom template, locate the folder in Finder where you saved it and drag it to the Trash.

This chapter describes the functions that can be used in cell formulas.

This chapter describes each of the functions that can be used in formulas inserted in table cells. For more information about using formulas in table cells, see the sections "Using formulas" on page 91 and "Using functions" on page 106.

About functions

A function is a named operation that you can include in a formula to perform a calculation in a table cell.

Numbers offers 168 functions that allow you to perform mathematical and financial operations, summarize cell values by performing a search, manipulate text strings, or get today's date and time. Each function has a name followed by arguments in parentheses. Arguments allow you to provide the values the function needs to perform the operation.

For example, the following formula contains the SUM function with a single argument (a range of cells) that adds the values in column A, from row 2 to row 10:

$$ = \text{SUM}(\mathrm{A}2:\mathrm{A}10) $$

The number and type of arguments vary from function to function. Possible arguments are as follows:

Constants, such as numbers, text strings, or the Boolean values TRUE or FALSE (for example, CONCATENATE("cat","s"))

Expression, containing a Boolean value (for example, OR(4<1; 5<6))

Address of a cell or range of cells in a table (for example, LOOKUP(5; C2:C6; D2:D6))
Another function (ex. MONDAY TO FRIDAY())

The following table defines the terms commonly used in function descriptions.

Term or symbol Meaning
italic Argument that you replace with an actual value or a reference to a cell containing a value.
[brackets] Enclose an optional argument. If you omit an optional argument between other arguments, be sure to include the semicolon before the missing argument. For example, to omit the second argument, arg2, from a list of three arguments, you could enter FUNCTION(arg1;;arg3).
... (ellipsis) The previous argument can be repeated as many times as needed.
integer Number without decimal places.
logical expression Expression that has a Boolean value TRUE or FALSE.
numeric expression Expression that produces a number.
string Contiguous sequence of characters.
text expression Expression that produces a string.
date-time Any Numbers date/time value. Even if you choose to display only the date or time in a cell, a Numbers Date/Time value can contain both the date and the time.

There are several categories of functions. For example, some functions perform calculations on date and time values, logical functions return a Boolean result (TRUE or FALSE), and other functions perform financial calculations. Here is an overview of function categories, describing each function individually and in alphabetical order.

Date and time functions

Date and time functions perform calculations on date expressions, time expressions, or numeric expressions.

Numbers includes these date and time functions.

Function Description
DATE (page 245) Combines numeric values corresponding to the year, month, and day into a single date.
DATEDIF (page 246) Determines the duration between two dates.
DAY (page 247) Extracts the day number from a date.
EDATE (page 250) Finds the date a certain number of months before or after a given date.
HOUR (page 256) Extracts the hour from a date (between 0 and 23).
MINUTE (page 271) Extracts the minutes from a date.
MONTH (page 273) Extracts the month number from a date.
NOW (page 274) Gets today's date and time from the computer's clock.
SECOND (page 293) Extracts the seconds from a date.
TIME (page 303) Converts an hour to a decimal fraction of a day expressed in 24 hours.
TIMEVALUE (page 304) Converts an hour in a string to a decimal fraction of a 24-hour day.
TODAY (page 304) Extracts today's date and formats the cell to display only the date (without the time)
WEEKDAY (page 311) Converts a date to a number representing the day of the week.
YEAR (page 311) Extracts the year from a date.

Financial functions

These functions apply to numbers and require numeric expressions as arguments. Unless otherwise indicated, they return numeric values.

Numbers provides these financial functions.

Function Description
ACCRINT (page 225) Calculates the total accrued interest on a security with periodic interest.
ACCRINTM (page 226) Calculates the total accrued interest on a security payable at maturity.
COUPDAYBS (page 241) Counts the number of days from the beginning of the settlement period of a security to its settlement date.
COUPDAYS (page 242) Counts the number of days in the coupon period during which a security is settled.
COUPDAYSNC (page 243) Counts the number of coupon days between the settlement date of a security and the end of the coupon period where settlement occurs.
COUPNUM (page 244) Counts the number of coupons payable on a security between the settlement date and the maturity date.
DB (page 247) Calculates the depreciation of an asset over a given period using the fixed declining balance method.
DDB (page 248) Calculates the depreciation of an asset based on a depreciation rate that defaults to the double declining balance rate.
DISC (page 249) Calculates the discount rate of a security.
FV (page 254) Calculates the future value of an investment based on a series of additional fixed periodic payments, interest rate, and number of periods.
IPMT (page 260) Calculates the interest portion of a loan or investment payment based on a fixed payment and fixed interest rate.
IRR (page 261) Calculates the internal rate of return for an investment with a series of periodic cash flows.
ISPMT (page 263) Calculates the interest due on a given payment period for an investment.
MIRR (page 271) Calculates the modified internal rate of return for a series of periodic cash flows.
NPER (page 274) Calculates the number of payment periods for a loan or payments for an investment with fixed payments and interest rate.
NPV (page 275) Calculates the net present value of an investment based on a series of cash flows and a fixed interest rate.
PMT (page 278) Calculates the fixed periodic payment based on a fixed interest rate, a given number of periods, present value, future value, and payment type.
PPMT (page 279) Calculates the principal portion of a loan payment or investment payment based on a fixed periodic payment and fixed interest rate.
PRICE (page 280) Calculates the current price of a security.
PRICEDISC (page 281) Calculates the price of a discount security.
PRICEMAT (page 281) Calculates the price of a security with interest paid at maturity.
PV (page 284) Calculates the present value of an investment based on a series of fixed periodic payments and interest rate.
RATE (page 287) Calculates the interest rate needed for a present value to reach a given amount over a specific period.
SL (page 294) Calculates the straight-line depreciation of an asset.
SYD (page 301) Calculates the depreciation of an asset over a given period using the American Sum-of-Years Digits method.
VDB (page 309) Calculates the depreciation of an asset over a duration.

Logical functions

Logical functions evaluate the logical truth of expressions, and return TRUE, FALSE, or a value affected by the function.

Numbers provides these logical functions.

Function Description
AND (page 228) Returns TRUE if all arguments are true, otherwise FALSE.
FALSE (page 252) Returns the FALSE value for compatibility with older spreadsheet applications.
IF (page 257) Returns TRUE or FALSE depending on whether the specific expression is satisfied or not.
NOT (page 273) Returns the inverse of the Boolean value of an expression.
OR (page 276) Returns TRUE if an argument is true.
TRUE (page 305) Returns the TRUE value for compatibility with older spreadsheet applications.

Information functions

Information functions return information about the contents of a cell or argument.

Numbers provides these information functions.

Function Description
ISBLANK (page 261) Returns TRUE if the specific cell is empty, and FALSE otherwise.
ISERROR (page 262) Returns TRUE if the formula in the specific cell (or the function argument) reports an error, FALSE otherwise.
ISEVEN (page 262) Returns TRUE if the value is even, and FALSE otherwise.
ISODD (page 263) Returns TRUE if the value is odd, and FALSE otherwise.

Reference functions

Reference functions allow you to search for data in tables and extract data from cells.

Numbers provides reference functions.

Function Description
ADDRESS (page 227) Constructs a cell address string by specifying the identifiers of sheets, columns, and rows.
AREAS (page 229) Counts the number of cell ranges in the argument.
CHOOSE (page 233) Uses an index value to extract a specific value from a series of values.
COLUMN (page 235) Returns the column number of a cell or the column number of the cell that contains the COLUMN function if no cell is specified.
COLUMNS (page 235) Counts the number of columns generated in a cell range.
HLOOKUP (page 255) Extracts a value from a range of rows using the values in the top row as a reference to determine the column, and the row number specified in the column.
HYPERLINK (page 257) Creates a link that opens a web page or an email window.
INDEX (page 258) Extracts the value in (or a reference to) the cell based on a given row and column in a cell range.
INDIRECT (page 259) Extracts the value of a given address or the reference to it.
LOOKUP (page 266) Extracts a value from a cell range based on a search match in a second range.
MATCH (page 267) Searches for the position of a search value in a range.
OFFSET (page 276) Extracts values from a given number of rows and columns from a base cell.
ROW (page 292) Returns the row number of a cell or, if no cell is specified, the row containing the ROW function.
ROWS (page 292) Counts the number of rows in a cell range.
VLOOKUP (page 310) Extracts a value from a range of columns using the values in the left column as a reference to determine the row, and the column number specified in the row.

Numeric Functions

Numeric functions allow you to calculate common mathematical values.

Numbers provides these numeric functions.

Function Description
ABS (page 225) Calculates the absolute value of a number.
CEILING (page 232) Rounds a number up to the nearest multiple of a given factor.
COMBIN (page 235) Finds the number of possible combinations of a specific number of grouped elements.
EVEN (page 250) Rounds a number up to the nearest even number.
EXP (page 251) Calculates e to the power of a number.
FACT (page 251) Calculates the factorial of a positive number.
FLOOR (page 253) Rounds a number down to the nearest multiple of a given factor.
GCD (page 255) Calculates the greatest common divisor of a group of numbers.
INT (page 259) Returns the largest integer less than or equal to a number.
LCM (page 264) Finds the least common multiple of a series of numbers.
LN (page 265) Calculates the natural logarithm of a number.
LOG (page 266) Calculates the logarithm of a number in a specific base.
LOG10 (page 266) Calculates the logarithm of a number in base 10.
MOD (page 271) Calculates the remainder of a division.
ROUND.TO.MULTIPLE (page 273) Rounds a number to the nearest multiple of a given factor.
ODD (page 275) Rounds a number to the nearest odd number.
PI (page 277) Returns an approximation of pi accurate to 15 decimal places.
POWER (page 279) Raises a number to a power, such as the ^ operator.
PRODUCT (page 283) Calculates the product of a series of numbers.
QUOTIENT (page 285) Calculates the integer quotient (without remainder) of two numbers.
RAND (page 285) Generates a random number greater than or equal to 0 and less than 1.
RANDBETWEEN (page 286) Generates a random integer within an inclusive interval.
ROMAN (page 289) Converts a number to Roman numerals.
ROUND (page 290) Rounds a number to a given number of decimal places.
ROUND.DOWN (page 290) Rounds a number down to the specified number of decimal places.
ROUND.UP (page 291) Rounds a number up to the specified number of decimal places.
SIGN (page 293) Returns 1 if the argument is positive, -1 if the argument is negative, and 0 if it equals zero.
SQRT (page 296) Calculates the square root of a number.
SUM (page 299) Calculates the sum of a series of numbers.
SUM.IF (page 300) Calculates the sum of a series of numbers meeting a specific condition.
SUMPRODUCT (page 301) Calculates the sum of the products of corresponding numbers in two or more ranges.
SUM.SQUARES (page 301) Calculates the sum of the squares of a series of numbers.
TRUNCATE (page 305) Truncates a decimal number to a given number of digits.

Trigonometric Functions

Trigonometric functions accept radians as arguments.

Numbers provides these trigonometric functions.

Function Description
ACOS (page 227) Calculates the inverse cosine (arccosine) between 0 and pi, expressed in radians.
ACOSH (page 227) Calculates the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number.
ASIN (page 229) Calculates the inverse sine (arcsine) in radians in the interval from -pi/2 to pi/2.
ASINH (page 229) Calculates the inverse hyperbolic sine of a number.
ATAN (page 230) Calculates the inverse tangent (arctangent) in radians in the interval from -pi/2 to pi/2.
ATAN2 (page 230) Finds the angle, relative to the positive X-axis, of a line passing through the origin from a specific point.
ATANH (page 230) Calculates the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number.
COS (page 238) Calculates the cosine of an angle expressed in radians.
COSH (page 238) Calculates the hyperbolic cosine of a number.
DEGREES (page 248) Converts radians to degrees.
RADIANS (page 285) Converts degrees to radians.
SIN (page 293) Calculates the sine of an angle expressed in radians.
SINH (page 294) Calculates the hyperbolic sine of a number.
TAN (page 302) Calculates the tangent of an angle expressed in radians.
TANH (page 303) Calculates the hyperbolic tangent of a number.

Statistical Functions

Statistical functions perform statistical calculations and require numeric expressions as arguments. The numeric expression can be a number, a cell reference, or a range. Unless otherwise noted, statistical functions return a numeric value.

Numbers provides these statistical functions.

Function Description
AVERAGE.DEVIATION (page 231) Calculates the average difference (deviation) of data points from their arithmetic mean.
AVERAGE (page 231) Calculates the arithmetic mean of a set of numbers.
AVERAGEA (page 231) Calculates the arithmetic mean of a set of values including numbers, text, and boolean values.
CONFIDENCE.INTERVAL (page 236) Calculates a value to create the statistical confidence interval of a sample with a given size from a population with a known standard deviation; assuming that the sample values are normally distributed.
CORRELATION.COEFFICIENT (page 237) Calculates the correlation between two data series based on a linear regression analysis.
COUNT (page 239) Counts the number of arguments and referenced cells containing numbers, numeric expressions, or dates.
COUNTA (page 239) Counts the number of non-empty cells in a range of values.
COUNTBLANK (page 240) Counts the number of empty cells in a range of values.
COUNTIF (page 241) Counts the number of cells meeting a condition in a range of values.
COVARIANCE (page 245) Calculates the covariance of two data series.
FORECAST (page 254) Calculates the y value (dependent) corresponding to an x value (independent) by a linear regression analysis of known value pairs.
INTERCEPT (page 259) Calculates the y-intercept of the regression line of a data series by a linear regression analysis.
LARGE (page 264) Extracts the nth largest value from a range of values.
MAX (page 268) Finds the largest number in a series.
MAXA (page 269) Finds the largest value in a series including numbers, text, and boolean values.
MEDIAN (page 269) Finds the median value of a series of numbers.
MIN (page 270) Finds the smallest number in a series.
MINA (page 270) Finds the smallest value in a series including numbers, text, and boolean values.
MODE (page 272) Finds the most recurrent value in a series of numbers.
PERCENTILE (page 277) Finds the value in a range corresponding to a particular percentile.
POISSON (page 278) Calculates the probability rate of events according to Poisson's law.
PROBABILITY (page 282) Calculates the probability of a range of values if you know the individual probability of each value.
RANK (page 286) Finds the rank of a number in a range of numbers.
SLOPE (page 295) Calculates the slope of the regression line of a data series by a linear regression analysis.
SMALL (page 295) Extracts the nth smallest value from a range of values.
STDEV (page 296) Calculates the standard deviation of a series of values based on the sample variance (unbiased).
STDEVA (page 297) Calculates the standard deviation of a series of values, including text and boolean values, based on the sample variance (unbiased).
STDEVP (page 297) Calculates the standard deviation of a series of values based on the population variance (true).
STDEVPA (page 298) Calculates the standard deviation of a series of values, including text and boolean values, based on the population variance (true).
VAR (page 306) Calculates the sample variance (unbiased) of a set of numbers.
VARA (page 307) Calculates the sample variance (unbiased) of a set of values, including numbers, text, and boolean values.
VAR.P (page 308) Calculates the population variance (true) of a set of numbers.
VARPA (page 308) Calculates the population variance (true) of a set of values, including numbers, text, and boolean values.

Text Functions

Text functions allow you to use character strings.

Numbers provides these text functions.

Function Description
CHAR (page 233) Returns the character corresponding to a numeric Unicode character code.
CLEAN (page 234) Removes from text most of the most common non-printable characters (Unicode character codes 0 to 31).
CODE (page 234) Returns the Unicode code number of the first character of a given string.
CONCATENATE (page 236) Concatenates strings.
EURO (page 249) Converts a number to a string in the form of a sum in Euros with a given number of decimal places.
EXACT (page 251) Returns TRUE if the argument strings are identical, including capitalization.
FIND (page 252) Finds the starting position of one string in another, matching characters and case but excluding wildcards.
TEXT (page 253) Rounds a number to a given number of decimal places and converts the result to a string.
LEFT (page 265) Extracts the specified number of characters from the left edge of the string.
LEN (page 265) Finds the number of characters in a string.
LOWER (page 267) Converts all uppercase characters to lowercase.
MID (page 270) Extracts characters from a string starting from a specific point.
PROPER (page 283) Capitalizes the first character of each word in a string and converts all other characters to lowercase.
REPLACE (page 288) Replaces part of a string with characters from another string.
REPEAT (page 288) Repeats text a given number of times.
RIGHT (page 289) Extracts the specified number of characters from the right edge of the string.
SEARCH (page 292) Finds the starting position of one string in another, disregarding case but accepting wildcards.
SUBSTITUTE (page 299) Replaces part of a string with new text.
T (page 302) Gets the text from a cell.
TRIM (page 305) Removes spaces in text to keep only single spaces between words.
UPPER (page 306) Converts text to uppercase.
VALUE (page 306) Converts a number in text form to a standard number.

Function Descriptions

In this section, functions are arranged in alphabetical order.

ABS

The ABS function calculates the absolute value of a number. The result is a positive number or zero.

ABS(number)

number: number, numeric expression, or reference to a cell containing a numeric expression.

Examples

If cell A1 contains 5, ABS(A1) returns 5.

ABS(8-5) returns 3.

ABS(5-8) returns 3.

ABS(0) returns 0.

If cell A1 is empty, ABS(A1) returns 0.

ACCRINT

The ACCRINT function calculates the total accrued interest of a security with periodic interest.

ACCRINT(issue; first_interest_date; settlement; rate; par; frequency; [day_count_basis])

issue: date of issue of the security.

first_interest_date: date of the first interest payment.

settlement: settlement date, usually the date of sale of the security.

rate: coupon rate of the security, expressed as a percentage from 0 to 1.

par: par value of the security.

frequency: number of coupon settlements per year

1 means annual payments.
2 means semi-annual payments (twice a year).
4 means quarterly payments (four times per year).

day_count_basis: optional; specifies the number of days per month and days per year used in calculations (sometimes called day count basis).

0 or no value corresponds to the 30/360 basis (30 days per month, 360 days per year).

1 corresponds to the actual day count basis (calendar days).
2 corresponds to the actual/360 day count basis (actual days per month but 360 days per year).
3 corresponds to the actual/365 day count basis (actual days per month but 365 days per year).
4 corresponds to the 30E/360 day count basis (European 30/360 system).

Examples

If cells A1:A7 contain 1/1/2000, 1/3/2000, 1/7/2000, 0.10, 1000, 2, 0:

ACCRINT(A1; A2; A3; A4; A5; A6; A7) returns 50.

ACCRINTM

The ACCRINTM function calculates the total accrued interest of a security payable at maturity.

ACCRINTM(issue; settlement; rate; par; [day_count_basis])

issue: date of issue of the security.

settlement: settlement date, usually the date of sale of the security.

rate: coupon rate of the security, expressed as a percentage from 0 to 1.

par: par value of the security.

day_count_basis: optional; specifies the number of days per month and days per year used in calculations (sometimes called day count basis).

0 or no value corresponds to the 30/360 basis (30 days per month, 360 days per year).

1 corresponds to the actual day count basis (calendar days).
2 corresponds to the actual/360 day count basis (actual days per month but 360 days per year).
3 corresponds to the actual/365 day count basis (actual days per month but 365 days per year).
4 corresponds to the 30E/360 day count basis (European 30/360 system).

Examples

If cells A1:A5 contain 1/1/2000, 1/10/2000, 0.10, 1000, 0:

ACCRINTM(A1; A2; A3; A4; A5) returns 75.

ACOS

The ACOS function calculates the inverse cosine (arccosine) of a number. Unlike the COS function which accepts an angle and returns its cosine, the ACOS function accepts a cosine value and returns the corresponding angle. The resulting angle is a value between 0 and pi radians.

ACOS(cosine)

cosine: cosine value between -1 and 1.

Notes

To express the resulting angle in degrees rather than radians, use the DEGREES function.

Examples

ACOS(SQRT(2)/2) returns 0.785398163397448, which is approximately pi/4.

ACOS(0.54030230586814) returns 1.

DEGREES(ACOS(0.5)) returns 60, which is the measure in degrees of an angle having a cosine value of 0.5.

ACOSH

The ACOSH function calculates the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number.

ACOSH(number)

number: number greater than or equal to 1.

Examples

ACOSH(10.0676619957778) returns 3.

ACOSH(COSH(5)) returns 5.

ADDRESS

The ADDRESS function constructs a string of cell addresses by specifying the identifiers of sheets, columns, and rows.

ADDRESS(row; column; [type]; [style]; [sheet])

row: row number where the address is located.

column: column number where the address is located.

type: optional; value indicating whether the row and column numbers are absolute or relative:

1 or no value means that the row and column numbers are absolute references.
2 treats the row number as an absolute reference and the column number as a relative reference.
3 treats the row number as a relative reference and the column number as an absolute reference.
4 treats the row and column numbers as relative references.

style: optional; address style:
For values TRUE, 1, or no value, the address is formatted using the A1 style, the letter representing the column and the number representing the row.

sheet: optional; name of the sheet if the table is on another sheet.

Examples

ADDRESS(3;5) creates the address E3.

ADDRESS(3;5;2) creates the address E$3.

ADDRESS(3;5;3) creates the address $E3.

The AND function returns TRUE if all arguments are true, and FALSE otherwise (logical conjunction).

expression: logical or numeric expression or reference to a cell containing such an expression.

Notes

If expression is numeric, a value equal to 0 is interpretable as FALSE and any value other than 0 is interpretable as TRUE.

Examples

AND(TRUE;TRUE) returns TRUE because both arguments are true.

AND(1;0;1;1) returns FALSE because one of the arguments is the digit 0, interpreted as FALSE.

AND(A5>50;A5<100) returns TRUE because cell A5 contains a number between 50 and 100.

ZONES

The ZONES function counts the number of intervals referenced by the function.

ZONES(intervals)

intervals: one or more cell ranges. To indicate multiple intervals, place the references in a second set of parentheses.

Examples

ZONES(A1:F8) returns 1.

ZONES(C2:C8 B6:E6) returns 1.

ZONES((A1:F8; A10:F18)) returns 2.

ZONES((A1:C1; A3:C3; A5:C5)) returns 3.

ASIN

The ASIN function returns the arccosine (inverse cosine) of a number. While the SIN function accepts an angle and returns the sine, the ASIN function accepts a sine and returns the corresponding angle. The result is expressed in radians, in the range of -pi/2 to pi/2 (from -90 to 90 degrees).

ASIN(sin)

sin: sine value comprised between -1 and 1.

Remarks

To express the resulting angle in degrees rather than radians, execute the DEGREES function.

Examples

ASIN(0.8411470984807897) returns 1, that is, the measure in radians of an angle (approximately 57.3 degrees) having a sine value of 0.841470985.

DEGREES(ASIN(0.5)) returns 30, that is, the value in degrees of an angle having a sine value of 0.5.

ASINH

The ASINH function calculates the inverse hyperbolic sine of a number.

ASINH(number)

number: any number.

Examples

ASINH(27.2899171971277) returns 4.

ASINH(SINH(1)) returns 1.

ATAN

The ATAN function calculates the inverse tangent (arctangent) of a number and returns the corresponding value in radians, in the range of -pi/2 to pi/2 (from -90 to 90 degrees).

ATAN(number)

number: tangent value for which you want to find the corresponding angle.

Remarks

To express the resulting angle in degrees rather than radians, execute the DEGREES function.

Examples

ATAN(1) returns the angle measure of 0.785398163 radians (45 degrees), whose tangent is equal to 1.

DEGREES(ATAN(1)) returns 45.

ATAN2

The ATAN2 function calculates the angle, relative to the positive X-axis, of a line passing through the origin of a specific point. The angle is a value between -pi and pi radians.

ATAN(x;y)

x: x-coordinate of the point through which the line passes.

y: y-coordinate of the point through which the line passes.

Remarks

To express the resulting angle in degrees rather than radians, execute the DEGREES function.

Examples

ATAN2(1; 1) returns 0.78539816 radians (45 degrees), that is, the angle of a line segment between the origin and the point (1;1).

DEGREES(ATAN2(5;5)) returns 45.

ATANH

The ATANH function calculates the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number.

ATANH(number)

number: any number comprised between -1 and 1.

Examples

ATANH(0.995054753686731) returns 3.

ATANH(TANH(2)) returns 2.

AVERAGE.DEVIATION

The AVERAGE.DEVIATION function calculates the average difference (deviation) of data points from their arithmetic mean.

AVERAGE.DEVIATION(data point; [data point;...])

data point: numbers, numeric expressions or references to cells containing numbers or numeric expressions.

Examples

The AVERAGE function calculates the arithmetic mean of a set of numbers.

AVERAGE(number; [number; ...])

number: numbers, numeric expressions or references to cells containing numbers or numeric expressions.

Remarks

To calculate the average, the AVERAGE function divides the sum of the numbers by the count of numbers.

Table cells containing text values or boolean values (TRUE or FALSE) are ignored. Text values provided as arguments generate an error. Referenced text is ignored without warning.

Examples

The AVERAGEA function calculates the arithmetic mean of a set of values including text and boolean values.

AVERAGEA(values; [value, . . .])

value: numeric or boolean values, or references to cells containing numeric, text or boolean values.

Remarks

Unlike the AVERAGE function which ignores cells that do not contain numbers, the AVERAGEA function assigns the value 0 to text values, the value 0 to the boolean value FALSE and 1 to the boolean value TRUE, in order to include these values in the calculation.

For a data set containing only numbers, the AVERAGEA function returns the same result as the AVERAGE function.

Examples

AVERAGEA(A1:A4) returns 2.5 if cells A1 to A4 contain 4, a, 6, b. The text values are counted as zero in the sum of 10 and included in the count of values (4). Compare with AVERAGE(A1:A4) which ignores the text values in the sum of 10, a count of 2 and an average of 5.

AVERAGEA(A1:A4) returns 4 if cells A1 to A4 contain 5, a, TRUE, 10. The text value counts zero and TRUE counts 1 for a sum of 16 and a count of values of 4.

AVERAGEA(A1:A4) returns 0.25 if cells A1 to A4 contain FALSE, FALSE, FALSE and TRUE. Each FALSE counts zero and TRUE counts 1 for a sum of 1 and a count of 4.

CEILING

The CEILING function rounds a number up to the smallest multiple greater than the given factor.

CEILING(number; factor)

number: number, numeric expression or reference to a cell containing a numeric expression.

factor: number to which you want to round the multiples. The factor must share the same sign as the number.

Remarks

To round to the smallest multiple less than the value, use the FLOOR function.

Other functions associated with rounding numbers: INT, ROUND, ROUNDUP, ROUNDDOWN, TRUNC.

Examples
CEILING(0.25;1) returns 1.
CEILING(1.25;1) returns 2.
CEILING(-1.25;-1) returns -2.
CEILING(5;2) returns 6.
CEILING(73;10) returns 80.
CEILING(7;2.5) returns 7.5.

CHAR

The CHAR function returns the character corresponding to a numeric Unicode character code.

CHAR(numeric code)

numeric code: number from 1 to 65,535 serving as the code to generate the corresponding character.

Remarks

Not all numbers are associated with a printable character.

To display the range of characters and their codes, you can use the character palette available in International preferences.

You can use the CODE function to find the numeric code of a specific character.

Examples

CHAR(98.6) returns "b", which is represented by the code 98.

CODE("b") returns 98.

CHOOSE

The CHOOSE function uses a specific index value to extract a particular value from a series of values.

CHOOSE(index;value;[value,...])

index: numeric expression.

value: values that can be text, a numeric expression or reference to a cell.

Examples

If cells A1:A7 contain Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, Sunday:

CHOOSE(4; A1; A2; A3; A4; A5; A6; A7) returns Thursday.

CHOOSE(3,"1st","second";7;"last") returns 7, the third value in the list.

CLEAN

The CLEAN function removes from text most of the most common non-printable characters (Unicode character codes from 0 to 31). It can be useful if you paste from another application containing question marks, spaces, squares and other undesirable or unexpected characters.

CLEAN(text)

text: text from which you want to remove characters that do not print.

Remarks

There are certain less common non-printable characters that cannot be removed using the CLEAN function (these are character codes 127, 129, 141, 143, 144 and 157). To remove them, you can use the SUBSTITUTE function to replace them with a code between 0 and 31 before executing the CLEAN function.

You can use the TRIM function to remove excess spaces from text.

Examples

Suppose you copy the text "a b c d e f" from another application, but "a b c ? d e f" appears when you paste it into cell A1. You can try using the CLEAN function to remove unwanted characters:

CLEAN(A1) returns "a b c d e f"

CODE

The CODE function returns the Unicode code number of the first character of a given string.

CODE(text)

text: text expression or reference to a cell containing a text expression.

Remarks

To display the code of a particular character, you can use the character palette available in International preferences.

You can use the CHAR function to perform the opposite operation of the CODE function: convert a numeric code to a text character.

Examples
CODE("A") returns 65, character code of "A".
CODE("abc") returns 97, character code of "a".
CHAR(97) returns "a".
CODE(A3) returns "102", character code of "f".
CODE("N") returns 1488.

COLUMN

The COLUMN function returns the column number of the specified cell or, if no cell is specified, the column number of the cell that contains the function.

COLUMN([cell])

cell: optional; reference to a cell. In the absence of an argument, COLUMN returns the column number of the cell that contains the formula.

Examples

COLUMN(B7) returns 2, absolute column number of column B.

COLUMN() returns the column number of the cell that contains the function.

COLUMNS

The COLUMNS function counts the number of columns in a cell range.

COLUMNS(cell range)

cell range: range of cells in a table.

Remarks

If you select an entire row for the cell range, Numbers returns the total number of cells in the row, which is modified when you resize the table.

Examples

COLUMNS(B3:D10) returns 3, number of columns in the range (columns B, C and D).

COLUMNS(5:5) returns the total number of columns in row 5.

COMBIN

The COMBIN function finds the number of different ways to combine a certain number of items into groups of a specific size, regardless of the internal order of the groups.

COMBIN(elements;size)

elements: total number of items that can be combined.
-size: number of items combined in each group.

Remarks

Combinations must be distinguished from permutations. The order of items in a group is ignored for combinations but is taken into account for permutations. For example, (1; 2; 3) and (3; 2; 1) constitute the same combination but two unique permutations.

Examples

COMBIN(3; 2) returns 3, the number of unique groups you can create if you start with three items and group them 2 at a time.

COMBIN(3.2; 2.3) returns 3. Decimal parts are not taken into account.

COMBIN(5;2) and COMBIN(5;3) return 10.

CONCATENATE

The CONCATENATE function joins (concatenates) at least two text strings.

CONCATENATE(string1; string2; [string3; ...])

string1: string that becomes the first segment of the result. To include a string in the argument, enclose it in quotation marks.

string2: string that becomes the second segment of the result.

string3: additional strings to append to the first two.

Remarks

The & operator allows you to concatenate strings.

Examples

If cell A1 contains Lorem and cell B1 contains Ipsum, CONCATENATE(B1;", ";A1) returns "Ipsum, Lorem".

CONCATENATE("a","b","c") returns "abc"

"a"&"b"&"c" returns "abc"

CONFIDENCE.INTERVAL

The CONFIDENCE.INTERVAL function calculates a value to create the statistical confidence interval of a sample with a given size from a population with a known standard deviation. It assumes that values are normally distributed in the sample.

CONFIDENCE.INTERVAL(alpha; standard-deviation; size)

alpha: probability that the true value of the population falls outside the interval. One minus alpha is therefore the confidence level for the true value of the population in the interval centered on the sample value. An alpha value of 0.05 corresponds to a confidence level of 0.95 (95%).

standard-deviation: standard deviation of the population.

size: size of the sample.

Examples

CONFIDENCE.INTERVAL(0.05; 1; 10) returns 0.62. If the mean of the sample values is 100, the confidence interval for the mean of the population to fall in the interval of 99.38 to 100.62 is 95%.

CONFIDENCE.INTERVAL(0.1; 1; 10) returns 0.52. If the mean of the sample values is 100, the confidence interval for the mean of the population to fall in the interval of 99.48 to 100.52 is 90%.

CONFIDENCE.INTERVAL(0.05;1;20) returns 0.44.

CONFIDENCE.INTERVAL(0.05;1;30) returns 0.36.

CONFIDENCE.INTERVAL(0.05;1;40) returns 0.31.

CORRELATION.COEFFICIENT

The CORRELATION.COEFFICIENT function calculates the correlation between two data series based on a linear regression analysis.

CORRELATION.COEFFICIENT(y-range; x-range)

y-range: range of cells containing the dependent variable (y).

x-range: range of cells containing the independent variable (x).

Examples

Consider the following table:

A B C D E F
1
2 2.1 3.4 1 2
3 3.3 3.7 2 4
4 4.5 4 3 6
5 5.5 4.4 4 8
6 6.4 5.1 5 10
7 7.2 5.4 6 12
8

CORRELATION.COEFFICIENT(D2:D7; E2:E7) returns 1.

CORRELATION.COEFFICIENT(B2:B7; A2:A7) returns 0.977265.

COS

The COS function calculates the cosine of an angle expressed in radians.

COS(radian-angle)

radian-angle: number representing an angle expressed in radians.

Remarks

To use angles in radians, convert degrees to radians using the RADIANS function. See the second example below.

To express radians as a multiple of pi, use the PI function. See the third and fourth examples below.

Examples

COS(1) returns 0.540302306, cosine of 1 radian (approximately 57.3 degrees).

COS(RADIANS(60)) returns 0.5, cosine of 60 degrees.

COS(PI()/3) returns 0.5, pi/3 radians (60 degrees).

COS(PI()) returns -1, cosine of pi radians (180 degrees).

COSH

The COSH function calculates the hyperbolic cosine of a number.

COSH(number)

number: any real number.

Examples

COSH(0) returns 1.

COSH(1) returns 1.543.

COSH(5) returns 74.21.

COSH(10) returns 11,013.233.

COUNT

The COUNT function counts the number of arguments and referenced cells containing numbers, numeric expressions or dates.

COUNT(value; [value; ...])

value: one or more numbers.

Remarks

To count any cell containing any type of value (that is, to count any non-empty cell), use the COUNTA function.

Examples

Consider the following table:

COUNT(A1:E1) returns 5.

COUNT(A2:E2) returns 0.

COUNT(A3:E3) returns 3.

COUNT(A4:E4) returns 0.

COUNT(A5:E5) returns 2.

COUNT(1; SUM(4; 5)) returns 2.

COUNTA

The COUNTA function counts the number of values in its arguments.

COUNTA(value; [value;...])

value: reference to cells or argument containing a value.

Remarks

To count only cells or arguments counting numbers or dates, use the COUNT function.

Examples

Let's take the following table:

A B C D E F
1 100 200 300 400 500
2 lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
3 100 200 300 sit amet
4 TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE
5 200 400
6

The NB.VIDE function counts the number of empty cells in a range.

NB.VIDE(range)

range: simple range of cells.

Examples

Let's take the following table:

A B C D E F
1 100 200 300 400 500
2 lorem ipsum dolor amet
3 100 300 amet
4 TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE
5
6

NB.VIDE(A1:E1) returns 0.

NB.VIDE(A2:E2) returns 1.

NB.VIDE(A3:E3) returns 2.

NB.VIDE(A4:E4) returns 1.

NB.VIDE(A5:E5) returns 5.

NB.SI

The NB.SI function counts the number of cells in a range that meet a specific condition.

range: range of cells to test.
condition: conditional test returning the logical value TRUE or FALSE.

Notes

For more information on comparison operators, refer to the section "Explanation of comparison operators" on page 105.

Examples

If cells A1:A8 contain 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8:

NB.SI(A1:A8; "<4") returns 3.

NB.SI(A1:A8; " >4" ) returns 4.

The COUPDAYBS function counts the number of days from the beginning of the settlement period of a security to its settlement date.

COUPDAYBS(settlement; maturity; frequency; [day count])

settlement: settlement date, typically the sale date of the security.

maturity: maturity date of the security (date when it expires).

frequency: number of coupon payments per year

1 means annual payments.

2 means semi-annual payments (twice per year).

4 means quarterly payments (four times per year).

day count: optional; indicates the number of days per month and the number of days per year used in calculations (sometimes called day count basis).

0 or no value corresponds to the 30/360 basis (30 days per month, 360 days per year).

1 corresponds to the actual day count basis (number of calendar days).

2 corresponds to the actual/360 day count basis (number of days for each month but 360 days per year).

3 corresponds to the actual/365 day count basis (number of days for each month but 365 days per year).

4 corresponds to the 30E/360 day count basis (European 30/360 system).

Examples

If cells A1:A4 contain 1/9/2000, 1/1/2001, 4, 1:

COUPDAYBS(A1; A2; A3; A4) returns 62 (number of days from July 1st, the beginning of the current coupon period, to September 1st, based on 31 days in July and August).

COUPDAYBS(A1; A2; A3; 0) returns 60 (Number of days in the same period as in the previous example but based on 30 days per month).

COUPDAYBS(DATE(2000;7;4); A2; 2; 0) returns 3 (number of days from July 1st to July 4th).

COUPONDAYSV(settlement; maturity; frequency; [day count])

The COUPONDAYSV function counts the number of days in the coupon period during which the settlement of a security takes place.

COUPONDAYSV(settlement; maturity; frequency; [day count])

settlement: settlement date, typically the sale date of the security.

maturity: maturity date of the security (date when it expires).

frequency: number of coupon payments per year

1 means annual payments.
2 means semi-annual payments (twice per year).
4 means quarterly payments (four times per year).
- day count: optional; indicates the number of days per month and the number of days per year used in calculations (sometimes called day count basis).
0 or no value corresponds to the 30/360 basis (30 days per month, 360 days per year).
1 corresponds to the actual day count basis (Number of calendar days).
2 corresponds to the actual/360 day count basis (number of days for each month but 360 days per year).
3 corresponds to the actual/365 day count basis (number of days for each month but 365 days per year).
4 corresponds to the 30E/360 day count basis (European 30/360 system).

Examples

If cells A1:A4 contain 1/9/2000, 1/1/2001, 4, 0:

COUPONDAYSV(A1; A2; A3; A4) returns 90 (cumulative number of days in July, August and September based on 30/360 days).

COUPONDAYSV(A1; A2; A3; 1) returns 92 (Cumulative number of days in July, August and September based on actual day count per month and year).

COUPONDAYSV(A1; A2; A3; 2) returns 90 (Cumulative number of days in July, August and September based on actual day count per month/360 days per year).

COUPONDAYSV(A1; A2; A3; 3) returns 91.25 (cumulative number of days in July, August and September based on actual day count per month/365 days per year).

COUPONDAYSV(A1; A2; A3; 4) returns 90 (Cumulative number of days in July, August and September based on 30 days per month/360 days per year).

COUPONDAYSNC

The COUPONDAYSNC function counts the number of days from the settlement date of a security to the end of the coupon period during which the settlement occurs.

COUPDAYBS(settlement; maturity; frequency; [day count])

settlement: settlement date, typically the sale date of the security.

maturity: maturity date of the security (date when it expires).

frequency: number of coupon payments per year

1 means annual payments.
2 means semi-annual payments (twice per year).
4 means quarterly payments (four times per year).

day count: optional; indicates the number of days per month and the number of days per year used in calculations (sometimes called day count basis).

0 or no value corresponds to the 30/360 basis (30 days per month, 360 days per year).

1 corresponds to the actual day count basis (number of calendar days).
2 corresponds to the actual/360 day count basis (number of days for each month but 360 days per year).
3 corresponds to the actual/365 day count basis (number of days for each month but 365 days per year).
4 corresponds to the 30E/360 day count basis (European 30/360 system).

Examples

If cells A1:A4 contain 1/9/2000, 1/1/2001, 4, 1:

COUPONDAYSNC(A1; A2; A3; A4) returns 30 (number of days between September 1st and the next coupon date, October 1st, based on 30 days in September).

COUPONDAYSNC(DATE(2000;8;1); A2; A3; A4) returns 61 (number of days between August 1st and the next coupon date, October 1st, based on 31 days in August and 30 days in September).

COUPONDAYSNC(DATE(2000;8;1); A2; A3; 0) returns 60 (number of days between August 1st and the next coupon date, October 1st, based on 30 days in August and 30 days in September).

COUPNUM

The COUPNUM function counts the number of coupons payable on a security between the settlement date and the maturity date.

settlement: settlement date, typically the sale date of the security.

maturity: maturity date of the security (date when it expires).

frequency: number of coupon payments per year

COUPNUM(settlement; maturity; frequency; [day count])
1 means annual payments.
2 means semi-annual payments (twice per year).
4 means quarterly payments (four times per year).
- day count: optional; indicates the number of days per month and the number of days per year used in calculations (sometimes called day count basis).
0 or no value corresponds to the 30/360 basis (30 days per month, 360 days per year).
1 corresponds to the actual day count basis (Number of calendar days).
2 corresponds to the actual/360 day count basis (number of days for each month but 360 days per year).
3 corresponds to the actual/365 day count basis (number of days for each month but 365 days per year).
4 corresponds to the 30E/360 day count basis (European 30/360 system).

Examples

If cells A1:A4 contain 1/2/2000, 1/1/2001, 4, 0:

COUPNUM(A1; A2; A3; A4) returns 4.

COUPNUM(DATE(2000;6;1);A2;A3;A4) returns 3.

COUPNUM(DATE(2000;9;1);A2;A3;A4) returns 2.

COUPNUM(DATE(2000;11;1);A2;A3;A4) returns 1.

COVARIANCE

The COVARIANCE function calculates the covariance of two data series.

COVARIANCE(range1; range2)

range1: reference to cells containing the first data set.

range2: reference to cells containing the second data set. The dimensions of range1 and range2 must be the same.

Notes

If the two data sets are identical, the covariance is the same as the population variance.

Examples

If range1 (C3:H3) contains 3.4; 3.7; 4; 4.4; 5.1; 5.4 and if range2 (C2:H2) contains 2.1; 3.3; 4.5; 5.5; 6.4; 7.2:

COVARIANCE(C3:H3;C2:H2) returns 1.234.

DATE

The DATE function combines separate year, month, and day values into a single date.

DATE(year; month; day)

year: year number.
month: month number.
day: day number.

Notes

Year values are not converted. If you specify 10, year 10 (not 1910 or 2010) is evaluated.

Examples

DATE(1959,2,14) returns the date February 14, 1959 which will be displayed according to the cell's format.

DATEDIF

The DATEDIF function finds the number of days, months, and years between two dates.

DATEDIF(start date; end date; method)

start date: start date of the period to calculate.

end date: end date of the period to calculate.

method: indicates whether the difference is expressed in years, months or days and specifies the calculation method for the years or months indicated:

D counts the days between the dates.

M counts the months between the dates.

Y counts the years between the dates.

« MD » counts the days between the start day and the end day of the month, ignoring the months and years. If the start date is later than the end date, the count begins at the end date as if it belonged to the previous month. The function checks if the end date's year is a leap year.

« YM » counts the number of complete months between the start date and the end date, without considering the year. If the start month/day is earlier than the end month/day, the dates are treated as if they belonged to the same year. If the start month/day is later than the end month/day, the dates are treated as if they belonged to consecutive years.

« YD » counts the number of days between the start month/day and the end month/day, ignoring the years.

Examples

If cell A1 contains "6/4/88" and A2 contains "30/10/06":

DATEDIF(A1;A2;"D") returns "6,781", which is the number of days between April 6, 1988 and October 30, 2006.

DATEDIF(A1;A2;"Y") returns 222, which is the number of complete months between April 6, 1988 and October 30, 2006.

DATEDIF(A1;A2;"Y") returns 18, which is the number of complete years between April 6, 1988 and October 30, 2006.

DATEDIF(A1;A2;"MD") returns 24, the number of days between the sixth day of a month and the thirtieth day of the same month.

DATEDIF(A1;A2,"YM") returns 6, which is the number of months between April and October without considering the year.

DATEDIF(A1;A2,"YM") returns 207, which is the number of days between April 6 and October 30 without considering the year.

DATEDIF(A1;MAINTENANT();"Y") & "years," & DATEDIF(A1;MAINTENANT();"YM") & "months and" & DATEDIF(A1;MAINTENANT();"MD") & " days" gives the age of a person born on April 6, 1988.

DAY

The DAY function extracts the day number from a date.

DAY(date-time)

date-time: any valid date accepted by Numbers.

Examples

DAY("6/4/88 11:59:22") returns 6.

DB

The DB function calculates the depreciation of an asset over a given period using the fixed declining method.

DB(cost; recovery; life; number of periods; [months of first year])

cost: initial cost of the asset.

recovery: recovery value of the asset.

life: number of depreciation periods of the asset.

period: period for calculating depreciation.

months of first year: optional; number of months of the first year. If no explicit value is provided, the default value is 12.

Examples

If cells in the range A2:E2 contain respectively 1000, 100, 4, 1, and 12:

DB(A2; B2; C2; D2; E2) returns 438.

DB(A2; B2; C2; 2; E2) returns 246.16.

The AMORLDEG function calculates the depreciation of an asset according to a depreciation rate. If you do not specify a rate, depreciation is based on the double declining rate method.

AMORLDEG(cost; recovery; life; number of periods; [rate])

cost: initial cost of the asset.
- recovery: recovery value of the asset.
- life: number of depreciation periods of the asset.
- period: period for calculating depreciation. Must be expressed in the same unit as life.
- rate: optional; number determining the depreciation rate. The higher the number, the faster the depreciation. If you do not specify a rate, depreciation is based on the double declining rate method.

Examples
AMORLDEG(1000; 100; 4; 1) returns 500.
AMORLDEG(1000; 100; 4; 2) returns 250.
AMORLDEG(1000; 100; 4; 3) returns 125.
AMORLDEG(1000; 100; 4; 4) returns 25.
AMORLDEG(1000; 100; 4; 1; 1) returns 250.
AMORLDEG(1000; 100; 4; 1; 3) returns 750.
AMORLDEG(1000; 100; 4; 2; 3) returns 150.
AMORLDEG(1000; 100; 4; 3; 3) returns 0.

DEGREES

The DEGREES function converts radians to degrees.

DEGREES(radians)

radians: number representing an angle expressed in radians.

Examples

DEGREES(PI()) returns 180 (pi radians = 180 degrees).

DEGREES(1) returns 57.2957795130823, which corresponds approximately to the number of degrees per radian.

DISCOUNT RATE

The DISCOUNT RATE function calculates the discount rate of a security.

DISCOUNT RATE(settlement; maturity; price; value; [number of days])

settlement: settlement date, typically the sale date of the security.

maturity: maturity date of the security (date when it expires).

price: cost of the security for a par value of 100 Euros.

value: redemption price for a par value of 100 Euros.

day count: optional; indicates the number of days per month and the number of days per year used in calculations (sometimes called day count basis).

0 or no value corresponds to the 30/360 basis (30 days per month, 360 days per year).

1 corresponds to the actual day count basis (Number of calendar days).
2 corresponds to the actual/360 day count basis (number of days for each month but 360 days per year).
3 corresponds to the actual/365 day count basis (number of days for each month but 365 days per year).
4 corresponds to the 30E/360 day count basis (European 30/360 system).

Examples

If cells A1:E1 contain 1/1/2000, 1/1/2001, 90, 100, 0:

DISCOUNT RATE(A1; B1; C1; D1; E1) returns 10%.

DISCOUNT RATE(A1; B1; 80; D1; E1) returns 20% .

DISCOUNT RATE(A1; B1; C1; 110; E1) returns 18% .

EURO

The EURO function converts a number to a string indicating a sum in Euros with a given number of decimal places.

EURO(number; [decimals])

number: number to convert. It can be a number, a numeric expression, or a reference to a cell containing a numeric expression.

decimals: optional; positive number representing the number of desired decimal places after the decimal point. If no explicit value is provided, the default value is 2. A negative number indicates the number of decimal positions to the left of the decimal separator to which rounding should be applied.

Notes

The EURO function uses standard arithmetic rounding; if the most significant decimal to be removed is greater than or equal to 5, the result is rounded up.

Examples
EURO(2323.124) returns 2,323.12.
EURO(2323.125) returns 2,323.13.
EURO(99.554; 0) returns 100.
EURO(12; 3) returns 12,000.
EURO(-12; 3) returns (12,000), with parentheses indicating a negative value.
EURO(123; -1) returns 120.

EDATE

The EDATE function searches for another date a certain number of months before or after a specific date.

EDATE(date; month-offset)

date: start date of the period to calculate.

month-offset: number of months before or after date. The month-offset is negative for a date earlier than date.

Examples

EDATE("15/1/2000"; 1) returns "15/2/2000", that is, the date one month later.

EDATE("15/1/2000";-24) returns 15/1/1998, that is the date 24 months earlier.

PAIR

The PAIR function rounds a number up to the next even number.

PAIR(number)

number: number to round. It can be a number, a numeric expression or a reference to a cell containing a numeric expression.

Notes

To round to an odd number, use the IMPAIR function.

Examples
PAIR(1) returns 2.
PAIR(2) returns 2.
PAIR(2.5) returns 4.
PAIR(-2.5) returns -4.
PAIR(0) returns 0.

EXACT

The EXACT function returns TRUE if the argument strings are identical in terms of case and spelling.

EXACT(string1; string2)

string1: text expression. To include the string as an argument, place it in quotation marks.

string2: second text expression.

Examples

EXACT("toledo"; "toledo") returns TRUE.

EXACT("Toledo"; "toledo") returns FALSE.

EXACT(toledo);"tol"&"edo") returns TRUE.

EXP

The EXP function calculates e to the power of a number.

EXP(number)

number: power to which you want to raise e. It can be a number, a numeric expression or a reference to a cell containing a numeric expression.

Examples

EXP(1) returns 2.71828182845905, an approximation of e.

EXP(LN(5)) returns 5. EXP is the inverse function of LN.

FACT

The FACT function calculates the factorial of a non-negative number.

FACT(number)

number: non-negative number.

Notes

If number contains a decimal part, it is truncated before the calculation.

Examples

FACT(5) returns 120 or 1^2^3^4^5

FACT(0) returns 1.

FACT(4.5) returns 24. The decimal part is removed and 4! is calculated.

FACT(-1) returns an error because the number must not be negative.

FALSE

The FALSE function returns the boolean value FALSE. It is included to allow you to use spreadsheets created with older spreadsheet applications. To indicate the boolean value FALSE, simply type the word false (without quotation marks) in a cell or a function argument.

FALSE()

No argument (parentheses are required).

Notes

Instead of using the FALSE() function, you can type the word FALSE directly in a cell or formula.

Examples

FALSE() returns the boolean value FALSE.

AND(1;FALSE()) returns the boolean value FALSE.

RECHERCHER

The RECHERCHER function searches for the starting position of a string within another. Case is distinguished and spaces are counted in the search. Wildcards are not allowed.

RECHERCHER(target; string; [start])

target: text to find. If you include the text as an argument, place it in quotation marks.

string: text to search. If you include the text as an argument, place it in quotation marks.

start: optional; number indicating the position of the character in the target string from which you want to start the search. If the argument is omitted, the search starts with the first character of target.

Notes

To use wildcards in your search, use the RRECHERCHER function.

Examples

RECHERCHER("u","sur la terre") returns 2 ("u" is the second character of the string "sur la terre").

RECHERCHER("e","sur la terre";8) returns 11 (the second "e" in terre is the first "e" found starting from character 8).

CTXT

The CXT function rounds a number to the specified number of decimal places and then converts the result to text.

CTXT(number; [decimals]; [separators])

number: numeric value.

decimals: optional; number of decimal places desired in the result.

separators: optional boolean value; indicates if thousands separators are used in the integer part of the result number.

FALSE or 0 does not display thousands separators in the resulting number.

TRUE, 1 or no value includes thousands separators in the resulting number.

Examples

CTX(6789.123; 2) returns "6,789.12"

CTX(6789.123;1;1) returns "6,789.1"

CTX(6789.123;-2) returns "6,800"

CTX(12.4;0) returns "12"

CTX(12.5;0) returns "13"

CTXT(4; -1) returns "0"

CTX(5; -1) returns "10"

PLANCHER

The PLANCHER function rounds a number down to the nearest lower multiple of the given factor.

PLANCHER(number; factor)

number: number, numeric expression or reference to a cell containing a numeric expression.

factor: number to which you want to round the multiples. factor must have the same sign as number.

Notes

To round a number up to the next multiple (instead of down to the previous multiple), use the PLAFOND function.

Other functions related to rounding numbers: INT, ROUND, ROUNDUP, ROUNDDOWN, TRUNC.

Examples
PLANCHER(0.25;1) returns 0.
PLANCHER(1.25;1) returns 1.
PLANCHER(5;2) returns 4.
PLANCHER(73;10) returns 70.
PLANCHER(-0.25;-1) returns 0.
PLANCHER(9;2.5) returns 7.5.

PREVISION

The PREVISION function uses linear regression analysis of pairs of continuous values to find the value y (dependent) corresponding to a value x (independent).

PREVISION(x;values-y;values-x)

x: x value for which you want to find a corresponding y value.

values y: range of cells containing the known y values. Must be the same size as values x.

values x: range of cells containing the known x values.

Notes

The PENTE and ORDONNEE.OrigINE functions can be used to determine the equation used for calculating forecast values.

Examples

Consider the following table:

PREVISION(9; A3:F3; A2:F2) returns 19.

VALFUT

The VALFUT function calculates the future value of an investment based on a series of fixed periodic payments, interest rate and number of periods. VALFUT means Calculated Value.

VALFUT(rate; number of periods; [payment]; [present value]; [when])

rate: interest rate per period.

number of periods: number of periods.

payment: optional; additional payment to make per period and expressed as a negative number. If this argument is omitted, specify present value.

present value: optional; present value of the investment, indicated as a negative number.

when: optional; indicates whether payments are due at the beginning or end of each period: 0 (or no value) means payments occur at the end of each period. 1 means payments occur at the beginning of each period.

Examples

VALFUT(5%;10;-300;-3000.0) calculates the value of an investment of 3,000 Euros over 10 years with an adjusted payment of 300 Euros each end of year, at an annual rate of 5%. In this example, the future value is "8,660.05" (for a numeric format with precision to two decimal places).

PGCD

The PGCD function finds the greatest common divisor of the specified numbers. Sometimes called the greatest common factor, PGCD is the largest integer that divides each of the numbers without remainder.

PGCD(number; [number; ...])

number: positive numbers, numeric expressions or references to cells containing positive numbers or numeric expressions.

Notes

All arguments must be greater than or equal to zero.

Examples

PGCD(8; 10) returns 2.

PGCD(99; 102; 105) returns 3.

PGCD(34; 51) returns 17.

RECHERCHEH

The RECHERCHEH function extracts a value from a range of rows using the values of the top row to determine a column, then the row number containing the value. You may want to search for the closest match or an exact match.

CONSH(search value, cell range, rank, [exact match])

search value: value that you want to search for in the top row in order to select a column. Can be numeric, text or logical.

cell range: range of cells containing the data. The top row contains the data to search; the remaining rows contain values to retrieve.

row: numeric expression that indicates the row containing the value to extract. The top row of the cell range is row 1.

exact match: optional boolean value; determine if an exact match is required:

TRUE, 1 or no value selects the column whose top row value is the highest value less than the search value if no exact match is found.

FALSE or 0 returns an error if no exact match exists.

Examples

Consider the following table:

A B C D E F
1 0 20 40 60 80
2 A E I O U
3 lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
4 1 2 3 4 5
5

RECHERCHEH(20;A1:E4;2) returns "E"

RECHERCHEH(39;A1:E4;2) returns "E"

RECHERCHEH("M";A2:E4;2) returns "dolor"

RECHERCHEH("C";A2:E3;2) returns "lorem"

RECHERCHEH("blandit";A3:E4;2) returns "5".

RECHERCHEH("C";A2:E4;3;TRUE) returns "1"

RECHERCHEH("C";A2:E4;3;FALSE) indicates that the value is not found (because there is no exact match).

HEURE

The HEURE function extracts the hour from a date/time value. The hour is represented by a number between 0 and 23 in a 24-hour system.

HEURE(date-time)

date-time: any valid date accepted by Numbers.

Examples

HEURE(MAINTENANT()) returns the current hour of the day.

HEURE("6/4/88 11:59:22") returns 11.

LIEN_HYPERTEXTE

The LIEN_HYPERTEXTE function creates a link that opens a web page or a window for composing an email.

LIEN_HYPERTEXTE(url; [link-text])

url: standard URL address.

link-text: optional; text displayed as a link in the cell. If you omit this argument, the URL is used as the link text.

Examples

LIEN_HYPERTEXTE("http://www.apple.com/fr","Apple") creates a link based on the text Apple that opens the default web browser to Apple's home page.

LIEN_HYPERTEXTE("mailto:jeandurand@example.com?subject=Demande de devis"; "Obtenir un devis") creates a link with the text "Obtenir un devis" that displays in the default email application and addresses a new message to jeandurand@example.com with the subject "Demande de devis".

IF

The IF function returns the value TRUE or FALSE depending on whether the specific expression is true or false.

IF(expression; [if_true]; [if_false])

expression: logical or numeric expression or reference to a cell containing such an expression.

if_true: optional; value returned if the condition is true. If this argument is omitted (no semicolon), returns 1. If the argument is empty (semicolon with no value), returns TRUE.

if_false: optional; value returned if the condition is false. If this argument is omitted (no semicolon), the if_true expression is returned. If the argument is empty (semicolon with no value), returns FALSE.

Notes

If condition is a numeric expression, a value equal to 0 is interpreted as false and any value different from 0 is interpreted as true.

Examples

IF(A5>=0; "Non-negative","Negative") returns the text "Non-negative" if cell A5 contains a number greater than or equal to zero. Otherwise, the text "Negative" is returned.

IF(AND(A8;A9);1;0) works like the AND boolean operation. The function returns the numeric value 1 because cells A8 and A9 contain 1 but returns the value 0 if either cell contains 0.

INDEX

The INDEX function extracts the value found in the cell at the intersection of a given row and column within a range of cells. You indicate the location by specifying the number of rows down and the number of columns to the right from the upper left corner of the range.

INDEX(cell_range;[row];[column];[area])

cell_range: range or list of ranges containing the values to return. If multiple ranges are specified (in a list in parentheses), the area argument indicates the range from which you want to extract a result.

row: optional; row number of the cell, from the topmost cell downward, in the cell range numbered 1. If this argument is omitted, include column.

column: optional; column number of the cell, counting from the leftmost cell to the right, in the cell range numbered 1. If this argument is omitted, include row.

area: optional; number of the area of cell ranges if there are multiple.

Examples

Consider the following table:

INDEX(B2:E5;1;5) returns an error because the range contains only four columns.

INDIRECT

The INDIRECT function returns a reference to an address indicated as a string.

INDIRECT(address, [style])

address: string representing a cell address or reference to a cell that contains a cell address.

style: Optional; style of the address used in address.

TRUE, 1 or absent indicates A1 address style.

FALSE or 0 returns an error indicating that the R1C1 style is not supported.

Examples

If cell A1 contains 99 and cell A20 contains A1:

INDIRECT(A20) returns 99, that is, the content of cell A1.

INT

The INT function returns the largest integer less than or equal to the number.

INT(number)

number: number to convert to an integer value. It can be a number, a numeric expression or a reference to a cell containing a numeric expression.

Notes

Other functions related to rounding numbers: CEILING, ROUND, ROUNDUP, ROUNDDOWN, TRUNC.

Examples

INT(1.49) returns 1.

INT(1.50) returns 1.

INT(1.23456) returns 1.

INT(1111.222) returns 1111.

INT(-2.2) returns -3.

INT(-2.8) returns -3.

ORDONNEE.OrigINE

The ORDONNEE.OrigINE function calculates the y-intercept of the regression line of a data series through linear regression analysis.

ORDONNEE.ORIGINE(range-y; range-x)

range-y: list of values of the dependent variable y. Must have the same dimensions as range-x.

range-x: range of cells containing the values for the independent variable x. Must have the same dimensions as range-y.

Notes

To find the slope of the regression line, use the PENTE function.

Examples

Consider the following table:

A B C D E F
1 1 2 3 4 5 6
2 3 5 7 9 11 13
3
4 2.1 3.3 4.5 5.5 6.4 7.2
5 3.4 3.7 4 4.4 5.1 5.4
6
7

ORDONNEE.ORIGINE(A2:F2;A1:F1) returns 1.

PENTE(A2:F2;A1:F1) returns 2.

ORDONNEE.ORIGINE(A5:F5;A4:F4) returns 2.392.

INTPER

The INTPER function calculates the interest portion of a loan repayment or payment for an investment for a given period based on periodic payment and a fixed interest rate.

INTPER(rate; period; number of periods; present value; [future value]; [due date])

rate : interest rate per period.

period: period for calculating interest.

number of periods : number of periods during the life of the investment.

present value: present value of the loan or investment.

future value : optional ; target future value if it is an investment. If no explicit value is given, the default value is 0.

due date : optional ; indicates whether payments are made at the beginning or end of the period :

0 (or no value) means that payments are made at the end of each period.

1 means that payments are made at the beginning of each period.

Remarks

Verify that the interest rate is expressed per period. For example, if the interest rate is 10% per year and the payment frequency is monthly, the rate used in the function should be 0.1/12 (approximately 0.00833 per month).

Examples

To cover the interest portion of the first payment for a loan of 1,000 Euros at 12% per year with payments at the end of the month :

INTPER(0.12/12; 1; 12; 1000) returns - 10.

IRR

The IRR function calculates the internal rate of return of an investment based on a series of irregular movements and not on fixed interest income. The rate returned is the rate giving the net present value of a set of zero movements.

IRR(range of movements; [estimate])

range of movements : range of cells containing the value of movements. Positive values represent income. Negative values represent expenses. All values represent equal time intervals.

estimate : optional ; initial estimate of the return rate. If no explicit value is given, the default value is 10% . Adjust the estimate if the IRR function does not return a result.

Examples

If cells A1:F1 contain -1000, 50, 50, 50, 50, 1050 :

IRR(A1:F1) returns 5% , return rate if you invest 1000 Euros and receive 50 Euros per year for four years, with a final payment of 1050 Euros in the fifth year.

To find the return rate if you buy a machine for 20,000 Euros, use it for five years generating 8,000 Euros per year and sell it for 2,000 Euros at the end of the fifth year, enter - 20,000; 8,000, 8,000, 8,000, 8,000 and 10,000 in cells A1:A6 and use the formula IRR(A1:A6). The value 30.06% is returned.

ISBLANK

The ISBLANK function returns TRUE if the specified cell is empty, and FALSE otherwise.

ISBLANK(cell)

cell: reference to a cell in the table.

Examples

Consider the following table :

ISBLANK(A1) returns TRUE.

ISBLANK(B2) returns FALSE.

ISERROR

The ISERROR function returns TRUE if the formula in the specified cell (or function argument) reports an error, FALSE otherwise.

ISERROR(cell)

cell: reference to a cell in a table containing a formula.

Examples

If cell A1 contains = QUOTIENT(3;0):

ISERROR(A1) returns TRUE. (division by 0 is impossible.)

ISEVEN

The ISEVEN function returns TRUE if the value is even (no remainder when the value is divided by 2) and FALSE, otherwise.

ISEVEN(number)

number : number, numeric expression or reference to a cell containing a numeric expression.

Remarks

The decimal part of the number is ignored.

Dates are neither even nor odd ; if value is a date, an error is returned.

Examples

ISEVEN(2) returns TRUE.

ISEVEN(2.75) returns TRUE.

ISEVEN(3) returns FALSE.

ISODD

The ISODD function returns TRUE if the value is odd (dividing this value by 2 gives a remainder) and FALSE, otherwise.

ISODD(number)

number : number, numeric expression or reference to a cell containing a numeric expression.

Remarks

The decimal part of the number is ignored.

Dates are neither even nor odd ; if value is a date, an error is returned.

Exercises

ISODD(3) returns TRUE.

ISODD(3.75) returns TRUE.

ISODD(2) returns FALSE.

ISPMT

The ISPMT function calculates the interest due on a given payment period for an investment.

ISPMT(rate; period; number of periods; present value)

rate: interest rate per period.

period: period for calculating interest.

number of periods : number of periods during the life of the investment.

present value: present value of the loan or investment.

Remarks

This function, which duplicates the INTPER function, allows the use of spreadsheets from older spreadsheet applications.

Make sure the interest rate is expressed as a rate per period. For example, if the interest rate is 10% per year and the payment frequency is monthly, the rate used in the function should be 0.1/12 (approximately 0.00833 per month).

Examples

To cover the interest portion of the first payment for a loan of 1,000 Euros at 12% per year with payments at the end of the month :

INTPER(0.12/12; 1; 12; 1000) returns - 10.

LARGE. VALUE

The LARGE. VALUE function retrieves the nth largest value from a range.

The largest value is ranked number 1.

LARGE.VALUE(range; n)

range : range of cells containing the values.

n: number that represents the ranking of the value to retrieve (1 corresponds to the largest value, 2 to the next, and so on).

Remarks

If n is omitted, is less than or equal to or greater than the number of values in the range, an error is returned.

Examples

Consider the following table :

LARGE. VALUE(A2:E2; 1) returns 50, the highest value in the range.

LARGE. VALUE(A2:E2; 2) returns 40, the second highest value in the range.

LARGE. VALUE(A2:E2; 5) returns 10, the fifth highest value in the range.

LARGE. VALUE(A2:E2) generates an error ; specify n.

LARGE.VALUE(A2:E2;0) generates an error ; n must be greater than 0.

LARGE.VALUE(A2:E2;6) generates an error ; it is not possible to find the sixth value from five values.

LCM

The LCM function finds the least common multiple of the specified numbers. The least common multiple is the smallest integer that is a multiple of the specified numbers.

LCM(number; [number; ...])

number: zero or one or more positive numbers, numeric expressions or references to cells containing numbers or positive numeric expressions. The decimal part of numbers is ignored. Negative numbers are not allowed.

Examples

LCM(2;3) returns 6.

LCM(34; 68) returns 68.

LCM(30; 40; 60) returns 120.

LCM(30.25; 40.333; 60.5) returns 120 (decimal parts are ignored).

LCM(2; -3) reports an error (negative numbers are not allowed).

LEFT

The LEFT function extracts the specified number of characters from the left end of the string.

LEFT( text; [length])

text: text expression.

length: optional; number of characters to retrieve. If this argument is omitted, the leftmost character is retrieved.

Examples

LEFT("one two three", 2) returns « one »

LEFT("abc") returns « a »

LEN

The LEN function counts the number of characters in a string. The operation includes all spaces, numbers and characters.

LEN(text)

text: text expression.

Examples

LEN("12345") returns 5.

LEN(" abc def ") returns 15, sum of the six characters, the three leading spaces, the three trailing spaces and the three separation spaces.

LN

The LN function calculates the natural logarithm of a number, the power to which e must be raised to produce the number.

LN(number)

number : positive number, numeric expression or reference to a cell containing a positive numeric expression.

Examples

LN(2.71828) returns approximately 1, the power to which e must be raised to produce 2.71828.

LN(EXP(1)) returns 1. LN is the inverse function of EXP.

LOG

The LOG function calculates the logarithm of a number in a base.

LOG(number; [base])

number : positive number.

base : optional ; positive number different from 1. If this argument is absent, the default value is 10.

Examples

LOG(8;2) returns 3.

LOG(100; 10) and LOG(100) return 2.

The LOG10 function calculates the logarithm of a number in base 10.

LOG10(number)

number : positive number.

Remarks

To find the logarithm in a base other than base 10, use the LOG function.

Examples

LOG10(1) returns 0.

LOG10(10) returns 1.

LOG10(100) returns 2.

LOG10(1000) returns 3.

LOOKUP

The LOOKUP function searches for an occurrence matching a search value in a range, then extracts the value in the cell with the same relative position in a second range.

LOOKUP(search value; search range; result range)

search value : text or numeric expression to search for in the search range.

search range : range of cells in which you want to search for the value.

result range: optional; if this argument is not specified, the result is returned from the last row or last column of the search range and the larger dimension is adopted.

Examples

Consider the following table :

LOOKUP("C";A1:F1;A2:F2) returns 30.

LOOKUP(40;A2:F2;A1:F1) returns D.

LOOKUP("B";A1:C1;D2:F2) returns 50.

LOWER

The LOWER function converts uppercase to lowercase.

LOWER(text)

text: text expression or reference to a cell containing a text expression.

Examples

LOWER("UPPERCASE") returns « lowercase »

LOWER("Lowercase") returns « lowercase »

LOWER("MiXeD") returns « mixed »

MATCH

The MATCH function finds the position of a value in a range of rows or columns. Cell numbering starts at 1 for the top cell or left cell in the vertical and horizontal ranges, respectively. Searches are performed from top to bottom and left to right.

MATCH(search value; cell range; [method])

search value : text or numeric expression to search for.

cell range : range of cells in a row or column.

method : optional ; indicates the mode of matching the value :

1 (or no value) corresponds to the cell containing the highest value less than or equal to the search value.

0 corresponds to the first cell whose value exactly matches the search value.

-1 corresponds to the cell containing the lowest value greater than or equal to the search value.

Remarks

When searching for text, case is not differentiated.

MATCH only works on a range belonging to a row or column ; you cannot use it to search in a two-dimensional table.

Examples

Consider the following table :

A B C D E F
1 10 lorem 40
2 20 ipsum 20
3 30 lorex 30
4 40 borem 50
5 50 facit 10
6

MATCH(40; A1:A5) returns 4.

MATCH(40; E1:E5) returns 1.

MATCH(35; E1:E5; 1) returns 3 (30 is the largest value less than or equal to 35).

MATCH(35;E1:E5;-1) returns 1 (40 is the smallest value greater than or equal to 35).

MATCH(35; E1:E5; 0) reports an error (no exact match can be found).

MAX

The MAX function finds the largest number in a series.

MAX(number; [[number; ...])

number : series of numbers, numeric expressions or references to cells containing numbers or numeric expressions.

Remarks

Cells containing non-numeric values are ignored.

Examples

MAX(5; 5; 5; 5; 6) returns 6.

The MAXA function finds the largest number in a series of values. In addition to numeric values, text values and the logical value FALSE count as 0, and the logical value TRUE counts as 1.

MAXA(value; [value, ...])

value : series of numbers or numeric expressions or references to cells containing numeric or text expressions or boolean values.

Remarks

Text entered directly in arguments returns an error.

Examples

MAXA(A1:C1), when cells A1:C1 contain -1, -10, hello, returns 0.

MEDIAN

The MEDIAN function finds the median value in a series of numbers. The median value is the "central" value in the sense that half of the numbers in the series are below the median value and the other half are above.

MEDIAN(number; [number; ...])

number : series of numbers, numeric expressions or references to cells containing numbers or numeric expressions.

Remarks

If the series has an even number of values, the MEDIAN function returns the average of the two middle values.

Examples

MEDIAN(1; 2; 3; 4; 5) returns 3.

MEDIAN(1; 2; 3; 4; 5; 6) returns 3.5.

MEDIAN(5; 5; 5; 5; 6) returns 5.

MID

The MID function extracts the specified number of characters from a string starting at the specified position.

MID(text; start; length)

text: text expression.

start : position of the first character to extract. The number 1 corresponds to the first character in the string.

length: number of characters to extract.

Examples

MID("lorem ipsum dolor sit amet",7,5) returns « ipsum »

MID("1234567890",4,3) returns « 456 »

MID("shorten", 5, 20) returns « orten »

MIN

The MIN function finds the smallest number in the list of arguments.

MIN(number; [[number; ...])

number : series of numbers, numeric expressions or references to cells containing numbers or numeric expressions.

Remarks

Cells that do not contain numbers are ignored.

Examples

MIN(5; 5; 5; 5; 6) returns 5.

The MINA function finds the smallest number in a series of values. In addition to numeric values, text values and the logical value FALSE count as 0, and the logical value TRUE counts as 1.

MINA(value; [value; ...])

values : series of numbers or numeric expressions or references to cells containing numeric or text expressions or boolean values. Text values are considered as zero.

Remarks

Text entered directly in arguments returns an error.

Examples

MINA(A1:C1), when cells A1:C1 contain -1, -10, hello, returns -10.

MINA(A1:C1), when cells A1:C1 contain 1, 10, hello, returns 0.

MINUTE

The MINUTE function extracts the minutes from a date or time.

MINUTE(date-time)

date-time: any valid Numbers date or time value.

Examples

MINUTE("6/4/88 11:59:22") returns 59.

TRIM

The TRIM function calculates the modified internal rate of return for a series of periodic movements. TRIM is the acronym for modified internal rate of return.

TRIM(movements, financing rate, reinvestment rate)

movements : expected cash movements. Values are ranges

or arrays.

financing rate: interest rate of cash movements.

reinvestment rate : reinvestment rate of positive movements.

Examples

TRIM({-5000; 2000; 4000; -2000; 5000}; 0.1; 0.15) returns 19.66% (if using the percentage numeric format).

MOD

The MOD function calculates the remainder of a division.

If cells A1:D1 contain 1/1/2000, 1/1/2001, 0.1, 100 :

PRICEDISC(A1;B1;C1;D1) returns 90.

MOD(number; divisor)

number : dividend. It is a number, a cell reference, or the result of an arithmetic operation.

divisor: any number except 0. The sign of the result corresponds to that of the dividend, regardless of the sign of the divisor.

Remarks

When there is a positive remainder and a negative remainder, MOD returns the remainder that corresponds to the sign of the divisor.

When calculating MOD(a; b), the function returns a number r such that a = bk + r, where r is between 0 and b, and k is an integer.

MOD(a;b) is equivalent to a-b*INT(a/b).

Examples

MOD(6;3) returns 0.

MOD(7;3) returns 1.

MOD(8;3)returns 2.

MOD(-8;3) returns 1.

MOD(4,5;2) returns 0,5.

MOD(7;0,75) returns 0,25.

MODE

The MODE function searches for the most frequently occurring value in a series of numbers.

MODE(number; [ number; ...])

number : series of numbers, numeric expressions or references to cells containing numbers or numeric expressions.

Remarks

If multiple numbers appear multiple times in the arguments, MODE returns the first qualifying number.

If no value appears multiple times, MODE returns an error.

Examples

MODE(5; 5; 5; 5; 6) returns 5.

MODE(1;2;3;4;5) returns an error.

MODE(2; 2; 4; 6; 6) returns 2.

MODE(6; 6; 4; 2; 2) returns 6.

MONTH

The MONTH function extracts the month number from a date.

MONTH(date)

date-time: any valid date accepted by Numbers.

Examples

MOIS("6 April; 1988; 11:59:22") returns 4.

ROUND.TO.MULTIPLE

The ROUND.TO.MULTIPLE function rounds a number to the smallest multiple higher of a given factor.

ROUND.TO.MULTIPLE(number; factor)

number : number to round. It can be a numeric expression or a reference to a cell containing a numeric expression.

factor: Number whose multiples you want to round to.

Remarks

The size of the relative number is based on the magnitude (distance from 0).

The two arguments must have the same sign.

Examples

ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE(2;3) returns 3.

ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE(4;3) returns 3.

ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE(-4,5;3) returns an error.

NOT

The NOT function evaluates the truth value of an expression and returns the opposite. If the expression is true, the function returns FALSE; if the expression is false, the function returns TRUE.

NON(expression)

expression : logical or numeric expression.

Remarks

If expression is numeric, a value equal to 0 is interpretable as the value FALSE and any value different from 0 is interpretable as the value TRUE.

Examples

NOT(0) returns TRUE because 0 is interpreted as FALSE.

OR(A9; NOT(A9)) always returns TRUE because A9 and its opposite are always fresh.

NOT(OR(FALSE;FALSE)) has the behavior of a negative OR. In this case, it returns TRUE because no argument of the logical OR function is true.

NOW

The NOW function retrieves the current date and time from the computer's clock. Time zones are not taken into account.

NOW()

No arguments (parentheses are required).

Remarks

The date and time displayed are updated each time you open or modify the document.

How the date, time or both are displayed depends on the cell formatting. Refer to the "Using Date and Time Format" section on page 67 for more information.

You can use the TODAY function to extract the current date; the returned value is formatted so that the time, always set to 12:00 PM, is hidden.

Examples

If your document is updated on October 4, 2008, NOW() returns "October 4, 2008 10:47" unless the format of the cell containing the returned value is different.

NPM

The NPM function calculates the number of payment periods for a loan or investment with fixed payments and interest rate.

NPM(rate; payment; present value; [future value]; [type])

rate: interest rate per period.

payment: payment to be made per period.

present value: present value of the investment.

future value: optional; future value of the investment or remaining cash value after the last payment. If no value is provided, future value equals 0.

type: optional; indicates whether payments are made at the beginning or end of the period:

0 (or absence of value) means that payments occur at the end of each period.

1 means that payments occur at the beginning of each period.

Remarks

Make sure the rate is expressed per period. For example, if the interest rate is 10% per year and the payment frequency is monthly, the rate used in the function should be 0.1/12 (approximately 0.00833 per month).

Examples

NPM(0,1/12; -100,1000) returns 10.5 months, which can be rounded to 11, the repayment period of a loan of 1,000 Euros at an interest rate of 10% per year if you make monthly payments of 100 Euros.

NPV

The NPV function calculates the net present value of an investment based on a series of future cash flows, assuming the interest rate is fixed.

NPV(rate; value; [value; ...])

rate: fixed interest rate.

value: cash flows, such as payments (negative values) or income (positive values). Indicate the values in chronological order. The values can be expressed as ranges.

Examples

NPV(10%;-5000;0;10000;10000;10000) returns 16,007.04 (if using Currency format). The returned value indicates that the net present value of an investment of 5,000 Euros at an interest rate of 10%, followed by cash inflows of 0, 10,000, 10,000 then 10,000 Euros, is 16,007.04 after four years.

ODD

The ODD function rounds a number up to the next odd number.

ODD(number)

number : number to round. It can be a number, a numeric expression or a reference to a cell containing a numeric expression.

Remarks

To round to an even number, use the EVEN function.

Examples
ODD(1) returns 1.
ODD(2) returns 3.
ODD(2.5) returns 3.
ODD(-2.5) returns -3.
ODD(0) returns 1.

OFFSET

The OFFSET function returns a range of cells that is offset by the specified number of rows and columns relative to the specified base cell.

OFFSET(base; row-offset; column-offset; [rows]; [columns])

base: address of the cell from which the offsets are measured.

row-offset: number of rows from the base cell to the target cell. 0 means the target cell is on the same row as the base cell. A negative number means the target is to the left of the base.

column-offset: number of columns from the base cell to the target cell. 0 means the target cell is on the same column as the base cell. A negative number means the target is above the base.

rows: optional; number of rows to retrieve from the offset location. If no explicit value is provided, the default is 1.

columns: optional; number of columns to retrieve from the offset location. If no explicit value is provided, the default is 1.

Examples

OFFSET(A1;5;5) returns the value of cell F6 (the cell that is five columns to the right and five rows below cell A1).

OFFSET(G33;0;-1) returns the value of the cell to the left of G33 (value of F33).

OR

The OR function returns TRUE if an argument is true, FALSE otherwise.

expression: one or more logical or numeric expressions.

Remarks

If expression is numeric, a value equal to 0 is interpretable as the FALSE value and any value different from 0 is interpretable as the TRUE value.

Examples

OR(A1+A2<100;B1+B2<100) returns FALSE if the sums of the indicated cells are both greater than or equal to 100, and TRUE if at least one of the sums is less than 100.

OR(5;0;6) returns TRUE if at least one argument is non-zero.

PERCENTILE

The PERCENTILE function searches for the value in an interval corresponding to a particular percentile.

PERCENTILE(data; percentile)

data: range of cells containing the data.
percentile: percentile value to search for.

Examples

Let's take the following table:

CENTILE(A2:E2,0.5) returns 80, the 50th percentile of the interval.

CENTILE(A4:E4,0.5) returns 90, the 50th percentile of the interval.

PI

The PI function returns the approximate value of pi, the ratio of a circle's circumference to its diameter, with a precision of 15 decimal places.

PI()

Without arguments (parentheses are required).

Examples

PI() returns 3.14159265358979.

SIN(PI/2) returns 1, the sine of PI/2 radians or 90 degrees.

REMBOUR

The REMBOUR function calculates the fixed periodic repayment based on an interest rate, a number of periods, the present value, the future value, and the repayment type.

REMBOUR(rate; number of periods; present value; [future value]; [due])

rate: interest rate per period.

number of periods: number of periods.

present value: present value of the investment.

future value: optional; future value of the investment or remaining cash value after the last payment. If no value is provided, the future value is equal to 0.

due: optional; indicates whether payments are made at the beginning or end of the period:

0 (or absence of value) means that payments are made at the end of each period.

1 means that payments are made at the beginning of each period.

Remarks

To divide a payment into principal and interest, you can use the PRINCPER and INTPER functions.

Examples

REMBOUR(10%/12;36;10000;0) returns -322.67 i. The returned value indicates that a purchase of 12,000 Euros minus a payment of 2,000 Euros (i.e., an amount of 10,000 Euros) at an interest rate of 10% over 36 months requires a monthly payment of 322.67 i.

POISSON.DIST

The POISSON.DIST function uses the Poisson distribution to calculate the probability of occurrences of a specific number of events.

POISSON(events; mean; cumulative)

events : number of events for which you want to calculate the probability.

mean : known average rate of events.

cumulative : determines if the reported probability is cumulative :

TRUE calculates the probability that the specific number of events or a lower number of events will occur (also called cumulative probability).

FALSE calculates the probability that the specific number of events will occur (also called probability mass function).

Examples

For an average of 10 and an arrival rate of 8:

POISSON(8; 10; FALSE) returns 0.112599.

POWER

The POWER function raises a number, the base, to a power, the exponent. Produces the same result as the operator .

POWER(base; exponent)

base: number to raise to the power.
exponent: power to which you wish to raise the base number.

Remarks

The exponentiation operator ∧ allows raising a number to a power:

POWER(2; 3) gives the same result as 2 3 .

Examples

POWER(2, 3) returns 8.

POWER(2, 10) returns 1,024.

POWER(0.5, 3) returns 0.125.

POWER(100, 0.5) returns 10.

PRINCPER

The PRINCPER function calculates the principal repayment of a loan or payment for an investment over a given period based on a fixed periodic payment and interest rate.

PRINCPER(rate; period; number of periods; present value; [future value]; [due])

rate: interest rate per period.

period: periods for calculating the principal.

number of periods: number of periods during the life of the investment.

present value: present value of the loan or investment.

future value: optional; target future value if it is an investment. If no explicit value is provided, the default value is 0.

due: optional; indicates whether payments are made at the beginning or end of the period:

0 (or no value) means payments occur at the end of each period.

1 means payments occur at the beginning of each period.

Remarks

Verify that the interest rate is expressed per period. For example, if the interest rate is 10% per year and the payment frequency is monthly, the rate used in the function should be 0.1/12 (approximately 0.00833 per month).

Examples

To cover the principal part of the first payment for a loan of 1,000 Euros at 12% per year with settlements at the end of the month:

PRINCPER(0.12/12; 1; 12; 1000) returns -78.85 i.

PRICE

The PRICE function calculates the price of a bond for 100 i.

liquidation: liquidation date.

maturity: expiration date of the security.

rate: annual coupon rate.

yield: annual yield of the security.

value: redemption value at the maturity date. Expressed in par value of 100 Euros.

frequency: number of coupon payments per year

PRICE(liquidation; maturity; rate; yield; value; frequency; [number of days])
1 means annual payments.
2 means semi-annual payments (twice a year).
4 means quarterly payments (four times a year).
- day count: optional; indicates the number of days per month and the number of days per year used in calculations (sometimes called day count basis).
0 or absence of value corresponds to the 30/360 basis (30 days per month, 360 days per year).
1 corresponds to the actual day count basis (Number of calendar days).
2 corresponds to the actual/360 day count basis (number of days for each month but 360 days per year).
3 corresponds to the actual/365 day count basis (number of days for each month but 365 days per year).
4 corresponds to the 30E/360 day count basis (European 30/360 system).

Examples

If cells A1:F1 contain 1/1/2000, 1/1/2001, 0.05, 0.1, 100, 2:

PRICE(A1; A2; A3; A4; A5; A6) returns 95.35157.

PRICEDISC

The PRICEDISC function calculates the price of a discounted security.

PRICEDISC(settlement; maturity; discount; value; [day count basis])

settlement : settlement date.

maturity: security maturity date.

discount: discount rate.

value : redemption value at the maturity date. Expressed as face value of 100 Euros.

day count basis : optional ; indicates the number of days per month and the number of days per year used in the calculations (sometimes called day count basis).

0 or absence of value corresponds to the 30/360 basis (30 days per month, 360 days per year).

1 corresponds to the actual day count basis (calendar day count).
2 corresponds to the actual/360 day count basis (actual days for each month but 360 days per year).
3 corresponds to the actual/365 day count basis (actual days for each month but 365 days per year).
4 corresponds to the 30E/360 day count basis (European 30/360 system).

Examples

If cells A1:D1 contain 1/1/2000, 1/1/2001, 0.1, 100:

PRICEDISC(A1;B1;C1;D1) returns 90.
PRICEMAT

The PRICEMAT function calculates the price of a bond whose interest is paid at maturity.

PRICEMAT(settlement; maturity; issue; rate; yield; [day count])

settlement : settlement date.

maturity : maturity date of the security.

issue : issue date of the security.

rate : redemption value at the maturity date. Expressed as a nominal value of 100 Euros.

yield: annual yield.

day count : optional ; indicates the number of days per month and the number of days per year used in the calculations (sometimes called the day count basis).

0 or no value corresponds to the 30/360 basis (30 days per month, 360 days per year).

1 corresponds to the actual days day count basis (Number of calendar days).
2 corresponds to the actual days/360 day count basis (number of days for each month but 360 days per year).
3 corresponds to the actual days/365 day count basis (number of days for each month but 365 days per year).
4 corresponds to the 30E/360 day count basis (European 30/360 system).

Examples

If cells A1:E1 contain 1/1/2000, 1/1/2010, 1/1/1999, 0.1, 0.1:

The PROBABILITE function calculates the probability of a range of values if you knew the probabilities of the individual values.

PROBABILITY(values; probabilities; lower; [upper])

values: range of cells containing the values.

probabilities: range of cells containing the probability of each corresponding value in values. The sum of probabilities should equal 1 at most.

lower: lower limit of the range for which you want to determine the probability.

upper: optional; upper limit of the range for which you want to determine the probability. If this argument is omitted, PROBABILITY searches for the probability of the value represented by lower.

Examples

Consider the following table:

PROBABILITY(A1:A10;C1:C10;4;6) returns 0.3, corresponding to the probability that the value is 4, 5 or 6.

PROBABILITY(A1:A10; C1:C10; 5; 9) returns 0.5, corresponding to the probability that the value is equal to or greater than 5.

PROBABILITY(A1:A10; E1:E10; 4; 6) returns 0.59, corresponding to the probability that the value is 4, 5 or 6.

PROBABILITY(A1:A10; E1:E10; 6) returns 0.21, corresponding to the probability that the value is 6.

PRODUCT

The PRODUCT function calculates the product of the numbers provided by the arguments.

PRODUCT(number; [number; ...])

number: numbers, numeric expressions or references to cells containing numbers or numeric expressions.

Notes

Empty cells in the range are ignored and do not affect the result.

Examples

PRODUCT(2;4) returns 8.

The PROPER function replaces the first character of each word with a capital letter. All other characters are converted to lowercase.

PROPER(text)

text: text expression.

Notes

Any character following a non-alphabetic character is considered the first letter of a word. For example, any character following a hyphen is converted to uppercase.

Examples

PROPER("lorem ipsum") returns « Lorem Ipsum »

PROPER("lorem's ip-sum") returns « Lolom'S Ip-Sum »

PROPER("1a23 b456") returns « 1A23 B456 »

PV

The PV function calculates the present value of an investment, which is the present value of a series of future payments, based on a specific periodic interest rate over a given number of periods for a given amount. PV is the abbreviation for present value.

PV(rate; number of periods; [payment]; [future value]; [type])

rate: interest rate per period.

number of periods: number of periods.

payment: optional; payment to be made per period. If this argument is omitted, specify future value.

future value: optional; future value of the investment or remaining cash value, after the last payment. If this argument is omitted, future value has an implicit value of zero and you must specify payment.

type: optional; indicates whether payments are made at the beginning or end of the period:

0 (or no value) means that payments occur at the end of each period.

1 means that payments occur at the beginning of each period.

Examples

PV(10%;5;-100,5000) returns - 2 725.53 i, unless the format of the cell containing the returned value is presented differently. The returned value indicates that, to accumulate 5,000 Euros in five years with payments of 100 Euros at the end of each year, you would need to invest 2,725.53 Euros now at a rate of 10%.

QUOTIENT

The QUOTIENT function finds the integer quotient of two numbers, that is, the integer part of the quotient without the remainder.

QUOTIENT(dividend;divisor)

dividend: number to be divided.

divisor: number used to divide the dividend.

Examples

QUOTIENT(5; 2) returns 2.

QUOTIENT(-5;2) returns -2.

QUOTIENT(5.99; 2) returns 2.

QUOTIENT(6; 2) returns 3.

QUOTIENT(5; 6) returns 0.

RADIANS

The RADIANS function converts degrees to radians, the standard angle measurement used for trigonometric functions.

RADIANS(degrees)

degrees: numeric expression.

Examples

RADIANS(90) returns 1.5708 (90 degrees is approximately equal to 1.5708 radians).

RADIANS(57.2957795130823) returns 1 (1 radian is approximately equal to 57.296 degrees).

RAND

The RAND function generates a random number equal to or greater than 0 and less than 1.

RAND()

No argument (parentheses are required).

Notes

Each time you modify a value in the table, a random number is generated.

Examples

RAND() returns, for example, 0.67, 0.12, 0.8 and 0.9 after four new calculations.

RANDBETWEEN

The RANDBETWEEN function generates a random integer in the interval defined by the min and max arguments.

RANDBETWEEN(min; max)

min: lower number.
max: upper number.

Notes

Each time you modify a value in the table, a random number is generated.

Examples

RANDBETWEEN(1; 10) returns, for example, 7, 2, 9, 3 and then 9 at the end of each calculation.

RANK

The RANK function searches for the rank of a number in a range of numbers.

You can arrange the numbers in descending order or in ascending order.

RANK(number; range; [order])

number: number whose rank you want to find.

range: reference to the range among which you seek to determine the ranking of number.

order: optional: indicates whether the lowest or highest value has rank 1 in the range.

0 (or the absence of value) ranks the number as if the highest value had rank 1 in the table.

Any other value ranks the number as if the lowest value had rank 1 in the table.

Notes

Equal numbers are ranked in the same way, but each counts as a position in the rank. The next rank position is therefore not assigned to the next different number. As in sports competitions, in case of a tie for first place, the next competitor is ranked third and not second. See the examples.

Examples

Consider the following table:

RANK(20;A2:E8) returns 7.

RANK(20; A2:E2) returns 4 (50 coming first).

RANK(20; A2:E2; 1) returns 2 (10 coming first).

RANK(10; A4:E4) returns 5 (10 is the lowest value in the range).

RANK(5;A6:E7;1) returns 6 (because there are two 4s).

RATE

The RATE function calculates the interest rate needed for a present value to reach a given future amount over a specific period. If the present value or the term is zero, the function returns an error.

RATE(number of periods; [payment]; present value; [future value]; [type]; [guess])

number of periods: number of payment periods.

payment: optional; amount of the fixed periodic payment. If this argument is omitted, specify future value.

present value: present value of the investment.

future value: future value of the investment. In the absence of an explicit value, the default value is 0.

type: optional; indicates whether payments are made at the beginning or end of the period: 0 (or absence of value) means that payments occur at the end of each period. 1 means that payments occur at the beginning of each period.

guess: optional; initial rough estimate of the interest rate. In the absence of an explicit value, the default value is 10%. Try adjusting the guess if RATE does not return a result.

Examples

RATE(10*12;--5000,20000) returns 1.16% (if you use a fixed numeric format with a decimal precision of 4). The returned value indicates that a monthly interest rate of 1.16% (or annual rate of 13.9%) is necessary for the sum of 5,000 Euros to increase to 20,000 Euros in 10 years. The number of years is multiplied by 12 to determine the number of monthly payments.

REPLACE

The REPLACE function replaces part of a string with characters from another string. The text to replace is indicated by its length and position in the text.

REPLACE(current text; start; length; new text)

current text: text expression.

start: number indicating the position of the first character to replace.

length: number of characters to replace.

new text: replacement text.

Notes

It is not necessary for the new text to be the same size as the deleted text.

Examples

REPLACE("Hello Julie !";9;5;"Frank") returns « Hello Frank! ».

REPT

The REPT function produces text a given number of times.

REPT(text; count)

text: text to repeat.
count: number of repetitions of text.

Examples

REPT("*";5) returns *****.

REPT("ha";3) returns « hahaha »

RIGHT

The RIGHT function extracts the specified number of characters from the right end of the string.

RIGHT(text; [length])

text: text expression.

length: optional; number of characters to retrieve. In the absence of an explicit value, one character is extracted.

Examples

RIGHT("one two three"; 2) returns « is »

RIGHT("abc") returns « c »

ROMAN

The ROMAN function converts a number to Roman numerals.

ROMAN(number; [style])

number: Arabic numeral to convert. Must be positive and less than 4000.

style: optional; determines the level of compliance in applying the classic rules used for forming Roman numerals:

0 (or TRUE or no value) means that the strictest rules are used. When a smaller numeral precedes a larger numeral to indicate subtraction, the smaller must be a power of 10 and can precede a number that does not exceed 10 times its size. For example, 999 is represented by CMXCIX, not LMVLIV.

1 relaxes the strict classic rules by one degree. When a smaller number precedes a larger number, it is not necessary that the smaller number be a power of 10 and the relative size rule is extended by one numeral. For example, 999 can be represented by LMVLIV, not XMIX.
2 relaxes the strict classic rules by two degrees. When a smaller number precedes a larger number, the relative size rule is extended by two numerals. For example, 999 can be represented by XMIX, not VMIV.
3 relaxes the strict classic rules by three degrees. When a smaller number precedes a larger number, the relative size rule is extended by two numerals. For example, 999 can be represented by VMIV, not IM.
4 or FALSE relaxes the strict classic rules by four degrees. When a smaller number precedes a larger number, the relative size rule is extended by two numerals. For example, 999 can be represented by IM.

Examples
ROMAN(12) returns XII.
ROMAN(999) returns CMXCIX.
ROMAN(999;1) returns LMVLIV.
ROMAN(999;2) returns XMIX.
ROMAN(999;3) returns VMIV.
ROMAN(999;4) returns IM.

ROUND

The ROUND function rounds a number to the specified number of decimal places.

number: number to round. It can be a numeric expression in the function or a reference to a cell containing a numeric expression.

decimals: number of decimal places after the decimal point for rounding. A positive number represents the decimal digits to the right of the decimal point. A negative number indicates digits to the left of the decimal separator (units, tens, hundreds, etc.).

Notes

Other functions associated with rounding numbers: CEILING, INT, ROUNDUP, ROUNDDOWN, TRUNC.

Examples
ROUND(1.49;0) returns 1.
ROUND(1.50;0) returns 2.
ROUND(1.23456;3) returns 1.35.
ROUND(1111.222;-2) returns 1100.
ROUND(-2.2;0) returns -2.
ROUND(-2.8;0) returns -3.

ROUNDDOWN

The ROUNDDOWN function rounds a number down to the specified number of decimal places.

ROUNDDOWN(number; decimals)

number: number to round. It can be a numeric expression in the function or a reference to a cell containing a numeric expression.

decimals: number of decimal places in the result after the decimal point. A positive number represents the decimal digits to the right of the decimal point. A negative number indicates digits to the left of the decimal separator (units, tens, hundreds, etc.).

Notes

Other functions associated with rounding numbers: CEILING, INT, ROUND, ROUNDUP, TRUNC.

Examples

ROUNDDOWN(1.49;0) returns 1.

ROUNDDOWN(1.50;0) returns 1.

ROUNDDOWN(1.23456;3) returns 1.234.

ROUNDDOWN(1111.222;2) returns 1100.

ROUNDDOWN(-2.2;0) returns -2.

ROUNDDOWN(-2.8;0) returns -2.

ROUNDUP

The ROUNDUP function rounds a number up to the specified number of decimal places.

number: number to round. It can be a number, a numeric expression, or a reference to a cell containing a numeric expression.

decimals: number of decimal places in the result after the decimal point. A positive number represents the decimal digits to the right of the decimal point. A negative number indicates digits to the left of the decimal separator (units, tens, hundreds, etc.).

Notes

Other functions associated with rounding numbers: CEILING, INT, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, TRUNC.

Examples

ROUNDUP(1.49;0) returns 2.

ROUNDUP(1.50;0) returns 2.

ROUNDUP(1.23456;3) returns 1.35.

ROUNDUP(1111.222;-2) returns 1200.

ROUNDUP(-2.2;0) returns -3.

ROUNDUP(-2.8;0) returns -3.

ROW

The ROW function returns the row number of the specified cell.

ROW([cell])

cell: optional; reference to a cell. In the absence of this argument, the ROW function returns the row number of the cell in which it resides.

Examples

ROW(B7) returns 7, row number 7.

ROW() returns the absolute row number of the cell containing the function.

ROWS

The ROWS function counts the number of rows in the specified cell range.

ROWS(cell range)

cell range: reference to a range of cells.

Notes

If you select an entire column for the cell range, Numbers returns the total number of cells in the column, which is modified when you resize the table.

Examples

ROWS(A11:D20) returns 10, number of rows 11 to 20.

ROWS(D:D) returns the total number of rows in column D.

SEARCH

The SEARCH function searches for the starting position of a string within another, without taking into account uppercase characters but accepting wildcard characters.

SEARCH(search; text; [start])

search: string to search for. You can include an asterisk (*) to search for any number of characters or a question mark (?) to search for any character.

text: text in which you want to search for the string.

start: optional; number indicating the position of the text from which you want to start the search. If the argument is omitted, the search begins at the beginning of the text.

Examples

SEARCH("ra"; "abracadabra") returns 3; the first occurrence of the string « ra » starts at the third character of « abracadabra »

SEARCH("ra"; "abracadabra"; 5) returns 10, position of the first occurrence of the string « ra » when you start the search from position 5.

SECOND

The SECOND function extracts the seconds from a date.

SECOND(date-time)

date-time: any valid Numbers date or time value.

Examples

SECOND("6/4/88 11:59:22") returns 22.

SIGN

The SIGN function returns 1 if the argument number is positive, -1 if it is negative, and 0 if it is zero.

SIGN(number)

number: number whose sign you want to find. It can be a reference to a cell containing a number.

Examples

SIGN(2) returns 1.

SIGN(0) returns 0.

SIGN(-2) returns -1.

SIGN(A4) returns -1 if cell A4 contains -2.

SIN

The SIN function calculates the sine of an angle expressed in radians.

SIN(radian-angle)

angle-radians: angle in radians.

Notes

If you measure angles in degrees rather than radians, use the RADIANS function to convert degrees to radians for the SIN function.

If you want to express radians as a multiple of pi, you can use the PI() function to provide a value of pi.

Examples

SIN(1) returns 0.841470985, sine of 1 radian (approximately 57.3 degrees).

SIN(RADIANS(30)) returns 0.5, sine of 30 degrees.

SIN(PI/2) returns 1, the sine of PI/2 radians (90 degrees).

SINH

The SINH function calculates the hyperbolic sine of the given number.

SINH(number)

number: any number.

Examples

SINH(0) returns 0.

SINH(1) returns 1,175.

SINH(5) returns 74,203.

SINH(10) returns 11 013,233.

AMORLIN

The AMORLIN function calculates the straight-line depreciation of an asset.

SLN(cost; salvage; life)

cost: cost or original value of the asset.

salvage: salvage value of the asset.

life: number of periods for straight-line depreciation.

Examples

AMORLIN(10000; 1000; 6) returns 1500, annual depreciation in Euros of an asset that initially costs 10,000 Euros but is worth only 1,000 Euros after six years.

SLOPE

The SLOPE function calculates the slope of the regression line of a series of data through linear regression analysis.

SLOPE(y-range; x-range)

y-range: range of cells containing the dependent variable y. Must be the same size as x-range.

x-range: range of cells containing the independent variable x. Must be the same size as y-range.

Notes

To find the y-intercept of the regression line, use the INTERCEPT function.

Examples

Take the following table:

A B C D E F
1 1 2 3 4 5 6
2 3 5 7 9 11 13
3
4 2.1 3.3 4.5 5.5 6.4 7.2
5 3.4 3.7 4 4.4 5.1 5.4
6
7

SLOPE(A2:F2;A1:F1) returns 2.

INTERCEPT(A2:F2;A1:F1) returns 1.

SLOPE(A5:F5;A4:F4) returns 0.402.

SMALL

The SMALL function retrieves the n-th smallest value from a range of values. The smallest value is ranked as number 1.

SMALL(range;rank)

range: range of cells containing the values.

rank: number representing the ranking of the value to return (1 corresponds to the smallest value, 2 to the next, and so on).

Notes

If rank is omitted, less than or equal to 0, or greater than the number of values in the table, an error is returned.

Exercises

Take the following table:

SMALL(A2:E2;1) returns 10, namely the smallest value in the table.

SMALL(A2,E2; 2) returns 20 which is the third smallest value in the table.

SMALL(A2:E2;5) returns 50, namely the largest value in the table.

SMALL(A1:A5;0) produces an error; rank must be greater than 0.

SMALL(A1:E5;6) generates an error; it is not possible to find the sixth value from five values.

SQRT

The SQRT function calculates the square root of a number.

SQRT(number)

number: non-negative numeric expression.

Examples

SQRT(16) returns 4.

SQRT(12.25) returns 3.5, square root of 12.25.

STDEV

The STDEV function calculates the standard deviation of a series of values based on the sample variance (unbiased). It is appropriate when the specified values represent only a sample of a larger population.

STDEV(number; [[number; ...])

number: numbers or references to cells.

Notes

The standard deviation is the square root of the variance returned by the VAR function.

If the values you are analyzing represent the entire data set or population, you can use the STDEVP function.

Cells that do not contain numbers are ignored. If you wish to include text values or booleans in the calculation, use the STDEVA function.

Examples

STDEV(5; 5; 5; 5; 6) returns a standard deviation of 0.447 based on an average of 5.2.

STDEV(1; 2; 3; 4; 5) returns a standard deviation of 1.58 based on an average of 3.

STDEV(1; 1; 1; 1; 6) returns a standard deviation of 2.24 based on an average of 2.

STDEV(2; 2; 4; 6; 6) returns a standard deviation of 2 based on an average of 4. Compare with STDEVP(2; 2; 4; 6; 6) which uses the population variance (true) to return a standard deviation of 1.79.

STDEVA

The STDEVA function calculates the standard deviation of a series of values, including text and boolean values, based on the sample variance (unbiased).

STDEVA(value; [value, ...])

value: numeric or boolean values, or references to cells containing numeric, text or boolean values.

Notes

Unlike the STDEV function which ignores cells that do not contain numbers, the STDEVA function assigns the value 0 to text values, the value 0 to the boolean value FALSE and 1 to the boolean value TRUE, in order to include these values in the calculation.

Direct entry of text generates an error. Reference to a cell containing text is estimated as null. You can enter boolean operators directly or as cell references.

For a dataset containing only numbers, the STDEVA function returns the same result as the STDEV function.

Examples

STDEVA(TRUE;TRUE;TRUE;TRUE;6) returns 2.24. Each TRUE value counts as 1.

STDEVA("a"; 3; 6; 3; "b") returns an error.

STDEVP

The STDEVP function calculates the standard deviation of a series of values based on the variance of their population (true). It is appropriate when the specified values are the entire population.

STDEVP(number; [number;...])

number: series of numbers or references to cells.

Notes

The standard deviation is the square root of the variance returned by the VAR.P function.

If the values you are analyzing represent only a sample of a larger population, you can use the STDEV function.

Cells that do not contain numbers are ignored. If you wish to include text values or booleans in the calculation, use the STDEVPA function.

Examples

STDEVP(5; 5; 5; 5; 6) returns a standard deviation of 0.4 based on an average of 5.2.

STDEVP(1; 2; 3; 4; 5) returns a standard deviation of 1.41 based on an average of 3.

STDEVP(1; 1; 1; 1; 6) returns a standard deviation of 2 based on an average of 2.

STDEVP(2; 2; 4; 6; 6) returns a standard deviation of 1.79 based on an average of 4. Compare with STDEV(2; 2; 4; 6; 6) which uses the sample variance (unbiased) to return a standard deviation of 2.

STDEVPA

The STDEVPA function calculates the standard deviation of a series of values, including text and boolean values, based on the population variance (true).

STDEVPA(value; [value; ...])

value: numeric or boolean values, or references to cells containing numeric, text or boolean values.

Notes

Unlike the STDEVP function which ignores cells that do not contain numbers, the STDEVPA function assigns the value 0 to text values, the value 0 to the boolean value FALSE and 1 to the boolean value TRUE, in order to include these values in the calculation.

Direct entry of text generates an error. Reference to a cell containing text is estimated as null. You can enter boolean operators directly or as cell references.

If the values you are analyzing represent only a sample of a larger population, you can use the STDEVPA function.

Examples

STDEVPA(TRUE;TRUE;TRUE;TRUE;6) returns 2. The TRUE value counts as 1.

STDEVPA("a"; 3; 6; 3; "b") returns an error.

SUBSTITUTE

The SUBSTITUTE function replaces a string with new text. You can replace individual characters, entire words or strings of characters within words. If a string repeats several times in the text, you can specify which occurrences to replace.

SUBSTITUTE(text; old; new; [occurrence])

text: text in which you wish to replace characters.
old: string of characters to replace.

new: string of characters that must replace the old one.
occurrence: optional; indicates which occurrence of the old string is replaced if there are several. If this argument is omitted, all occurrences of the string are replaced.

Examples

SUBSTITUTE("a b c d e f"; "b"; "B") returns "a B c d e f"

SUBSTITUTE("a a b b c", "a", "A"; 2) returns "a A b b c".

SUBSTITUTE("a a b b c","b"; "B") returns "a a B B C".

SUBSTITUTE("aaabbccc"; "bc"; "BC"; 2) returns "aaabbbbbcc".

SUM

The SUM function calculates the sum of a series of numbers. Numbers can reside in individual cells, in ranges of cells or be included directly as function arguments.

SUM(number; [number; ...])

number: numbers, numeric expressions or references to a cell or range of cells containing numbers or numeric expressions.

Examples

SUM(A1:A4) adds the numbers in four cells.

SUM(A1:D4) adds the numbers in a square table of sixteen cells.

SUM(A1:A4; 100) adds the numbers of four cells to 100.

SUMIF

The SUMIF function calculates the sum of a series of numbers but only includes numbers meeting specific criteria. The condition that determines whether each number is included can be performed on the number itself or on a corresponding value in a second range of values.

SUMIF(range; "criteria"; [sum-range])

range: reference to a range of cells containing the values to test. Must have the same dimensions as sum-range.

"criteria": any comparison instruction generating a logical value TRUE or FALSE

*sum-range: optional; reference to a range of cells containing the numbers to add. Must have the same dimensions as criteria. If this argument is absent, range is used.

Notes

For more information on comparison operators, refer to the section "Explanation of Comparison Operators" on page 105.

Examples

Take the following table:

A B C D E F
1 1 10 a b c
2 2 20 b c b
3 3 30 a a c
4 4 40
5 5 50 1 5 9
6 6 60 5 9 5
7 7 70 1 1 9
8 8 80
9

SUMIF(A1:A8, "<5") returns 10.

SUMIF(A1:A8; "<5"; B1:B8) returns 100.

SUMIF(D1:F3; "=c";D5:F7) returns 27.

SUMIF(B1:D1; 1) or SUMIF(B1:D1; SUM(1)) total all occurrences of 1 encountered in the range.

SUMPRODUCT

The SUMPRODUCT function calculates the sum of products of corresponding numbers in two or more ranges. The ranges must have the same dimensions.

SUMPRODUCT(range; range; [range; ...])

range: reference to a range of cells containing numbers or numeric expressions.

Notes

If a cell in one of the ranges contains a non-numeric value, it is not included in the calculation.

Examples

SUMPRODUCT(3;4) returns 12.

The SUMSQ function calculates the sum of squares of a series of numbers. Numbers can reside in individual cells, in ranges of cells or be included directly as function arguments.

SUMSQ(number; [number; ...])

number: number, numeric expression or reference to a cell or range of cells containing numbers or numeric expressions.

Examples

SUMSQ(3;4) returns 25.

SUMSQ(A1:A4) adds the squares of four numbers constituting a list.

SUMSQ(A1:D4) adds the squares of the 16 numbers in a square table of cells.

SUMSQ(A1:A4; 10) adds the squares of the numbers in four cells to 100.

SQRT(SUMSQ(3;4)) returns 5, using the Pythagorean theorem to find the length of the hypotenuse of a triangle based on sides of length 3 and 4.

AMORANN

The AMORANN function calculates the depreciation of an asset over a given period using the American Sum-of-Years Digits method.

AMORANN(cost; salvage; life; period)

cost: initial cost of the asset.

salvage: salvage value of the asset.

life: number of depreciation periods of the asset.

period: period for which to calculate depreciation.

Examples

AMORANN(10000; 1000; 9; 1) returns 1800, determined based on the depreciation value of an asset of 10,000 Euros after one year if the salvage value of the asset is 1,000 Euros after nine years.

T

The T function retrieves text from a cell. If the cell does not contain a string, T returns an empty string.

T(cell)

cell: reference to the cell from which you wish to extract text.

Notes

This function is included to allow you to use spreadsheets created with older spreadsheet applications.

Examples

If cell A1 contains "text" and cell B1 is empty:

T(A1) returns "text" and T(B1) returns nothing.

TAN

The TAN function calculates the tangent of an angle, that is the ratio of the sine to the cosine.

TAN(angle-radians)

angle-radians: angle in radians.

Notes

If you measure angles in degrees rather than radians, use the RADIANS function to convert degrees to radians for the TAN function.

If you wish to express radians as a multiple of pi, you can use the PI() function to provide a value of pi.

Examples

TAN(1) returns 1.557407725, tangent of 1 radian (approximately 57.3 degrees).

TAN(RADIANS(45)) returns 1, tangent of a 45 degree angle.

Examples

TAN(3*PI/4) returns -1.

TANH

The TANH function returns the hyperbolic tangent of a number.

TANH(number)

number: any number.

TANH(number)

number: any number.

Examples

TANH(0) returns 0.

TANH(1) returns 0.762.

TANH(5) returns 0.999909.

TANH(10) returns 0.999999996.

TIME

The TIME function converts the indicated time to a decimal fraction of a day expressed in 24 hours.

TIME(hours; minutes; seconds)

hours: number of hours (24-hour system).
minutes: number of minutes.

seconds: number of seconds.

TIME(hours; minutes; seconds)

hours: number of hours (24-hour system).
minutes: number of minutes.

seconds: number of seconds.

Notes

You can specify respective values of hours, minutes and seconds greater than 23, 59 and 59. If the hours, minutes and seconds exceed 24 hours, Numbers subtracts 24 hours as many times as necessary until the sum is less than 24 hours.

You can also specify fractional values for hours, minutes or seconds.

To convert a time expressed as a string, use the TIMEVALUE function.

Examples

TIME(12; 0; 0) returns 12:00.

TIME(16; 45; 30) returns 16:45.

TIME(0; 900; 0) returns 15:00.

TIME(60; 0; 0) returns 12:00.

Examples

TIME(4,25;0;0) returns 4:00.

TIMEVALUE

The TIMEVALUE function converts a time appearing in a string to a decimal fraction of a day expressed in 24 hours.

TIMEVALUE(date-time)

date-time: date, time or string expressed in any date and time format accepted by Numbers.

TIMEVALUE(date-time)

date-time : date, time or character string expressed in any date and time format accepted by Numbers.

Notes

To convert a time in Time format to a string, use the TIME function.

Examples

TIMEVALUE("6/4/88 12:00") returns 0.5 (noon representing half a day).

TIMEVALUE("12:00:59") returns 0.5007 (value rounded to four decimal places).

TIMEVALUE("18:00") returns 0.875 (18 hours divided by 24).

TODAY

The TODAY function extracts today's date and applies a format to the cell to display only the date (without the time). The time is always set to 12:00.

TODAY()

No arguments (parentheses are required).

Notes

The date is updated each time you open or modify the document.

You can also use the NOW function to retrieve the current date and time already formatted to display both.

Examples

If executed on April 6, 1988, the TODAY() function returns April 6, 1988.

TRIM

The TRIM function removes extra spaces from text. It removes all spaces before the first character, all spaces after the last character and all double spaces between characters to keep only single spaces between words.

TRIM(text)

text: text from which you wish to remove extra spaces.

TRIM(text)

text: text from which you want to remove extra spaces.

Examples

TRIM(" spaces spaces spaces ") returns "spaces spaces spaces"

TRUE

The TRUE function returns the boolean value TRUE. It is included to allow you to use spreadsheets created with old spreadsheet programs. To indicate the boolean value TRUE, simply type the word的真实 (without quotes) in a cell or a function argument.

TRUE()

No arguments (parentheses are required).

Remarks

Instead of using the TRUE() function, you can type the word TRUE directly in a cell or a formula.

Examples

TRUE() returns the boolean value TRUE.

AND(1;TRUE)) returns the boolean value TRUE.

AND(1;TRUE) behaves like the previous example.

TRUNCATE

The TRUNCATE function truncates a decimal number to a specific number of decimal places.

TRUNCATE(number; [decimals])

number: numeric expression indicating the number that you lze truncate.

decimals: optional; number of decimal places in the result after the decimal point. A positive number represents the decimal digits to the right of the decimal point. A negative number represents decimal positions to the left of the decimal point, which are replaced by zeros. In the absence of an explicit value, the default value is 0.

Examples
TRUNCATE(1.49;0) returns 1.
TRUNCATE(1.50;0) returns 1.
TRUNCATE(1.23456;3) returns 1.234.
TRUNCATE(1111.222;-2) returns 1100.
TRUNCATE(-2.2;0) returns -2.
TRUNCATE(-2.8;0) returns -2.

UPPER

The UPPER function converts text to uppercase.

UPPER(text)

text: text to convert to uppercase.

Examples

UPPER("a b c") returns "A B C"

UPPER("First") returns "FIRST"

CNUM

The CNUM function converts a number in Text format to a normal number.

CNUM(text)

text: number in Text format to convert.

Remarks

It is generally not necessary to use the CNUM function; Numbers converts numbers to text automatically. The CNUM function is included to allow you to use spreadsheets created with old spreadsheet programs.

Examples

CNUM("22") returns the number 22.

CNUM(RIGHT("Year 1953";2)) returns the number 53.

VAR

The VAR function calculates the sample variance (unbiased) of a set of values.

VAR(number; [ number; ...])

number: numbers, numeric expressions, or references to numbers or numeric expressions.

Remarks

The VAR function divides the sum of squares of deviations for the data points by one minus the number of values to calculate the sample variance (unbiased, as opposed to population variance or true variance). It is appropriate if the data points are only a sample of a larger data set. If the numbers provided constitute the entire data set, you must use the VAR.P function to calculate the population variance (true variance).

Examples

VAR(5; 5; 5; 5; 6) returns a variance of 0.2 with an average of 5.2.

VAR(1; 2; 3; 4; 5) returns a variance of 2.5 with an average of 3.

VAR(1; 1; 1; 1; 6) returns a variance of 5 with an average of 2.

VAR(2; 2; 4; 6; 6) returns a variance of 4 with an average of 4.

VARA

The VARA function calculates the sample variance (unbiased) of a set of values that includes text and boolean values. Text values and the boolean value FALSE are included as if they were the number 0, the logical value TRUE or 1.

VARA(value; [value, ...])

value: numeric or boolean values, or references to cells containing numeric, text, or boolean values.

Remarks

The VARA function divides the sum of squares of deviations for the data points by one minus the number of values to calculate the sample variance (unbiased, as opposed to population variance or true variance). It is appropriate if the data points are only a sample of a larger data set. If the numbers provided constitute the entire data set, you must use the VAR.P function to calculate the population variance (true variance).

For a data set containing only numbers, the VARA function returns the same result as the VAR function.

Examples

VARA(TRUE;TRUE;TRUE;TRUE;6) returns 5. The value TRUE counts as 1.

VARA("a"; 3; 6; 3; "b") returns an error.

VAR.P

The VAR.P function calculates the population variance (true) of a set of numbers.

VAR.P(number; [ number; ...])

number: numbers, numeric expressions, or references to cells containing numbers or numeric expressions.

Remarks

The VAR.P function divides the sum of squares of deviations for the data points by the number of values to find the population variance (or true variance), as opposed to sample variance or biased variance. It is appropriate if the data points constitute the entire data set. If the numbers provided are only a sample of a larger set of data, use the VAR function to find the sample variance (biased).

Examples

VAR.P(5; 5; 5; 5; 6) returns a variance of 0.16 with an average of 5.2.

VAR.P(1;2;3;4;5) returns a variance of 2 with an average of 3.

VAR.P(1; 1; 1; 1; 6) returns a variance of 4 with an average of 2.

VAR.P(2; 2; 4; 6; 6) returns a variance of 3.2 with an average of 4.

VARPA

The VARPA function calculates the population variance (true) of a set of values that includes text and boolean values. Text values and the boolean value FALSE are included as if they were the number 0, the logical value TRUE or 1.

VARPA(value; [value; ...])

value: numeric or boolean values, or references to cells containing numeric, text, or boolean values.

Remarks

The VARPA function divides the sum of squares of deviations for the data points by the number of values to calculate the population variance (or true variance), as opposed to sample variance or biased variance. It is appropriate if the data points constitute the entire data set. If the numbers provided are only a sample of a larger set of data, use the VARA function to calculate the sample variance (biased).

For a data set containing only numbers, the VARPA function returns the same result as the VAR.P function.

Examples

VARPA(TRUE; TRUE; TRUE; TRUE; 6) returns 4. The value TRUE counts as 1.

VARPA("a"; 3; 6; 3; "b") returns an error.

VDB

The VDB function (declining balance) calculates the depreciation of an asset over a chosen time interval, using the double declining balance method or another rate that you specify.

VDB(cost; recovery; life; start; end; [factor]; [no_exchange])

cost: initial cost of the asset.

recovery: recovery value of the asset.

life: number of depreciation periods of the asset.

start: first period for calculating depreciation.

end: last period included in the depreciation calculation.

factor: optional; number determining the depreciation rate. The higher the number, the faster the depreciation. If you do not specify a rate, the depreciation is based on the double declining balance method.

no_exchange: optional; indicates whether the function switches to straight-line depreciation when the value is greater than the amount from the variable declining method.

Examples

If cells A2:E2 contain 10,000, 1,000, 9, 0, 1:

VDB(A2; B2; C2; D2; E2) returns 2222.22, depreciation for the first year for an asset of 10,000 Euros with a lifespan of nine years at the end of which resale amounts to 1,000 Euros.

VDB(A2; B2; C2; 1; 2) returns 1728.40, depreciation for the second year.

VDB(A2; B2; C2; 8; 9; 2; FALSE) returns 339.20, depreciation for the last year if it is possible to switch to straight-line depreciation.

VDB(A2; B2; C2; 8; 9; 2; TRUE) returns 297.60, depreciation for the last year if it is not possible to switch to straight-line depreciation.

VDB(1000; 100; 4; 0; 1) returns 500.

CONSV

The CONSV function extracts a value from a range of columns by taking the column of values on the left and then a row and a column number to select a column in that row.

CONSV(search value, cell range, column, [exact match])

search value: value that you want to search for in the left column to determine a row.

cell range: range of cells containing the data. The left column contains the data to search; the remaining rows contain values to retrieve.

column: number indicating the relative column number of the cell from which you want to extract the value. The left column in the range is column 1.
exact match: optional boolean value; determines if an exact value is required:

TRUE, 1, or the absence of a value selects the column whose highest row value is less than the search value if no exact match is found.

FALSE or 0 returns an error if no exact match exists.

Examples

Consider the following table:

A B C D E F
1
2 0 A lorem 1
3 20 E ipsum 2
4 40 I dolor 3
5 60 O sit 4
6 80 U amet 5
7

CONSV(20;B2:E6;2) returns E.

CONSV(21;B2:E6;2) returns E.

CONSV("M"; C2:E6; 2) returns dolor.

CONSV("blandit";D2:E6;2) returns 5.

CONSV(21; B2:E6; 2; FALSE) returns an error because no value exactly matches 21 in the left column.

WEEKDAY

The WEEKDAY function converts a date to a number representing the day of the week, according to one of three number systems.

WEEKDAY(date-time; [number-system])

date-time: date in one of the accepted Date formats or reference to a cell containing the date in question.

number-system: optional; number indicating the day numbering method:

1 or absence of a value means that Sunday is day 1 and Saturday is day 7.
2 means that Monday is day 1 and Sunday is day 7.
3 means that Monday is day 0 and Sunday is day 6.

Examples

WEEKDAY("April 6 1988"; 1) returns 4 (Wednesday, the fourth if Sunday is considered the first day).

WEEKDAY("April 6 1988") returns the same value as in the previous example (number system 1 is used by default if this argument is not specified).

WEEKDAY("April 6 1988"; 2) returns 3 (Wednesday, the third day if Monday is considered the first day).

WEEKDAY("April 6 1988"; 3) returns 2 (Wednesday, day number 2 if Monday is considered day 0).

YEAR

The YEAR function extracts the year number from a date.

YEAR(date-time)

date-time: date or reference to a cell containing a date.

Examples

YEAR("April 6 1988") returns 1988.

YEAR(NOW()) returns 2006 if today's date is June 4 2006.

A

ABS, mathematical function 225

ACCRINT, financial function 225

ACCRINTM, financial function 226

ACOS, trigonometry function 227

ACOSH, trigonometry function 227

ADDRESS, lookup function 227

ADJUST, textile function 305

Adjust the image, window 192

RAND, mathematical function 285

RANDBETWEEN, mathematical function 286

Instant Alpha 191

AMORANN, financial function 301

AMORDEG, financial function 248

AMORLIN, financial function 294

YEAR, date/time function 311

undo changes 35

ROUND, mathematical function 290

ROUND.TO.MULTIPLE, mathematical function 273

ROUNDDOWN, mathematical function 290

ROUNDUP, mathematical function 291

ASIN, trigonometry function 229

ASINH, trigonometry function 229

ATAN, trigonometry function 230

ATAN2, trigonometry function 230

ATANH, trigonometry function 230

TODAY, date/time function 304

AVERAGEA, statistical function 231

Warnings, window 29

B

toolbar

customize 25

Format Bar 26

C

CAR, xyte function 233

characters in other languages 142

special characters and symbols

insertion 143

Address Book

adding contact data to a new table 202

adding contact data to an existing table 201

supported fields 199

table cells

enlarging to fit the data 61

adding images 74

adding checkboxes and other controls 70

adding comments 84

adding and editing content 58

controlling cell values with rules 73

defining rules 73

dividing into equal parts 81

filtering rows 86

merging adjacent cells into one 81

formatting borders 82

formatting numbers 63

resizing 61

auto-fill 74

selection 54

selecting a group of cells 56

selection of borders 56

sorting 85

using checkboxes and other controls 70

using numbers 60

using dates 61

using text 59

PERCENTILE, statistical function 277

CHOOSE, lookup function 233

CNUM, xyte function 306

CODE, xyte function 234

CORRELATION.COEFFICIENT, statistical function 237

COLUMN, lookup function 235

COLUMNS, lookup function 235

COMBIN, mathematical function 235

CONCATENATE, textile function 236

CONSV, lookup function 310

COS, trigonometry function 238

COSH, trigonometry function 238

COUPDAYBS, financial function 241

COVARIANCE, statistical function 245

CTXT, mathematical function 253

D

DATE, date/time function 245

DATEDIF, date/time function 246

DB, financial function 247

OFFSET, lookup function 275,276

DEGREES, trigonometric function 248

RIGHT, social function 289

E

AVERAGE.DEVIATION, statistical function 231

STDEVP, statistical function 297

EDATE, date/time function 250

Formula Editor 97

saving

undoing changes since the last save 35

with template images 34

copying a spreadsheet 37

automatic backup copy 35

as a template 36

spreadsheet 34

Spotlight 36

INT, mathematical function 259

headers and footers 42

TRIM, textile function 234

MATCH, lookup function 267

ISERROR, information function 262

ISODD, information function 263

ISEVEN, information function 262

ISBLANK, information function 261

AND, logical function 228

EURO, financial function 249

EXACT, text function 251

EXP, mathematical function 251

file export

as a CSV file 206

as an Excel file 206

as a PDF file 206

F

FACT, mathematical function 251

FALSE, logical function 252

Colors window 179

Inspector window 26

Typography window 144

closing a spreadsheet 37

spreadsheet

choice of a template 31

creation 31

defining the page format 42

opening 33

adjusting page orientation 44

adjusting margins 45

sheets

displaying and hiding tables and charts 38

adding and deleting 39

of content display 38

printing 203

renaming 40

reorganization 39

using sheets to organize a spreadsheet 37

visualization 38

multimedia files

adding a video series 196

adding sound 195

PDF files

creation in AppleWorks 194

creation in Excel 194

exporting to 206

using as images 194

star-shaped figure

adding 182

modification 187

polygon-shaped figure

adding 182

modification 188

figures

adding custom figures 182

adding pre-drawn figures 182

converting corner points to curve points and vice versa 186

manipulating points 184

text formatting in 159

modifiable 184

modifying the path of a curve 185

modifying the path of a straight segment 185

modifications of pre-drawn figures 186

cropping an image using the default mask (rectangular shape) 190

using the drawing tool 182

using as masks 191

pre-drawn arrows

adding 182

modification 187

functions

information 219

date and time 216

search 219

financial 217

logical 218

numerical 220

statistical 222

text 224

trigonometric 221

usage 106

overview 214

information functions 219

date and time functions 216

search functions 219

financial functions 217

logical functions 218

numerical functions 220

statistical functions 222

text functions 224

trigonometric functions 221

conditional formatting 73

supported image formats 189

supported multimedia formats 195

formulas

adding a formula to multiple cells 103

adding a quick formula 95

adding new formulas 97, 99

calculating arithmetic operations 104

basic calculation with values from the same column 96

basic calculation with values from the same row 96

saving or canceling changes 98, 99

functions 106

modification 98, 100

operators 104

performing instant calculations 94

deletion 96

using cell references 100

G

LEFT, text function 265

LARGE.VALUE, statistical function 264

charts

displaying axes and borders 120

showing and hiding a legend 118

adding labels and axis marks 120

adding data from multiple tables 115

adding descriptive text 125

adding 111

choosing a chart type 112

copying data in 114

interpreting data series 109

formatting 118, 126

formatting elements of a data series 124

formatting the value axis 122

formatting titles, labels and legends 125

setting up grid labels and graduation marks 123

modifying a chart type 117

modifying data 114

resizing 119

replacing a data series 116

repositioning a legend 118

rotation 119

3D charts

setting scene settings 132

modifying the display angle 132

bar and column charts

adding shadows 129

adjusting spacing 128

adjusting opacity 129

layer and line charts

adding shadows 130

scatter charts

defining axis settings 131

formatting symbols 131

line and layer charts

defining line color 130

formatting symbols 130

charts modifying the orientation of the representation

114

pie charts

displaying series names in 126

adding shadows 127

moving away individual portions 127

adjusting opacity 127

rotation 128

selecting individual portions 126

alignment guides

creating new guides 170

usage 169

curved quotes 144

H

HOUR, date/time function 256

1

images

automatic adjustment 193

histogram 193

inserting inside an object 180

hiding (cropping) 189

scaling 181

mosaic 181

automatic levels 193

adjusting exposure 193

adjusting brightness 193

adjusting sharpness 193

adjusting saturation 193

adjusting temperature 193

adjusting contrast 193

tint 182

ODD, mathematical function 275

importing a file

from other applications 33

by dragging it 33

supported file formats 33

via the menu 33

printing

choosing print layout options 204

defining the page format 42

laying out objects on pages 43

numbering pages 44

pagination of a sheet 41

adjusting page order 44

adjusting page orientation 44

adjusting color using ColorSync 205

adjusting margins 45

using headers and footers 42

using the Print dialog 203

INDEX, search function 258

INDIRECT, search function 259

Document Inspector 36,42

Graphics Inspector 124, 173, 174, 175, 176, 177, 178, 180, 181, 183

Links Inspector 160, 161

Measurements Inspector 43, 50, 51, 119, 128

Text Inspector 52, 59, 89, 140, 145, 146, 147, 149, 153, 158

QuickTime Inspector 196

Inspectors

opening 27

multiple opening 27

using for formatting 26

CONFIDENCE.INTERVAL, statistical function 236

INTPER, financial function 260

ISPMT, financial function 263

J

DAY, date/time function 247

L

HYPERLINK, search function 257

links

types of links 160

to a web page 160

to a pre-addressed email 160

hyperlinks

modifying link text 161

font smoothing 145

lists

bulleted 154

automatic generation 153

numbered 155

ordered (structures) 156

usage 153

LN, mathematical function 265

LOG, mathematical function 266

LOG10, mathematical function 266

POISSON.DISTRIBUTION, statistical function 278

MONDAY TO FRIDAY, date/time function 311

M

NOW, date/time function 274

MAX, statistical function 268

MAXA, statistical function 269

MEDIAN, statistical function 269

context menus 25,30

MID, text function 270

MIN, statistical function 270

MINA, statistical function 270

LOWERCASE, text function 267

MINUTE, date/time function 271

text formatting

creating shadows 141

modifying the horizontal alignment of the
text 146

modifying the vertical alignment of
text 147

modifying case 137, 144

modifying color 140

modifying paragraph background color 141

modifying inner margin 153

modifying size and appearance 134

adjusting character spacing 149

adjusting paragraph spacing 149

adjusting line spacing 147

adjusting paragraph indentation 152

MOD, mathematical function 271

MODE, statistical function 272

templates

choice 18

designing custom templates 208

saving a spreadsheet as a template 36

custom templates

creation 208

creating department content 211

defining default attributes 209

defining table styles 208

defining reusable tables 209

saving 213

MONTH, date/time function 273

AVERAGE, statistical function 231

N

media navigator 28

COUNT, statistical function 239

COUPONS.COUNT, financial function 244

COUPON.DAYS.COUNT, financial function 242

NEXT.COUPON.DAYS.COUNT, financial function 243

COUNTIF, statistical function 241

COUNTA, statistical function 240

LEN, text function 265

COUNTA, statistical function 239

PROPER, text function 283

numbers

Date and time format 67

fraction format 68

currency format 64

percentage format 65

scientific format 69

formatting numbers 63

NOT, logical function 273

NPM, financial function 274

page numbers

adding 42,161

0

objects

adding shadows 174

adding a custom figure 182

adding a pre-drawn figure 182

adding an image 189

adding a video sequence file 196

adding a sound file 195

adding colors and color gradients 178

adding reflections 176

alignment 168

copying 167

moving 167

duplication 167

rotating 172

modification 171

modifying stacking order 168

modifying border style 172

positioning 168

precise positioning 170

resizing 171

adjusting opacity 176

grouping and ungrouping 177

flipping 172

selection and deselection 166

deletion 167

locking and unlocking 178

operators

arithmetic 104, 105

comparison 105

INTERCEPT, statistical function 259

OR, logical function 276

drawing tool 182

formula tools 27

P

EVEN, mathematical function 250

Character Palette 143

dummy parameters 188

multimedia dummy parameters 188, 212

SLOPE, statistical function 295

SMALL, statistical function 295

GCD, mathematical function 255

PI, mathematical function 277

CEILING, mathematical function 232

FLOOR, mathematical function 253

LCM, mathematical function 264

Preferences 32, 35, 65, 101, 141, 142, 144, 145, 151, 153, 160, 161, 162, 168, 170, 172

FORECAST, statistical function 254

PRICEDISC, financial function 281

PRICEMAT, financial function 281

PPMT, financial function 279

PRICE, financial function 280

PROBABILITY, statistical function 282

PRODUCT, mathematical function 283

POWER, mathematical function 279

Q

QUOTIENT, mathematical function 285

R

keyboard shortcuts

displaying a list of shortcuts in help 30, usage 30

RADIANS, trigonometry function 285

RANK, statistical function 286

RANKS, search function 292

SEARCH, search function 266

text search 165

HLOOKUP, search function 255

Find and Replace dialog 165

rectangle with rounded corners

adding 182

modification 186

ruler

showing and hiding 151

using to define paragraph indents 152

using to define a new tab stop 151

using to modify a tab stop 151

using to delete a tab stop 152

PPMT, financial function 278

REPLACE, text function 288

MATCH, search function 292

REPEAT, text function 288

ROMAN, mathematical function 289

SEARCH, text function 292

S

SECOND, date/time function 293

Template Selector 18

template selector 32

IF, logical function 257

SIGN, mathematical function 293

SIN, trigonometry function 293

SINH, trigonometry function 294

SUM, mathematical function 299

SUMSQ, mathematical function 301

SUMIF, mathematical function 300

SUMPRODUCT, mathematical function 301

SQRT, mathematical function 296

STDEV, statistical function 296

STDEVA, statistical function 297

STDEVPA, statistical function 298

table styles

application 88

copy and paste 89

creation 90

modification 88

renaming 90

resetting to default style 89

SUBSTITUTE, text function 299

UPPER, text function 306

T

T, text function 302

tables

adding 47

adding color bands to rows 80

adding columns 76

adding rows 75

inside, using comments 84

assigning a name 51

formatting controls 70

copying tables between iWork applications 53

creating a footer row 78

creating a header row or column 77

moving 51

filtering (hiding) rows 86

formulas 91

options to hide rows or columns 79

predefined 52

resizing 50

resizing rows and columns 79

rearranging rows and columns 76

reusable, definition 52

selection 54

selecting a row or column 56

deleting rows and columns 77

using rows and columns 75

TAN, trigonometry function 302

TANH, trigonometry function 303

using rules to define 150

RATE, financial function 287

DISCOUNT.RATE, financial function 249

TIME, date/time function 303

TIMEVALUE, date/time function 304

text

adding 133

adding text boxes 157

in table cells 59

defining alignment, spacing and color 145

defining indents 152

defining tab stops to align
text 150

non-breaking space 163

formatting size and appearance 134

modification 133

column layout 158

selection 134

auto-substitution 162

using lists 153

text area bullets

adding 154

reorganization and modification 155

IRR, financial function 261

TRIM, financial function 271

TRUNCATE, mathematical function 305

FIND, text function 252

supported audio and video file types 195

supported audio file types 195

typography

modifying case 144

modifying baseline 144

modifying kerning 144

customizing text appearance 139

using ligatures 144

V

VALACT, financial function 284

NPV, financial function 275

VAR, statistical function 306

VAR.P, statistical function 308

VARA, statistical function 307

VARPA, statistical function 308

FV, financial function 254

VDB, financial function 309

spell checking

finding misspelled words 163

using spell check suggestions 164

Keyboard Viewer 141

TRUE, logical function 305

Z

AREAS, search function 229

zoom in and zoom out 21

Other manuals APPLE

Discover other manuals and user guides for the brand APPLE

APPLE

Licence de logiciel

GarageBand 8

APPLE

View the manual

APPLE

Mp3 player

iPod Nano 5th generation

APPLE

View the manual

APPLE

Smartwatch

Watch Series 8

APPLE

View the manual

APPLE

Licence de logiciel

Logic Pro X

APPLE

View the manual

APPLE

Mp3 player

iPod Nano 4th generation

APPLE

View the manual

Table of contents Click a title to access it

User Guide

Preface 16 Welcome to the Numbers User Guide

Chapter 1 18 Numbers Techniques and Tools

Chapter 2 31 Using a Numbers Spreadsheet

Chapter 3

Using Tables

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

Using Text

Chapter 8

Use of figures, graphics and other objects

Chapter 12

Welcome to the Numbers User Guide

This color PDF document provides complete instructions for using Numbers.

This chapter presents the windows and tools that allow you to manipulate Numbers spreadsheets.

Spreadsheet Templates

The Numbers Window

The Sheets Subwindow:

Aids for Viewing Spreadsheets

Zoom In and Zoom Out

The Sheets Subwindow

Print Preview

Alignment Guides

Styles Subwindow

The toolbar

To customize the toolbar:

The Format Bar

The Inspector Window

Here are different ways to open an Inspector window:

Formula Tools

The Media Browser

The Colors Window

The Font Panel

The Warnings Window

Keyboard shortcuts and context menus

To open a context menu:

Using a Numbers Spreadsheet

This chapter describes how to manage Numbers spreadsheets.

Creating, opening and importing spreadsheets

Creating a Spreadsheet

Importing a Document

Here are different ways to import a document:

Opening a Spreadsheet

Here are different ways to open a spreadsheet:

Saving Spreadsheets

Saving a spreadsheet

Undoing changes

Here are different ways to undo changes:

Automatic backup copy saving of a spreadsheet

Here are different ways to create and use a backup version:

Saving a spreadsheet as a template

Saving search terms applicable to a spreadsheet

Saving a copy of a spreadsheet

To save a copy of a spreadsheet:

Closing a spreadsheet without quitting Numbers

Using sheets to organize a spreadsheet

Viewing sheets

Adding and deleting sheets

Reorganizing sheets and their content

Renaming sheets

Dividing a sheet into pages

Setting the page format of a spreadsheet

To set the page format:

Using headers and footers

Organizing objects on the page

There are different ways to place objects on the pages of a selected sheet:

Adjusting Page Orientation

To set the page orientation of a sheet:

Adjusting the Page Order

To set the page order:

Page Numbering

To number the pages of a sheet:

Adjusting Page Margins

To set the page margins of a sheet:

This chapter explains how to add and format tables and cell values.

About Tables

Using Tables

Adding a Table

There are several ways to add a table:

Using Table Tools

There are several ways to manage table characteristics:

Resizing a Table

Moving Tables

Naming a Table

Defining Reusable Tables

To define a reusable table:

Copying tables between iWork applications

To copy a table from one iWork application to another:

Selecting tables and their components

Selecting a table

Selecting a single table cell

Selecting a group of table cells

Selecting a row or column

Selecting the borders of table cells

Using the content of table cells

Adding and modifying cell values

Using text in cells

Using numbers in cells

Using dates in cells

Displaying content that is too long for the cell

Formatting cell values

Using numeric format

Using currency format

Using Percentage format

Using Date and Time format

Using Fraction format

To define a fraction format for selected cells using the Cell Inspector:

Using Scientific notation format

To define a scientific notation format for one or more cells using the Cell Inspector:

Using Text format

Using a checkbox and other control formats

Cell value control

To define rules:

Adding images and colors to cells

Autofilling table cells

Using rows and columns

Adding rows

Here are different ways to add rows:

Adding columns

Rearranging rows and columns

Deleting rows and columns

Using a table header row or column

Using a footer row

Options for hiding rows and columns

To hide a row or column:

Resizing rows and columns

Here are different ways to resize rows and columns:

Alternating row colors

To alternate row colors:

Using table cells

Merging table cells

To merge table cells:

Splitting table cells

Formatting cell borders

To format table cell borders:

Copying and moving cells

Adding comments

Reorganizing tables

Sorting table cells

Here are different ways to sort:

Filtering rows

This chapter explains how to use table styles to quickly manage the appearance of tables and give them visual consistency.

Using table styles

Applying styles to tables

Modifying table style

Modifying attributes of a table style

Copying and pasting table styles

Using the default table style

Creating table styles

Renaming a table style

Deleting a table style

To delete a style:

This chapter explains how to perform calculations in table cells using formulas and functions.

Using formulas

Guided tour of using formulas

Performing instant calculations

To perform instant calculations:

Adding a quick formula

Basic calculation with values from the same row

Here are several ways to perform basic calculations from values found in the same column:

Here are several ways to perform basic calculations from values found on the same row:

Deleting a formula

To delete a formula from a cell:

Using the Formula Editor

You can open the Formula Editor in several ways:

Adding a new formula using the Formula Editor

To add a new formula using the Formula Editor:

Modifying a formula using the Formula Editor

To modify a formula:

Using the formula bar

Adding a new formula using the formula bar

Modifying a formula using the formula bar

Using cell references

Adding cell references to a formula

Here are several ways to add a cell reference to the insertion point in the text field:

Copying or moving formulas containing cell references

Here are some techniques for moving formulas:

Applying a formula to cells in a column or row at once

Error and warning management

Using operators

Calculating arithmetic operations

To add an arithmetic formula to a cell:

Explanation of arithmetic operators

Explanation of comparison operators

Using functions

To add a function using the Function Browser:

About charts

Adding a chart

Here are different ways to add a chart:

Modifying a chart

Modifying the plot orientation

To modify the plot orientation:

Modifying the data plotted on a chart

Adding data to a chart

Adding data to a chart from multiple tables

Deleting chart data

Replacing a data series

To replace a data series:

Deleting a chart

Here are different ways to delete a chart:

Moving a chart

Here are different ways to move a chart:

Changing the chart type

To replace a chart with another type:

Formatting the general attributes of a chart

Using a legend

Region 1

Region 2

Using a chart title

Resizing a chart

Rotating charts

Adding axis labels and tick marks

Displaying axes and borders

To display the axes and borders:

Using axis titles

Here are different ways to use an axis title:

Displaying data point labels

To format data point labels:

Formatting the value axis

To format the value axis:

Setting labels, grid and tick marks

To format the axis marks:

Formatting elements of a data series

Formatting titles, labels, and legends

To format the text of labels and legends:

Adding descriptive text to a chart

To add text:

Formatting specific chart types

Pie charts

Selecting individual slices in a pie chart

Here are different ways to select slices on a selected pie chart:

Displaying the series name in a pie chart

To display the series name in a pie chart:

Separating individual slices from the chart

Here are different ways to separate individual chart slices:

Adding shadows to pie charts and slices

To add shadows:

Adjusting the opacity of pie charts

Rotating 2D pie charts

Bar and column charts

Adjusting the spacing of bar and column charts

To adjust spacing:

Adding shadows to bar and column charts

Adjusting the opacity of bar and column charts

Area and line charts

Here are different ways to format area charts and line charts:

Scatter charts

Here are different ways to use a scatter chart:

3D charts

To define the 3D scene settings:

Adding text

Delete, copy, and paste text

Here are different ways to edit text:

Text selection

Formatting text size and appearance

Using the format bar to format text

Using the Format menu to format text

Applying Bold or Italic attributes to text using menus

To make text bold or italic:

Framing text using menus

To create framed text:

Underlining text using menus

To underline text:

Changing text size using menus

To change the text size:

Making text subscript or superscript using menus

To make text subscript or superscript:

Changing text case using menus

To change text case:

Using the Font panel to format text

To open the Font panel:

Simplifying Font panel use

Here are some tips for using the Font panel:

Changing fonts using the Font panel

To change the font of selected text:

Changing underline using the Font panel

To change the underline of selected text:

Adding strikethrough to text using the Font panel

To add strikethrough to selected text:

Changing text color using the Font panel

To change the color of selected text:

Changing the background color of a paragraph using the Font panel

Creating shadows on text using the Font panel

To add shadows to selected text:

Adding accents and special characters

Adding accents

To add accents:

Displaying keyboard layouts in other languages

To display keyboard layouts for different languages:

Entering special characters and symbols

Using curved quotation marks

To use curved quotation marks:

Using advanced typography features

To open the Typography window:

Adjusting font smoothing

To smooth fonts on the screen:

Setting text alignment, spacing, and color

Horizontal text alignment

Vertical text alignment

Adjusting line spacing

Adjusting spacing before and after a paragraph

Character spacing adjustment

To adjust the spacing between characters:

Changing text color

Setting tab stops to align text

Setting a new tab stop

Modifying a tab stop

To modify tab stops:

Deleting a tab stop

Text margins

Setting indents for paragraphs

To set indents using rulers:

Changing text margin in objects

To adjust the spacing between text and the inner edge of an object:

Setting indents for lists

Using bullet, numbered, and ordered lists (Outlines)

Automatic list generation

Using bullet lists

Using numbered lists

To add and format a numbered list:

Using ordered lists (Outlines)

To add and format an ordered list:

Using text boxes and shapes to make text stand out

Adding text boxes

To create a text box:

Presenting text in columns

Adding text to a shape

To add text to a shape:

Formatting a text box or shape

Using hyperlinks

Link to a Web page

To add a hyperlink that opens a web page:

Link to a pre-addressed email message

Modifying the text of a hyperlink

Inserting page numbers and other variable values

Automatic text substitution

To configure the automatic text substitution function:

Inserting a non-breaking space

Spell checking

Finding misspelled words

Using spelling correction suggestions

Find and Replace Text

This chapter describes the techniques for adding and modifying images, figures, sound, and other objects.

Selecting Objects

Copying and Duplicating Objects

Here are several ways to copy objects:

Deleting Objects

To delete objects:

Moving Objects

Here are several ways to move objects:

Moving an Object to the Front or Back

To move an object so it appears in front of or behind text or another object:

Aligning Objects

Aligning Objects Relative to Each Other

To align objects:

Uniform Spacing of Objects on the Page

To space objects uniformly:

Using Alignment Guides

To define alignment guides:

Creating Alignment Guides

To create an alignment guide:

Defining the Precise Position of Objects

To define the precise position of an object:

Modifying Objects

Resizing Objects

Here are several ways to resize objects:

Flipping and Rotating Objects

Here are several ways to change the orientation of an object:

Modifying border style

To modify the border style using the Graphics Inspector:

Framing objects

Adding shadows

To apply a shadow to an object using the Graphics Inspector:

Adding a reflection

To apply a reflection to an object using the Graphics Inspector:

Adjusting opacity

Grouping and locking objects

Grouping and ungrouping objects

To group objects:

Locking and unlocking objects

To lock objects:

Filling objects

Filling an object with color

To modify the fill color of an object using the Graphics Inspector:

Using the Colors window

To select a color:

Filling an object with an image

To fill an object with an image:

Using shapes

Adding a pre-drawn shape

Adding a custom shape

Editable shapes

Manipulating the points of a shape

Here are several ways to manipulate the points of a shape:

Modifying the curve trace

To redraw a curve:

Modifying the trace of a straight segment

To redraw a straight segment:

Converting corner points to curve points and vice versa

Modifying specific pre-drawn shapes

Modifying a rounded rectangle

To modify a rounded rectangle:

Modifying single and double arrows

Here are several ways to modify single and double arrows after selecting them:

Modifying a star

Here are several ways to modify a star:

Modifying a polygon

To modify a polygon:

Using multimedia placeholders

Here are several ways to use multimedia placeholders:

Using images

Importing an image

Masking (cropping) images

Cropping an image using the default rectangular mask

To crop an image using the default rectangular mask:

Masking an image with a shape

To mask an image with a shape:

Removing the mask from an image

To stop masking an image:

Removing background or unnecessary elements from an image

To remove unnecessary elements:

Changing brightness, contrast, and other image settings

To adjust an image:

Using PDF files as graphics

To convert an Excel or AppleWorks file to a PDF file:

Using sound and video

Adding an audio file

Adding a video file

Adjusting playback options for multimedia files

To set playback preferences:

Adding Address Book data to a table

Using Address Book fields

Mapping column names to Address Book field names

Adding Address Book data to an existing table

Adding data extracted from Address Book to a new table

Printing a sheet

To print a sheet:

Choosing layout options for printing

To select layout options:

Adjusting print color with ColorSync

Exporting to other document formats

To export a spreadsheet to another file format:

Sending a spreadsheet to iWeb

To send a spreadsheet to iWeb:

Designing your custom Numbers spreadsheet templates

This chapter is for people who want to create their own spreadsheet templates.

Designing a template

Step 1: Define styles for your tables

Step 2: Define reusable tables

Step 3: Define default tables, text boxes, shapes, and images

Defining default attributes for charts

To set the default attributes of charts:

Defining default attributes for text boxes and shapes

Defining default attributes for imported images

Step 4: Create starting content for the spreadsheet

Predefinition of tables and other objects for a custom model

Definition of placeholder multimedia parameters in a custom template

To create a placeholder multimedia parameter:

Predefinition of sheets for a custom template

Step 5: saving a custom template

This chapter describes the functions that can be used in cell formulas.

About functions

Date and time functions

Financial functions

Logical functions

Information functions

Reference functions

Numeric Functions

Trigonometric Functions

Statistical Functions

Text Functions

Function Descriptions

ABS

ABS(number)

Examples

ACCRINT

ACCRINTM

ACOS

ACOS(cosine)

Notes

ACOSH

ACOSH(number)

ADDRESS

ZONES

ZONES(intervals)

ASIN

ASIN(sin)

Remarks

ASINH

ASINH(number)

ATAN

ATAN(number)

ATAN2

ATAN(x;y)

ATANH

ATANH(number)

AVERAGE.DEVIATION

CEILING

CEILING(number; factor)

CHAR

CHOOSE

CLEAN

CLEAN(text)

CODE

CODE(text)

COLUMN

COLUMN([cell])

COLUMNS

COLUMNS(cell range)

COMBIN

COMBIN(elements;size)

CONCATENATE

CONFIDENCE.INTERVAL

CONFIDENCE.INTERVAL(alpha; standard-deviation; size)

CORRELATION.COEFFICIENT

COS

COSH

COUNT

COUNTA

NB.VIDE(range)

NB.SI

COUPONDAYSV(settlement; maturity; frequency; [day count])

COUPONDAYSNC

COUPNUM

COVARIANCE

COVARIANCE(range1; range2)

DATE

DATEDIF

DAY

DB

DEGREES

DEGREES(radians)

DISCOUNT RATE

EURO

EURO(number; [decimals])

EDATE

PAIR

PAIR(number)

EXACT

EXP

EXP(number)

FACT

FACT(number)

FALSE

FALSE()

RECHERCHER

RECHERCHER(target; string; [start])

CTXT

PLANCHER

PLANCHER(number; factor)

PREVISION

PREVISION(x;values-y;values-x)

VALFUT

PGCD

RECHERCHEH

HEURE

HEURE(date-time)

LIEN_HYPERTEXTE

LIEN_HYPERTEXTE(url; [link-text])

IF

INDEX

INDIRECT

INT

INT(number)

ORDONNEE.OrigINE

ORDONNEE.ORIGINE(range-y; range-x)

INTPER

IRR

ISBLANK

ISBLANK(cell)

ISERROR

ISERROR(cell)

ISEVEN

ISEVEN(number)

ISODD

ISODD(number)

Exercises

ISPMT

LARGE. VALUE

LCM

LEFT

LEN

LEN(text)

LN

LN(number)

LOG

LOOKUP

LOWER

LOWER(text)

MATCH

MAX

MEDIAN

MID

MIN

MINUTE

MINUTE(date-time)

TRIM

MOD

MOD(number; divisor)

MODE

MONTH

ROUND.TO.MULTIPLE

NOT

NON(expression)

NOW

NOW()

NPM

NPV

ODD

ODD(number)

OFFSET

OR

PERCENTILE

PI

PI()

REMBOUR

POISSON.DIST

POISSON(events; mean; cumulative)

POWER

POWER(base; exponent)

PRINCPER

PRICE

PRICEDISC

PRICEMAT

PROBABILITY(values; probabilities; lower; [upper])

PRODUCT

PROPER(text)

PV

QUOTIENT

RADIANS

RAND

RAND()

RANDBETWEEN

RANK

RATE

REPLACE

REPT

RIGHT

ROMAN

ROMAN(number; [style])

ROUND

ROUNDDOWN

ROUNDDOWN(number; decimals)

ROUNDUP

ROW

ROW([cell])

ROWS

SEARCH

SECOND

SECOND(date-time)

SIGN

SIGN(number)

SIN

SIN(radian-angle)

SINH

SINH(number)

AMORLIN

SLN(cost; salvage; life)

SLOPE

SMALL

SMALL(range;rank)

SQRT

SQRT(number)

STDEV

STDEVA

STDEVP

STDEVPA

SUBSTITUTE

SUM

SUMIF

SUMPRODUCT

AMORANN

T

T(cell)

TAN

TAN(angle-radians)

TANH

TANH(number)

TIME

TIME(hours; minutes; seconds)

TIMEVALUE

TIMEVALUE(date-time)

TODAY

TODAY()

TRIM(text)

TRUE

TRUE()

TRUNCATE

TRUNCATE(number; [decimals])

UPPER

CNUM

CNUM(text)

VAR

VARA

VAR.P

VARPA

VDB

CONSV

WEEKDAY

YEAR

YEAR(date-time)

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

1

J

L

M

N

0

P

Q

R

S

Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic

💬 Hi! I'm your manual assistant.I know your APPLE NUMBERS. How can I help you? (use, settings, error codes, maintenance, explaining a step from the manual, etc.)💡 Examples : • How do I use it ? • Error code E3 ? • How do I clean it ?

Waiting for your message

📷

Most frequently asked questions

How to insert page numbers in the footer of an Apple Numbers document?

How to select and use non-contiguous cells in Apple Numbers for calculations?

How to perform a conditional sum of a column in Numbers on Mac based on a specific value in the previous column?

How to repeat a table title on each page when printing in Apple Numbers?

How to create a dropdown list for all cells in a table in Apple Numbers?

How to insert and use a checkbox in a formula in Apple Numbers?

How to create a formula in Numbers to check if a year is a leap year?

How to automatically turn a cell red in Numbers when a date is 15 days from the current date?

What separator should be used between arguments in a formula in Numbers, a comma or a semicolon?

What date format should be used in cell A1 on Numbers for the formula to work correctly?

How to automatically calculate a date 6 months after a given date in Apple Numbers?

How to save a chart as a new style in Apple Numbers?

How to activate and use the 'Search in Selection' option in Apple Numbers?

How to limit search and replace to a specific column or row in Apple Numbers?

How to change the comment triangle color in Apple Numbers?

Product information

Brand : APPLE

Model : NUMBERS

Category : Spreadsheet

67	Using Date and Time Format
68	Using Fraction Format
69	Using Scientific Format
69	Using Text Format
70	Using a Checkbox and Other Control Formats
73	Controlling Cell Values
74	Adding Images and Colors to Cells
74	Automatically Filling Table Cells
75	Using Rows and Columns
75	Adding Rows
76	Adding Columns
76	Rearranging Rows and Columns
77	Deleting Rows and Columns
77	Using a Table Header Row or Column
78	Using a Footer Row
79	Options for Hiding Rows and Columns
79	Resizing Rows and Columns
80	Alternating Row Colors
81	Using Table Cells
81	Merging Table Cells
81	Dividing Table Cells
82	Formatting Cell Borders
83	Copying and Moving Cells
84	Adding Comments
84	Reorganizing Tables
85	Sorting Table Cells
86	Filtering Rows

87	Using Table Styles
87	Using Styles Applicable to Tables
88	Applying Styles to Tables
88	Modifying a Table Style
88	Modifying Table Style Attributes
89	Copying and Pasting Table Styles
89	Using the Default Table Style
90	Creating Styles Applicable to Tables
90	Renaming a Style Applicable to Tables
90	Deleting a Table Style

91	Using Formulas and Functions in Tables
91	Using Formulas
92	A Guided Tour of Using Formulas

94	Performing Instant Calculations
95	Adding a Quick Formula
96	Basic Calculation With Values in the Same Row
96	Basic Calculation With Values in the Same Column
96	Deleting a Formula
97	Using the Formula Editor
97	Adding a New Formula Using the Formula Editor
98	Modifying a Formula Using the Formula Editor
98	Using the Formula Bar
99	Adding a New Formula Using the Formula Bar
100	Modifying a Formula Using the Formula Bar
100	Using Cell References
100	Adding Cell References to a Formula
102	Copying or Moving Formulas Containing Cell References
103	Applying a Formula to Column or Row Cells at Once
103	Managing Errors and Warnings
104	Using Operators
104	Calculating Arithmetic Operations
105	Explaining Arithmetic Operators
105	Explaining Comparison Operators
106	Using Functions

108	Using Charts
108	About Charts
111	Adding a Chart
113	Modifying a Chart
114	Modifying the Chart Orientation
114	Modifying the Data Plotted on a Chart
114	Adding Data to a Chart
115	Adding Data to a Chart From Multiple Tables
115	Removing Data From a Chart
116	Replacing a Data Series
116	Deleting a Chart
116	Moving a Chart
117	Changing the Chart Type
118	Formatting the General Attributes of a Chart
118	Using a Legend
118	Using a Chart Title
119	Resizing a Chart
119	Rotating Charts
120	Adding Axis Labels and Tick Marks
120	Displaying Axes and Borders

To get information about	Refer to
Using Numbers tools and windows to create and format spreadsheets	chapter 1, "Numbers Techniques and Tools" on page 18
Creating and saving Numbers spreadsheets, as well as managing sheets and pages	chapter 2, "Using a Numbers Spreadsheet" on page 31
Creating, organizing, and formatting tables and their values	chapter 3, "Using Tables" on page 46
Using styles to modify the appearance of tables	chapter 4, "Using Table Styles" on page 87
Using formulas and functions to perform calculations in cells	chapter 5, "Using Formulas and Functions in Tables" on page 91
Creating charts to graphically display numerical data in one or more tables	chapter 6, "Using Charts" on page 108
Formatting text in a Numbers spreadsheet	chapter 7, "Using Text" on page 133
Using graphics, figures, sound and other elements to enhance a spreadsheet	chapter 8, "Using Figures, Graphics and Other Objects" on page 166
Displaying data from the Address Book in tables	chapter 9, "Adding Data from the Address Book to a Table" on page 198
Printing and exporting spreadsheets and sending them to iWeb	chapter 10, "Sharing Your Numbers Spreadsheet" on page 203
Creating custom Numbers templates	chapter 11, "Designing Your Custom Numbers Spreadsheet Templates" on page 208
Using functions available in table cells	chapter 12, "Function Dictionary" on page 214

Last Name	First Name	Phone Number	Email Address	Total Number of People	Confirmed	Comments
Dupont	Jean	(12) 34 56 78 90	no_reply@apple.com	3	✓
Lefranç	Claire	(12) 34 56 78 90	no_reply@apple.com	4	✓
Étienne	Jean-Claude	(12) 34 56 78 90	no_reply@apple.com	2	✓
Duroisin	Christine	(12) 34 56 78 90	no_reply@apple.com	3	✓
				Total	12
Drag and drop cards from the Address Book.

A	B	C	D
1	Loan 1	Loan 2	Loan
2 Principal Loan	30.000 €	30.000 €	30,00
3 Annual Rate	6,00%	7,50%	9,0
4 Duration in Months	60	60
5 Monthly Payments	580 €	601 €	74
6 Total Interest	4.799 €	6.068 €	5.83
7 Total Paid	34.799 €	36.068 €	35.83

To select	If the "Return key" option is selected	If the "Return key" option is not selected
The next cell on the right	Press the Tab key. If you press the Tab key when the last cell of a column is selected, a new column is added. If you add or modify data in the last column, press the Tab key twice to add a column.	Press the Tab key. If you press the Tab key in the last column, the first cell of the next row is selected. If you press the Tab key in the last cell of the table, a new row is added.
The previous cell	Press Shift and Tab simultaneously.	Press Shift and Tab simultaneously. If you press Shift and Tab simultaneously in the first cell, the last cell is selected.
The next cell below	Press the Down Arrow key or Return. If you used the Tab key to navigate between cells, you can use the Return key to select the next cell below from the cell where you started using the Tab key. If you press Return when the last cell of a row is selected, a new row is added. If you add or modify data in the last cell, press Return twice to add a row.	Press the Down Arrow key.
The next cell above	Press the Up Arrow or Shift + Return.	Press the Up Arrow key.

Data type	Ascending order	Descending order
Text	aA-zZ	Zz-Aa
Dates	Year (least recent first), then Month (January first) and Day (1-31)	Year (most recent first), then Month (December first) and Day (3-11)
Numbers	-2, -1, 0, 1, etc.	1, 0, -1, -2, etc.
Cells containing only text, combined with others containing only numbers	-2, -1, 0, 1, etc., then aA-zZ	Zz-Aa, then 1, 0, -1, -2, etc.
Cells containing a mix of text and numbers	Values starting with numbers first (1z, 1Z, a1, A1)	Values starting with text first (A1, a1, 1A, 1z)
Empty cells	At the bottom of the list	At the bottom of the list
Boolean (TRUE/FALSE)	Below text and above empty cell	Above text values

To perform this operation	Use this arithmetic operator	For example
Sum of two values	+	A2 + B2
Subtraction of two values	-	A2 - B2
Multiplication of two values	*	A2 * B2
Division of one value by another	/	A2 / B2

Use this type of link	To access	Remarks
Web page	A page in a Web browser	Specify the URL of the page you want to open.
Email message	A new email message with the specified subject and recipients	Type the recipient's address and a subject.

Address Book field names	Field name synonyms
Prefix	Title, name prefix
Last name	Last name
First name
Suffix	Name suffix, professional suffix, academic suffix
Nickname
Maiden name
Profession
Department	Department of employment
Company
Phone (first available number)
Phone (main)
Office phone
Home phone
Mobile	Mobile phone, cell phone, cellular phone, cellular
Home fax
Work fax
Pager	Beeper
Other phone
Email (first available address)	Email
Work email
Personal email
Other email
Web address (first available URL)
Work web address
Personal web address
Other web address
Birthday
Address Book field names	Field name synonyms
AIM (first available address)	Instant message, instant message alias, instant message name, instant message address, chat, chat alias, chat name, chat address
Professional AIM address	AIM (work), instant message (work), instant message alias (work), instant message name (work), instant message address (work), chat (work), chat alias (work), chat name (work), chat address (work)
Personal AIM address	AIM (home), instant message (home), instant message alias (home), instant message name (home), chat (home), chat alias (home), chat name (home), chat address (home)
Other AIM address	AIM (other), instant message (other), instant message alias (other), instant message name (other), instant message address (other), chat (other), chat alias (other), chat name (other), chat address (other)
Yahoo
Yahoo! address
Personal Yahoo! address
Other Yahoo! address
Address
Address (first available address)	Street
City (first available city)	Municipality
Region/Province (first available region/province)
Postal code
Country (first available country)
Professional address
Address (work)	Street (work)
City (work)	Municipality (work)
State (work)
Postal code (work)
Country (work)
Personal address
Address (home)	Home
City (home)	Municipality (home)
State (home)
Postal code (home)
Country (home)
Other address
Address (other)	Street (address)
City (other address)	Municipality (other)
State (other address)
Postal code (other address)	Postal code (other)
Country (other address)
Note	Notes

Term or symbol	Meaning
italic	Argument that you replace with an actual value or a reference to a cell containing a value.
[brackets]	Enclose an optional argument. If you omit an optional argument between other arguments, be sure to include the semicolon before the missing argument. For example, to omit the second argument, arg2, from a list of three arguments, you could enter FUNCTION(arg1;;arg3).
... (ellipsis)	The previous argument can be repeated as many times as needed.
integer	Number without decimal places.
logical expression	Expression that has a Boolean value TRUE or FALSE.
numeric expression	Expression that produces a number.
string	Contiguous sequence of characters.
text expression	Expression that produces a string.
date-time	Any Numbers date/time value. Even if you choose to display only the date or time in a cell, a Numbers Date/Time value can contain both the date and the time.

Function	Description
DATE (page 245)	Combines numeric values corresponding to the year, month, and day into a single date.
DATEDIF (page 246)	Determines the duration between two dates.
DAY (page 247)	Extracts the day number from a date.
EDATE (page 250)	Finds the date a certain number of months before or after a given date.
HOUR (page 256)	Extracts the hour from a date (between 0 and 23).
MINUTE (page 271)	Extracts the minutes from a date.
MONTH (page 273)	Extracts the month number from a date.
NOW (page 274)	Gets today's date and time from the computer's clock.
SECOND (page 293)	Extracts the seconds from a date.
TIME (page 303)	Converts an hour to a decimal fraction of a day expressed in 24 hours.
TIMEVALUE (page 304)	Converts an hour in a string to a decimal fraction of a 24-hour day.
TODAY (page 304)	Extracts today's date and formats the cell to display only the date (without the time)
WEEKDAY (page 311)	Converts a date to a number representing the day of the week.
YEAR (page 311)	Extracts the year from a date.

Function	Description
ACCRINT (page 225)	Calculates the total accrued interest on a security with periodic interest.
ACCRINTM (page 226)	Calculates the total accrued interest on a security payable at maturity.
COUPDAYBS (page 241)	Counts the number of days from the beginning of the settlement period of a security to its settlement date.
COUPDAYS (page 242)	Counts the number of days in the coupon period during which a security is settled.
COUPDAYSNC (page 243)	Counts the number of coupon days between the settlement date of a security and the end of the coupon period where settlement occurs.
COUPNUM (page 244)	Counts the number of coupons payable on a security between the settlement date and the maturity date.
DB (page 247)	Calculates the depreciation of an asset over a given period using the fixed declining balance method.
DDB (page 248)	Calculates the depreciation of an asset based on a depreciation rate that defaults to the double declining balance rate.
DISC (page 249)	Calculates the discount rate of a security.
FV (page 254)	Calculates the future value of an investment based on a series of additional fixed periodic payments, interest rate, and number of periods.
IPMT (page 260)	Calculates the interest portion of a loan or investment payment based on a fixed payment and fixed interest rate.
IRR (page 261)	Calculates the internal rate of return for an investment with a series of periodic cash flows.
ISPMT (page 263)	Calculates the interest due on a given payment period for an investment.
MIRR (page 271)	Calculates the modified internal rate of return for a series of periodic cash flows.
NPER (page 274)	Calculates the number of payment periods for a loan or payments for an investment with fixed payments and interest rate.
NPV (page 275)	Calculates the net present value of an investment based on a series of cash flows and a fixed interest rate.
PMT (page 278)	Calculates the fixed periodic payment based on a fixed interest rate, a given number of periods, present value, future value, and payment type.
PPMT (page 279)	Calculates the principal portion of a loan payment or investment payment based on a fixed periodic payment and fixed interest rate.
PRICE (page 280)	Calculates the current price of a security.
PRICEDISC (page 281)	Calculates the price of a discount security.
PRICEMAT (page 281)	Calculates the price of a security with interest paid at maturity.
PV (page 284)	Calculates the present value of an investment based on a series of fixed periodic payments and interest rate.
RATE (page 287)	Calculates the interest rate needed for a present value to reach a given amount over a specific period.
SL (page 294)	Calculates the straight-line depreciation of an asset.
SYD (page 301)	Calculates the depreciation of an asset over a given period using the American Sum-of-Years Digits method.
VDB (page 309)	Calculates the depreciation of an asset over a duration.

Function	Description
AND (page 228)	Returns TRUE if all arguments are true, otherwise FALSE.
FALSE (page 252)	Returns the FALSE value for compatibility with older spreadsheet applications.
IF (page 257)	Returns TRUE or FALSE depending on whether the specific expression is satisfied or not.
NOT (page 273)	Returns the inverse of the Boolean value of an expression.
OR (page 276)	Returns TRUE if an argument is true.
TRUE (page 305)	Returns the TRUE value for compatibility with older spreadsheet applications.

Function	Description
ISBLANK (page 261)	Returns TRUE if the specific cell is empty, and FALSE otherwise.
ISERROR (page 262)	Returns TRUE if the formula in the specific cell (or the function argument) reports an error, FALSE otherwise.
ISEVEN (page 262)	Returns TRUE if the value is even, and FALSE otherwise.
ISODD (page 263)	Returns TRUE if the value is odd, and FALSE otherwise.

Function	Description
ADDRESS (page 227)	Constructs a cell address string by specifying the identifiers of sheets, columns, and rows.
AREAS (page 229)	Counts the number of cell ranges in the argument.
CHOOSE (page 233)	Uses an index value to extract a specific value from a series of values.
COLUMN (page 235)	Returns the column number of a cell or the column number of the cell that contains the COLUMN function if no cell is specified.
COLUMNS (page 235)	Counts the number of columns generated in a cell range.
HLOOKUP (page 255)	Extracts a value from a range of rows using the values in the top row as a reference to determine the column, and the row number specified in the column.
HYPERLINK (page 257)	Creates a link that opens a web page or an email window.
INDEX (page 258)	Extracts the value in (or a reference to) the cell based on a given row and column in a cell range.
INDIRECT (page 259)	Extracts the value of a given address or the reference to it.
LOOKUP (page 266)	Extracts a value from a cell range based on a search match in a second range.
MATCH (page 267)	Searches for the position of a search value in a range.
OFFSET (page 276)	Extracts values from a given number of rows and columns from a base cell.
ROW (page 292)	Returns the row number of a cell or, if no cell is specified, the row containing the ROW function.
ROWS (page 292)	Counts the number of rows in a cell range.
VLOOKUP (page 310)	Extracts a value from a range of columns using the values in the left column as a reference to determine the row, and the column number specified in the row.

Function	Description
ABS (page 225)	Calculates the absolute value of a number.
CEILING (page 232)	Rounds a number up to the nearest multiple of a given factor.
COMBIN (page 235)	Finds the number of possible combinations of a specific number of grouped elements.
EVEN (page 250)	Rounds a number up to the nearest even number.
EXP (page 251)	Calculates e to the power of a number.
FACT (page 251)	Calculates the factorial of a positive number.
FLOOR (page 253)	Rounds a number down to the nearest multiple of a given factor.
GCD (page 255)	Calculates the greatest common divisor of a group of numbers.
INT (page 259)	Returns the largest integer less than or equal to a number.
LCM (page 264)	Finds the least common multiple of a series of numbers.
LN (page 265)	Calculates the natural logarithm of a number.
LOG (page 266)	Calculates the logarithm of a number in a specific base.
LOG10 (page 266)	Calculates the logarithm of a number in base 10.
MOD (page 271)	Calculates the remainder of a division.
ROUND.TO.MULTIPLE (page 273)	Rounds a number to the nearest multiple of a given factor.
ODD (page 275)	Rounds a number to the nearest odd number.
PI (page 277)	Returns an approximation of pi accurate to 15 decimal places.
POWER (page 279)	Raises a number to a power, such as the ^ operator.
PRODUCT (page 283)	Calculates the product of a series of numbers.
QUOTIENT (page 285)	Calculates the integer quotient (without remainder) of two numbers.
RAND (page 285)	Generates a random number greater than or equal to 0 and less than 1.
RANDBETWEEN (page 286)	Generates a random integer within an inclusive interval.
ROMAN (page 289)	Converts a number to Roman numerals.
ROUND (page 290)	Rounds a number to a given number of decimal places.
ROUND.DOWN (page 290)	Rounds a number down to the specified number of decimal places.
ROUND.UP (page 291)	Rounds a number up to the specified number of decimal places.
SIGN (page 293)	Returns 1 if the argument is positive, -1 if the argument is negative, and 0 if it equals zero.
SQRT (page 296)	Calculates the square root of a number.
SUM (page 299)	Calculates the sum of a series of numbers.
SUM.IF (page 300)	Calculates the sum of a series of numbers meeting a specific condition.
SUMPRODUCT (page 301)	Calculates the sum of the products of corresponding numbers in two or more ranges.
SUM.SQUARES (page 301)	Calculates the sum of the squares of a series of numbers.
TRUNCATE (page 305)	Truncates a decimal number to a given number of digits.

Function	Description
ACOS (page 227)	Calculates the inverse cosine (arccosine) between 0 and pi, expressed in radians.
ACOSH (page 227)	Calculates the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number.
ASIN (page 229)	Calculates the inverse sine (arcsine) in radians in the interval from -pi/2 to pi/2.
ASINH (page 229)	Calculates the inverse hyperbolic sine of a number.
ATAN (page 230)	Calculates the inverse tangent (arctangent) in radians in the interval from -pi/2 to pi/2.
ATAN2 (page 230)	Finds the angle, relative to the positive X-axis, of a line passing through the origin from a specific point.
ATANH (page 230)	Calculates the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number.
COS (page 238)	Calculates the cosine of an angle expressed in radians.
COSH (page 238)	Calculates the hyperbolic cosine of a number.
DEGREES (page 248)	Converts radians to degrees.
RADIANS (page 285)	Converts degrees to radians.
SIN (page 293)	Calculates the sine of an angle expressed in radians.
SINH (page 294)	Calculates the hyperbolic sine of a number.
TAN (page 302)	Calculates the tangent of an angle expressed in radians.
TANH (page 303)	Calculates the hyperbolic tangent of a number.

Function	Description
AVERAGE.DEVIATION (page 231)	Calculates the average difference (deviation) of data points from their arithmetic mean.
AVERAGE (page 231)	Calculates the arithmetic mean of a set of numbers.
AVERAGEA (page 231)	Calculates the arithmetic mean of a set of values including numbers, text, and boolean values.
CONFIDENCE.INTERVAL (page 236)	Calculates a value to create the statistical confidence interval of a sample with a given size from a population with a known standard deviation; assuming that the sample values are normally distributed.
CORRELATION.COEFFICIENT (page 237)	Calculates the correlation between two data series based on a linear regression analysis.
COUNT (page 239)	Counts the number of arguments and referenced cells containing numbers, numeric expressions, or dates.
COUNTA (page 239)	Counts the number of non-empty cells in a range of values.
COUNTBLANK (page 240)	Counts the number of empty cells in a range of values.
COUNTIF (page 241)	Counts the number of cells meeting a condition in a range of values.
COVARIANCE (page 245)	Calculates the covariance of two data series.
FORECAST (page 254)	Calculates the y value (dependent) corresponding to an x value (independent) by a linear regression analysis of known value pairs.
INTERCEPT (page 259)	Calculates the y-intercept of the regression line of a data series by a linear regression analysis.
LARGE (page 264)	Extracts the nth largest value from a range of values.
MAX (page 268)	Finds the largest number in a series.
MAXA (page 269)	Finds the largest value in a series including numbers, text, and boolean values.
MEDIAN (page 269)	Finds the median value of a series of numbers.
MIN (page 270)	Finds the smallest number in a series.
MINA (page 270)	Finds the smallest value in a series including numbers, text, and boolean values.
MODE (page 272)	Finds the most recurrent value in a series of numbers.
PERCENTILE (page 277)	Finds the value in a range corresponding to a particular percentile.
POISSON (page 278)	Calculates the probability rate of events according to Poisson's law.
PROBABILITY (page 282)	Calculates the probability of a range of values if you know the individual probability of each value.
RANK (page 286)	Finds the rank of a number in a range of numbers.
SLOPE (page 295)	Calculates the slope of the regression line of a data series by a linear regression analysis.
SMALL (page 295)	Extracts the nth smallest value from a range of values.
STDEV (page 296)	Calculates the standard deviation of a series of values based on the sample variance (unbiased).
STDEVA (page 297)	Calculates the standard deviation of a series of values, including text and boolean values, based on the sample variance (unbiased).
STDEVP (page 297)	Calculates the standard deviation of a series of values based on the population variance (true).
STDEVPA (page 298)	Calculates the standard deviation of a series of values, including text and boolean values, based on the population variance (true).
VAR (page 306)	Calculates the sample variance (unbiased) of a set of numbers.
VARA (page 307)	Calculates the sample variance (unbiased) of a set of values, including numbers, text, and boolean values.
VAR.P (page 308)	Calculates the population variance (true) of a set of numbers.
VARPA (page 308)	Calculates the population variance (true) of a set of values, including numbers, text, and boolean values.

Function	Description
CHAR (page 233)	Returns the character corresponding to a numeric Unicode character code.
CLEAN (page 234)	Removes from text most of the most common non-printable characters (Unicode character codes 0 to 31).
CODE (page 234)	Returns the Unicode code number of the first character of a given string.
CONCATENATE (page 236)	Concatenates strings.
EURO (page 249)	Converts a number to a string in the form of a sum in Euros with a given number of decimal places.
EXACT (page 251)	Returns TRUE if the argument strings are identical, including capitalization.
FIND (page 252)	Finds the starting position of one string in another, matching characters and case but excluding wildcards.
TEXT (page 253)	Rounds a number to a given number of decimal places and converts the result to a string.
LEFT (page 265)	Extracts the specified number of characters from the left edge of the string.
LEN (page 265)	Finds the number of characters in a string.
LOWER (page 267)	Converts all uppercase characters to lowercase.
MID (page 270)	Extracts characters from a string starting from a specific point.
PROPER (page 283)	Capitalizes the first character of each word in a string and converts all other characters to lowercase.
REPLACE (page 288)	Replaces part of a string with characters from another string.
REPEAT (page 288)	Repeats text a given number of times.
RIGHT (page 289)	Extracts the specified number of characters from the right edge of the string.
SEARCH (page 292)	Finds the starting position of one string in another, disregarding case but accepting wildcards.
SUBSTITUTE (page 299)	Replaces part of a string with new text.
T (page 302)	Gets the text from a cell.
TRIM (page 305)	Removes spaces in text to keep only single spaces between words.
UPPER (page 306)	Converts text to uppercase.
VALUE (page 306)	Converts a number in text form to a standard number.

	A	B	C	D	E	F
1
2	2.1	3.4		1	2
3	3.3	3.7		2	4
4	4.5	4		3	6
5	5.5	4.4		4	8
6	6.4	5.1		5	10
7	7.2	5.4		6	12
8

	A	B	C	D	E	F
1	100	200	300	400	500
2	lorem	ipsum	dolor	sit	amet
3	100	200	300	sit	amet
4	TRUE	TRUE	FALSE	FALSE	FALSE
5		200		400
6

	A	B	C	D	E	F
1	1	2	3	4	5	6
2	3	5	7	9	11	13
3
4	2.1	3.3	4.5	5.5	6.4	7.2
5	3.4	3.7	4	4.4	5.1	5.4
6
7

	A	B	C	D	E	F
1	1	2	3	4	5	6
2	3	5	7	9	11	13
3
4	2.1	3.3	4.5	5.5	6.4	7.2
5	3.4	3.7	4	4.4	5.1	5.4
6
7